JP2022060374A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To suppress a decrease in interest.

SOLUTION: When plural reservation storages are stored and a specific reservation storage is included in the plural reservation storages, a mode in which plural times of variable display performances are executed can be determined for a reservation storage before the specific reservation storage. When plural specific reservation storages are included in plural reservation storages, a performance mode can be determined for a reservation storage until a variable display performance is executed for the first predetermined reservation storage in which a variable display performance is executed first of all from among the plural specific reservation storages. A predetermined display performance executed in a variable display performance executed for plural times can be displayed over a variation display of a special pattern performed for one reservation storage and a variation display of a special pattern performed for the next reservation storage for a reservation storage before the first predetermined reservation storage.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 148

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable displayed symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to expect that a special game may be performed so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced (for example,). See Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-2469664

However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is displayed for the winning determination unit to the last, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the display effect is changing. There is a risk that the sense of anticipation for the variable display of the design will be lost, and at that point the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to suppress a decline in interest.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A display means (for example, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74) in which a variable display of a special symbol is performed based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied.
A holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can store up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information related to the special symbol as a holding storage, and
An effect control means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of controlling the variable display effect while the variable display of the special symbol is performed, and
An effect mode determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) capable of determining an effect mode for the hold memory stored by the hold means, and
With multiple production stages that can perform different productions,
Equipped with
The effect mode determining means is
In the first stage (for example, the secret A stage) of the multiple production stages
When a plurality of reserved storages are stored by the holding means, and the plurality of holding storages include a specific holding storage on which a predetermined expected effect (for example, reach variation effect) is to be performed. , A mode in which the variable display effect is performed a plurality of times (for example, a mode in which the provisional fluctuation is performed a plurality of times) by performing the variable display of the special symbol according to each reserved memory prior to the specific reserved memory. ) Can be determined,
When a plurality of the specific reserved memories are included in the plurality of reserved memories, the variable display of the earliest predetermined reserved memory in which the variable display effect is performed first among the plurality of specific reserved memories. It is possible to determine the mode of effect for the hold memory until the effect is performed.
The effect control means is
When a plurality of reserved storages are stored by the holding means and the specific holding storages are included in the plurality of holding storages, a predetermined display performed in the variable display effect performed over the plurality of times is performed. The effect (for example, the subtraction effect) is the variable display of the special symbol performed for one of the reserved memories before the earliest predetermined reserved memory, and the next hold of the one reserved memory. It is controllable to display over the variable display of the special symbol performed on the memory.
In a second stage (for example, a high-accuracy stage) different from the first stage (for example, a secret A stage) among a plurality of production stages.
A plurality of reserved storages are stored by the holding means, and the plurality of holding storages include a holding storage in which a specific display effect (for example, a black ink effect) different from the predetermined display effect is performed. If this is the case, a plurality of special symbols stored after the holding storage in which the specific display effect is to be performed after the variable display of the special symbol is performed according to the hold storage in which the specific display effect is to be performed. It is possible to perform a continuous effect (for example, look-ahead effect) on the hold memory of.
A special effect (for example, a character lamp effect) that is different from the predetermined display effect (for example, subtraction effect) and can be performed at different timings in the same variable display is provided, and the same variable display is provided. When the special effect based on the first effect selection information regarding the operation of the operating means is executed, the special effect based on the second effect selection information regarding the passage of time is not executed, while the operating means is within a predetermined period. When the special effect based on the first effect selection information is not executed because the operation is not performed, the special effect based on the second effect selection information is performed even though the operation means is not operated. It is characterized by being feasible based on the passage of a predetermined period.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

It is an example of the perspective view which shows the appearance in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the exploded perspective view which shows the appearance in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an example of the front view which shows the appearance of the game board unit in the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is an example which shows the external perspective view of the game board unit in the pachinko game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. This is an example showing a front exploded perspective view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from diagonally above to the right. It is an example of the front view which shows the LED unit including the 1st and 2nd special symbol display part. This is an example of a block diagram showing a main control circuit. It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the hit random number determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of a main control circuit 100. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of a main control circuit 100. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of a main control circuit 100. It is an example of the front view of the game board unit 17 which shows the mode that the game ball flows down the right side region when the blade member 4620 of a normal electric accessory 460 is open. This is an example of a front view of the game board unit 17 showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the right side region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed. It is an example of the front view of the game board unit 17 which shows the mode that the game ball flows down the left side region when the blade member 4620 of a normal electric accessory 460 is open. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176. It is an example of the rear view of the back unit 176. This is an example of a perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of a perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from diagonally above the left side of the back. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from diagonally above the left side of the back. This is an example of a rear perspective view of the attacker unit 500 viewed from diagonally above to the right. It is an example of the front view of the attacker unit 500. It is an example of the side view of the attacker unit 500. It is an example of the plan view of the attacker unit 500. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the attacker unit 500 viewed from diagonally above the front right. It is an example of the front view which shows the base member of the attacker unit 500. It is an example of the rear view which shows the front side plate part 520 of the attacker unit 500. It is an example of the front sectional view of the attacker unit 500. This is an example of an exploded cross-sectional perspective view of the attacker unit 500 viewed from diagonally above the front right. (A) An example of a plan view showing a large winning opening solenoid 620, (b) an example of a plan view showing a link arm 630, and (c) an example of a plan view showing a shutter 610. (A) is an example of a plan view showing the attacker unit 500 when the shutter 610 is in the second position, and (b) is also an example of a plan view showing the special electric accessory 600. (A) is an example of a plan view showing the attacker unit 500 when the shutter 610 is in the first position, and (b) is also an example of a plan view showing the special electric accessory 600. It is an example of the plan view which shows the special electric accessory 6000 which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. This is an example of a perspective view of the special electric accessory 6000 according to the second embodiment as viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the special electric accessory 6000 according to the second embodiment as viewed from diagonally above the front right. (A) An example of a plan view showing the accommodating portion 6001, (b) an example of a perspective view of the accommodating portion 6001 viewed from diagonally above right, and (c) an example of a rear perspective view of the accommodating portion 6001 viewed from diagonally above right. Is. (A) An example of a plan view showing the large winning opening solenoid 6003, (b) an example of a perspective view of the large winning opening solenoid 6003 viewed from diagonally above the front right, and (c) viewing the large winning opening solenoid 6003 from diagonally above right. This is an example of a rear perspective view. (A) An example of a plan view showing the link arm 6004, and (b) an example of a rear perspective view showing the link arm 6004 seen from diagonally above right. (A) An example of a plan view showing the regulating member 6005, (b) an example of a perspective view of the regulating member 6005 viewed from diagonally above right, and (c) an example of a rear perspective view of the regulating member 6005 viewed from diagonally above right. be. It is a front perspective view which showed the assembly structure of the special electric accessory 6000 without the accommodating part 6001. It is an example of the front perspective view which showed the assembly structure of the big prize opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004 and the regulation member 6005. It is an example of the rear perspective view which showed the assembly structure of the big prize opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004 and the regulation member 6005. (A) An example of a plan view showing an assembly configuration of a large winning opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004, and a restricting member 6005, and (b) an example of a diagram omitting the illustration of the link arm 6004 in (a). (A) An example of a plan view showing the assembly configuration of the large winning opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004, and the restricting member 6005 in the closed state, and (b) (a) is a diagram omitting the illustration of the link arm 6004. This is just one example. (A) A plan view showing the assembly configuration of the large winning opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005 when the driving force transmission unit 6034 of the large winning opening solenoid 6004 starts moving from the state shown in FIG. 61. As an example, it is an example of the figure which omits the illustration of the link arm 6004 of (b) (a). (A) A plan view showing the assembly configuration of the large winning opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005 when the driving force transmission unit 6034 of the large winning opening solenoid 6004 continues to move from the state shown in FIG. 62. As an example, it is an example of the figure which omits the illustration of the link arm 6004 of (b) (a). (A) A plan view showing the assembly configuration of the large winning opening solenoid 6004, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005 when the driving force transmission unit 6034 of the large winning opening solenoid 6004 continues to move from the state shown in FIG. 63. As an example, it is an example of the figure which omits the illustration of the link arm 6004 of (b) (a). (A) An example of a schematic plan view showing a state of being locked by the restricting member 6005, and (b) an example of a schematic plan view showing a state of being released by the regulating member 6005. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an exploded perspective view of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 as viewed from diagonally above the rear left. It is a figure which shows the ordinary electric accessory 460, the 2nd start port switch 441, and the accommodating member 443. It is a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460. This is an example of a rear view of an ordinary electric accessory 460 as viewed from diagonally above to the right. The mode of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the closed state (shown by the alternate long and short dash line) and the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the transition state from the closed state to the open state. It is an example of the rear view which shows the aspect (shown by a solid line). The mode of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the transition state (shown by the alternate long and short dash line) and the mode of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the open state (shown by the solid line). It is a rear view which shows. It is a rear view of the blade member 4620 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 for explaining the function of the flange connecting member 4646, and (A) the figure for explaining that the opening of the blade member 4620 is prevented, (B). It is a figure for demonstrating that opening of a blade member 4620 is allowed. It is an example of the front view of the upper front accessory 1000 in the normal aspect (the aspect when it is in the origin position). It is an example of the rear view of the upper front accessory 1000 in a normal aspect. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 as viewed from diagonally above the rear left. It is a front view which shows an example of the upper front part 1000 at the origin position. FIG. 3 is a front view showing an example of an upper front accessory 1000 in which the movable decorative body 1040 is moving downward. It is a front view which shows an example of the upper front part 1000 when the movable decorative body 1040 moves downward to the operation limit position. It is an example of the front view of the upper back accessory 1100 in the normal aspect (the aspect when it is in the origin position). It is an example of the rear view of the upper back accessory 1100 in a normal aspect. This is an example of a perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 as viewed from diagonally above the rear left. (A) is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 82, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of a portion X shown in (A). (A) is an example of a sectional view taken along line BB shown in FIG. 82, and (B) is an example of an enlarged view of a portion Y shown in (A). It is a figure which shows an example of the upper back accessory 1100 before the start of operation, that is, in the normal aspect (the aspect when it is in the origin position), (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode after the upper back part 1100 started the operation, and before the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach the limit position, (A) is a front view. (B) is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode when the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach the limit position, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. After the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 are operated to the operation limit position, the left side motor 1151 and the right side motor 1161 are further rotated, and the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 place the movable decorative body 1110 on the paper surface. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode when it operated downward (when the covering decorative body 1120 started the operation with respect to a movable decorative body 1110), (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. Is. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode that the covering decorative body 1120 moved to the operation limit with respect to the movable decorative body 1110, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is an example of the front view of the lower accessory 1200 in the normal aspect (the aspect when it is in the origin position). It is an example of the rear view of the lower accessory 1200 in a normal aspect. This is an example of a perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of a rear perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed diagonally from above on the left. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed from diagonally above the rear left. It is a figure which shows an example of the lower accessory 1200 in the aspect when it is in the origin position, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example of the lower accessory 1200 in the case of operating to an intermediate position, (A) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is a figure which shows an example of the lower accessory 1200 when it operated to the operation limit, (A.) is a front view, (B) is a rear view. It is an example of the front view of the upper corner accessory 1320. It is an example of the rear view of the upper corner accessory 1320. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 as viewed from diagonally above the rear left. It is an example in the rear view which shows the time when the 1st movable body 1330 and the 2nd movable body 1340 are in the origin position. This is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 start operating from the origin position. From the position shown in FIG. 107, it is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are further operated. This is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit position. It is a front view of the lower corner accessory 1350. It is an example of the rear view of the lower corner accessory 1350. It is an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 seen from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 as viewed from diagonally above the left side of the back surface. It is an example of the rear view which shows the time when the 3rd movable body 1355 and the 4th movable body 1357 are in the origin position. This is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 start operating from the origin position. This is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows the mode when all of the 1st movable body 1330, the 2nd movable body 1340, the 3rd movable body 1355 and the 4th movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position. The front view of the back unit 176 showing the mode when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit position and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position. This is just one example. The front view of the back unit 176 showing the mode when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position. This is just one example. It is an example of the front view of the side accessory 1400 in a normal aspect. It is an example of the rear view of the side accessory 1400 in a normal aspect. This is an example of a front view of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 viewed from diagonally above the rear left. FIG. 3 is a front view showing an example of a side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is a rear view which shows an example of the side accessory 1400 which a movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of a liquid crystal display device 16. It is a front view which shows an example of the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 advances most toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is a rear view which shows an example of the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 has advanced most toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is a rear view which shows an example of the side accessory 1400 when the side accessory motor 1440 is further rotated in the same direction from the state where the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. .. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. This is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 as viewed from diagonally above the rear left. (A) is an example of a front view of the second middle panel 1550, and (B) is an example of a sectional view taken along line CC shown in (A). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on processing by a main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the system timer interrupt processing by the main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the switch input detection processing by the main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start opening winning detection processing by the main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern determination process by the main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control main processing by a main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol control processing by a main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol memory check processing by the main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol display time management processing by a main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the time saving number subtraction process by a main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end interval processing by a main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the ordinary symbol control processing by a main CPU 101. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing by a sub CPU 201. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command analysis processing by a sub CPU 201. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the command transmission processing by a sub CPU 201. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a message setting process by a sub CPU 201. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the direct table registration process by a sub CPU 201. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the message transmission processing by a sub CPU 201. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the state transition of a plurality of game state stages. It is a figure which shows an example of the battle effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the concealment A stage 2002. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the scenario preset setting process by a sub CPU 201. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence relation between the battle attribute 2100 and the production map 2102. It is a figure which shows an example of the production map used for a scenario lottery. This is an example showing the setting of the provisional fluctuation for each hold of the first hold to the fourth hold together with the time sequence. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process (confidential A stage) which is repeatedly executed every predetermined time as a subroutine of the effect mode determination process. This is an example of a fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process (confidential A stage) which continues from FIG. 140. It is a figure which shows an example of the start memory which is held in the 1st hold to the 4th hold. It is a figure which shows an example of the start memory which is held in the 1st hold to the 4th hold. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process (confidential A stage) which continues from FIG. 142. It is a figure which shows the mode which blocks three temporary fluctuations. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect determination process (confidential A stage) which continues from FIG. 146. This is an example of a sequence of provisional fluctuations in a state where the first hold to the third hold are the targets of the scenario lottery. This is an example of a sequence of provisional fluctuations in a state where the first hold to the fourth hold are subject to the scenario lottery. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the modification when it is determined that there is a scenario effect being executed in step S326. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead effect selection process (high accuracy stage). It is a figure which shows an example of the pattern at the time of determining the section which performs the look-ahead effect. It is a figure which shows an example which selects the detail of a look-ahead effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the case where the detail of the look-ahead effect is a countdown effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the background change control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the background change continuous possible number of times determination processing. This is an example of a table related to background change control and background change scenario. It is a figure which shows the specific example for demonstrating the flow of the background change control processing which concerns on this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the fluctuation scenario determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a chance up control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending change determination process. It is a sequence chart which shows the lighting control of a character lamp. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control process of a character lamp effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the control of a full screen effect. It is a screen diagram showing an example of a screen display.

[Composition of gaming machines]
First, an overview of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 6. FIG. 1 is an example of a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an example of an exploded perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is an example of a front view showing the appearance of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 4 is an example showing an external perspective view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is an example showing an exploded perspective view of a gaming board unit in a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 6 is an example of a front view showing the LED unit including the first and second special symbol display units. Further, the direction shown in the drawing is the direction in front view. Therefore, for example, "left" in the right direction of the drawing is described as "left" in the front view because the drawing is a rear view. Similarly, in the case where "right" is described in the left direction of the drawing, the "left" on the drawing becomes the "right" in the front view for the same reason.

In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is defined with the front side as the front side and the back side as the rear side when viewed from the player. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player, the left-hand side is the left side and the right-hand side is the right side, and the left-right direction is defined. Further, the front surface is a surface on the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the player side, and the back surface is a surface on the side that can be visually recognized when viewed from the opposite side of the player.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 4, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a wooden frame 11, a base door 12, a glass door 13, a plate unit 14, a launching device 15, a liquid crystal display device 16, a game board unit 17, and a payout unit 18. It also includes a substrate unit 19.

The wooden frame 11 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in front view. The wooden frame 11 is provided with an opening 21 that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The base door 12 is fitted into the opening 21 of the wooden frame 11. The base door 12 supports various members. Specifically, the base door 12 supports the payout unit 18 and the substrate unit 19 on the back surface side, and the glass door 13, the dish unit 14, the launcher 15, the liquid crystal display device 16, and the game board unit 17 on the front surface side. Support.

The glass door 13 is pivotally attached to the base door 12 so as to be openable and closable. The glass door 13 is provided with an opening 22. A protective glass 23 having transparency is arranged in the opening 22 of the glass door 13. The protective glass 23 is arranged so as to face the game board unit 17, which will be described later, in the front-rear direction in a state where the glass door 13 is closed with respect to the base door 12. Further, a speaker 24 and a lamp 25 are arranged on the upper part of the glass door 13. The speaker 24 is, for example, a voice notification, an effect, an error notification, and the like. The lamp 25 is used for, for example, announcing with light, directing, and the like.

The plate unit 14 is a unit body in which the upper plate 26 and the lower plate 27 are integrated. The dish unit 14 is located in the lower front part of the base door 12 and below the glass door 13.

The upper plate 26 stores a game ball, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 26 is launched from the launching device 15 toward the game area 20 described later. The upper plate 26 is provided with a payout port 61 and an effect button 62. The rented game balls and the game balls to be paid out as prize balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26. The effect button 62 is a so-called "CHANGE button", a "push button", or the like. The effect button 62 is operated by the player.

The lower plate 27 is mainly for storing the game balls overflowing from the upper plate 26. The lower plate 27 is provided with a payout port 63. The game ball overflowing from the upper plate 26 is paid out to the lower plate 27 from the payout port 63.

The launching device 15 is for launching the game ball stored in the upper plate 26 toward the game area 20. The launcher 15 is located in the lower right front of the base door 12 and is located in the lower right of the dish unit 14. The launching device 15 includes a panel body 31, a driving device (not shown), and a launching handle 32.

The panel body 31 is integrated with the lower right portion of the dish unit 14 in the launching device 15. The firing handle 32 is arranged on the surface side of the panel body 31. The drive device is arranged on the back surface side of the panel body 31, and is composed of, for example, a firing solenoid. In this way, when the launch handle 32 is operated by the player in the launch device 15, the game ball is launched by the operation of the drive device in response to the operation.

The liquid crystal display device 16 displays the result of the hit determination and various effect images related to the game. The various effect images displayed in the display area of the effect display device 16 include, for example, an identification symbol (decorative symbol) for effect, an effect image according to the result of a big hit determination, an effect image during a big hit, and a demo effect image. , The number of times the variable display of the identification symbol is held is included. The liquid crystal display device 16 (more specifically, the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) is arranged substantially in the center of the game board unit 17 (inner peripheral side of the center rail 1742 described later).

In the present embodiment, one liquid crystal display device 16 is provided to display the various effect images, but two liquid crystal display devices are provided and the effect images are displayed using the two liquid crystal display devices. It may be displayed.

The game board unit 17 is arranged in front of the base door 12 so as to be located behind the protective glass 23. On the front side surface of the game board unit 17, a game area 20 in which the launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board unit 17 is arranged in a transparent panel 172 in which a game area 20 in which a launched game ball can roll and flow down is formed, and a substantially central portion of the game area 20. It includes a center unit 174, an ordinary electric accessory unit 400, an attacker unit 500, a passage gate 49, and a back unit 176. The center unit 174, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400, the attacker unit 500, and the passage gate 49 are provided on the front side of the transparent panel 172. The back unit 176 is provided on the rear side of the transparent panel 172.

The transparent panel 172 is formed with an opening 1722 at a portion where a display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 described later is arranged. As shown in FIGS. 3 and 5, a guide rail 26 is provided on the front surface of the transparent panel 172, and game nails and the like are planted. The game ball launched from the launching device 15 jumps out from the guide rail 26 toward the game area 20, collides with a game nail or the like, changes the traveling direction, and flows down toward the lower part of the game area 20.

The guide rail 26 is composed of two rail-shaped members (hereinafter, referred to as "outer rail 26a" and "inner rail 26b"). The game area 20 is partitioned (defined) by the guide rail 26. The inner rail 26b, together with the outer rail 26a, is for guiding the launched game ball to the upper part of the game area 20. The inner rail 26b is arranged inside the outer rail 26a on the left side of the transparent panel 172.

The center unit 174 is provided with a center rail 1742 above the opening 1722 of the transparent panel 172 (above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16), and is formed in an arc shape when viewed from the front. The center rail 1742 is arranged in the upper part of the game area 20, and divides the flow area of the game ball in the game area 20 into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742.

The game ball launched by the launching device 15 is divided into the left and right sides of the center rail 1742 and flows down the game area 20, and the game ball flowing down the game area 20 is planted in the game board unit 17 (specifically, the transparent panel 172). Due to a collision with the installed game nails, etc., it flows downward while changing the direction of travel. The flow area of the launched game ball is distributed according to the amount of operation of the launch handle 52. Specifically, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 52 is small, the launched game ball flows down the left region of the center rail 1742. On the other hand, when the amount of operation of the launch handle 52 is large, the launched game ball flows down the right region of the center rail 1742. The method of hitting the game ball to flow down to the left side area of the center rail 1742 is called "left-handed hitting", and the method of hitting the game ball to flow down to the right side area of the center rail 1742 is called "right-handed hitting". It is possible to distinguish by the player.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which a first starting port 5442, a large winning opening 540, and a special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is located at a substantially lower right portion in the game area 20 and below the passage gate 49.

The large winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a hit game state (large hit game state or small hit game state), which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is arranged in the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 47 to the upper plate 42 (or from the payout outlet 48 to the lower plate 44).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a large winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 7) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special winning opening 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. The open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610) is based on the result of the hit determination performed when the game ball wins in the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 described later, and the hit game state (big hit). It is performed when the game state (game state or small hit game state) is entered. The result of the hit determination performed when the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 described later is the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74. It is indicated by the stop display mode of.

The first starting port 5442 gives an opportunity for a hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and also causes the liquid crystal display device 16 or the first special symbol display unit 73, which will be described later, to display the result of the hit determination. Is to give. A first start port switch 5472 is arranged at the first start port 5442 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins in the first start port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472. When a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472, a hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 7), and a preset number of game balls are ejected from the payout port 61. It is discharged (discharged) to the upper plate 26 or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is performed by left-handed strike.

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is a unit body in which the second starting port 440, the out port 450, and the ordinary electric accessory unit 460 are integrated. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at a substantially left lower portion of the game area 20. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are arranged adjacent to each other, and the second starting port 440 is arranged on the right side in the front view and the out port 450 is arranged on the left side in the front view. Conventionally, many of the ordinary electric accessory units 400 are arranged below, for example, the first starting port 5442. However, in recent years, there has been a demand for a larger size of the liquid crystal display device 16, and it has become difficult to dispose of the liquid crystal display device 16 below the first starting port 5442. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged at a substantially left lower portion of the gaming area 20.

The second starting port 440 gives an opportunity for a hit determination on the condition that the game ball wins (passes), and also causes the liquid crystal display device 16 or the second special symbol display unit 74, which will be described later, to display the result of the hit determination. Is to give. A second start port switch 441 is arranged at the second start port 440 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins in the second starting port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second starting port switch 441. When a game ball is detected in the second start port switch 441, a hit determination is made inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 5), and a preset number of game balls are ejected to the payout port 61. It is discharged (discharged) from the upper plate to the lower plate 27 from the payout port 63. The difficulty of winning the second starting port 440 is determined by the ordinary electric accessory 460. As a general rule, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is performed by right-handed hitting.

Although the details of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described later, the blade member 4620 that can rotate to the right, the start port solenoid 4630 (see, for example, FIGS. 49 and 50) and the start port solenoid 4630 are powered by the blade member 4620. A power transmission mechanism 4640 (see, for example, FIGS. 49 and 50) is provided. The ordinary electric accessory 460 can shift (drive) between an open state in which the game ball easily passes and a closed state in which the game ball does not easily pass by driving the blade member 4620 by the start port solenoid 4630. It is composed of. When the game ball passes above the blade member 4620 while the blade member 4620 is being driven, the game ball either wins a prize in the second starting port 440 or is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the out port 450. Will be done. The opening / closing drive by the ordinary electric accessory 460 (blade member 4620) is performed only for a predetermined period and a predetermined number of times when the ordinary symbol has a specific stop display mode in the ordinary symbol display unit 71.

The passing gate 49 provides an opportunity for normal symbol determination on condition that the game ball wins (passes). The passage gate 49 is located on the lower right side of the center unit 174 and on the upper right side of the attacker unit 500. A passage gate switch 49a is arranged at the passage gate 49 (see FIG. 7). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 49, the passing game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a. When the game ball is detected by the passing gate switch 49a, a normal symbol determination is performed inside the pachinko gaming machine 1 (main CPU 101 shown in FIG. 2). The passing of the game ball to the passing gate 49 is performed by right-handed striking.

The attacker unit 500 is a unit body in which a first starting port 5442, a large winning opening 540, and a special electric accessory 600 are integrated. The attacker unit 500 is arranged at a substantially lower right portion of the game area 20. The reason why the attacker unit 500 is arranged in the substantially lower right portion of the game area 20 is that in recent years, it has been required to make the liquid crystal display device 16 larger, and various members such as the attacker unit 500 are arranged in the game area 20. This is because it is necessary to avoid such an enlarged liquid crystal display device 16.

The large winning opening 540 is a portion that can be opened in the case of a hit game state (large hit game state or small hit game state), which is a game state advantageous to the player. A count switch 541 is arranged in the large winning opening 540 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins in the large winning opening 540, the winning game ball is detected by the count switch 541. When a game ball is detected by the count switch 541, a preset number of game balls are paid out (discharged) from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout port 63 to the lower plate 27).

The special electric accessory 600 includes a shutter 610 that can move forward and backward, and a large winning opening solenoid 620 (see FIG. 7) that drives the shutter 610. The special electric accessory 600 is arranged above the large winning opening 540. The special electric accessory 600 is in an open state in which the shutter 610 is driven by the large winning opening solenoid 620 to enable (or easily) win a game ball in the large winning opening 540, and the special winning opening 540. It is configured to be able to shift (drive) to a closed state that makes it impossible (or difficult) to win a game ball. In the open drive by the special electric accessory 600 (shutter 610), the special symbol becomes a specific stop display mode in the first special symbol display unit 73 or the second special symbol display unit 74, and the hit game state (big hit game state or It is performed when the state is changed to the small hit game state).

The general winning openings 53, 54, and 55 are arranged at the lower left of the game board unit 17, and the general winning openings 56 are arranged at the lower right of the game board unit 17. Further, the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a are arranged in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56 (see FIG. 7). When a game ball wins in the general winning opening 53, 54, 55, 56, the winning game ball is detected by the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a. When a game ball is detected in the general winning opening switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a, a preset number of game balls are paid out from the payout port 61 to the upper plate 26 (or from the payout outlet 63 to the lower plate 27). (Ejected).

In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls in the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440 is 3, the number of prize balls in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, and 56 is 10, and the number of winning balls is 540. The number of prize balls is set to 15 respectively. This value (number of prize balls) can be arbitrarily changed in design.

The out port 57 is arranged at the lowermost center of the game area 20 (the most downstream position in the flow direction of the game ball). The out opening 57 is finally flowed in when the launched game ball does not win a prize in any of the starting openings or the winning openings.

The LED unit 70 is located at the lower right of the game board unit 17 and is arranged outside the guide rail 41. The LED unit 70 is a unit body in which various display units are integrated. Specifically, the LED unit 70 has, as the various display units, a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special. It includes a design hold display unit 75 and a second special symbol hold display unit 76.

The ordinary symbol display unit 71 displays the result of determination (ordinary symbol determination) for the ordinary symbol game. Here, the ordinary symbol game refers to a game in which it is determined whether or not to drive the ordinary electric accessory 460 to the open state based on the result of the determination (ordinary symbol determination). The ordinary symbol display unit 71 includes display LEDs 71a and 71b. When the predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LEDs 71a and 71b start the variation display that alternately turns on and off. The combination (display pattern) of the display LEDs 71a and 71b by turning on and off is displayed as a normal symbol. The display LEDs 71a and 71b perform a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the determination (normal symbol determination) is a hit, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 71a and 71b (special symbol) is a specific stop display mode. In this way, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, it is determined that the normal electric accessory 460 is in the open state, the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the second start port is opened. The difficulty of winning a game ball to 440 is changed.

The hold display unit 72 for ordinary symbols displays the number of times of execution of the variable display of the reserved ordinary symbol (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of hold of the variable display of the ordinary symbol"). The hold display unit 72 for ordinary symbols includes display LEDs 72a and 72b. The hold display unit 72 for a normal symbol displays the number of hold times of the variable display of the normal symbol by the combination of lighting and extinguishing of the display LEDs 72a and 72b. For example, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for one time, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned off. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for two times, the display LED 72a is turned on and the display LED 72b is turned on. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for three times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b lights up. Further, when the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended for four times, the display LED 72a blinks and the display LED 72b blinks.

The first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 display the result of determination (hit determination) for the special symbol game. Here, the special symbol game refers to a game in which the transition or maintenance of the gaming state is determined based on the result of the determination (hit determination).

The first special symbol display unit 73 includes a display LED group 73a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 73a performs variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 (starting winning), and displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 73a starts the variation display in which the eight LEDs repeatedly turn on and off. In the display LED group 73a, the combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 73a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is a hit, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 73a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the game state in which the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 5442 is referred to as the first special symbol.

The second special symbol display unit 74 includes a display LED group 74a composed of eight LEDs. The display LED group 74a performs variable display triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 (starting winning), and displays the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball. When the predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, the display LED group 74a starts the variation display in which the eight LEDs repeatedly turn on and off. In the display LED group 74a, the combination (display pattern) by turning on / off the eight LEDs is displayed as a special symbol. The display LED group 74a performs a stop display after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable display.

When the result of the hit determination based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is a hit, the combination of turning on / off the eight LEDs of the display LED group 74a (special symbol) becomes a specific stop display mode. .. In this way, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific stop display mode, the transition of the game state is determined, the shutter 610 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the game state in which the game ball can be won in the large winning opening 540. Become. In the following description, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display unit 74 based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 440 is referred to as a second special symbol.

In this way, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the specific stop display mode in the display LED groups 73a and 74a of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, it is normal. The transition from the gaming state (normal gaming state) to the hit gaming state, which is a state advantageous to the player, is determined. In the present embodiment, the hit determination includes a big hit determination and a small hit determination. That is, when the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to the big hit gaming state as a hit gaming state. Further, when the result of the hit determination is a small hit, the gaming state is shifted to the small hit gaming state as the hit gaming state. As described above, in the present embodiment, two types of hit game states are provided as the game states that shift from the normal game state.

The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 determine the number of times the reserved special symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter, referred to as "the number of times the special symbol variation display is held"). It is to be displayed. The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol includes display LEDs 75a and 75b. The second special symbol hold display unit 76 includes display LEDs 76a and 76b. The first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 display the number of hold times of the variable display of the special symbol by turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b. The display modes of turning on / off the display LEDs 75a / 75b and 76a / 76b are the same as those of the display LEDs 72a / 72b of the normal symbol hold display unit 72.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back unit 176 decorates the game board unit 17 and has an upper front accessory 1000 arranged above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 and a rear portion of the upper front accessory 1000. An upper back accessory 1100 arranged on the side and above the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 19), a lower accessory 1200 arranged below the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and a liquid crystal display. A corner accessory 1300 (see, for example, FIG. 19) is arranged so that a movable body described later is located at four corners of the display area of the device 16, and is arranged at the right side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It includes a side accessory 1400, a middle panel 1500, an attacker ball gutter 1600, a main board case 1700, and a rear box 1800 that accommodates each of the above accessories and is equipped with a main board case 1700 to form a unit. Details of each of the accessories 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, and 1400 included in the back unit 176 will be described later.

Hereinafter, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 configured as described above, the outline of the internal processing by the main CPU 101 when the gaming ball wins the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 will be described.

When the game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the winning game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 5472, and the first special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first special symbol display unit 73 is started. The memory is suspended (the variable display of the first special symbol is started). As for the hold of the start memory for the first special symbol, both the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. It will be canceled on condition that it does not exist. That is, if the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the holding of the start memory is released after the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is stopped and displayed. If the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 when the variable display is not performed for either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the holding of the starting memory is immediately released. When the hold of the start storage is released, the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 is started.

When the game ball wins the second start port 440, the winning game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441, and the start of the variation display of the second special symbol based on the game ball to the second start port 440. The memory is suspended (the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended). As for the hold of the start memory for the second special symbol, both the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display unit 73 and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 are executed. It will be canceled on condition that it does not exist. That is, if the game ball wins in the second starting port 440 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the holding of the start memory is released after the special symbol being displayed in the variable display is stopped and displayed. If the game ball wins in the second starting port 440 when neither the first special symbol nor the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the holding of the starting memory is immediately released. When the hold of the start storage is released, the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 74 is started.

In the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the special symbols (first and second special symbols) do not change at the same time. That is, while the variable display of the special symbol is performed on one of the display units 73 of the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the variable display of the special symbol is not performed on the other display unit. .. In the present embodiment, when both the start memory for the first special symbol and the start memory for the second special symbol are reserved, the second special symbol is reserved regardless of which start memory is reserved first. The second special symbol display unit 73 performs variable display of the second special symbol, giving priority to the release of the hold for the start memory.

Further, an upper limit is set for the number of times of holding the variable display of the first and second special symbols. In the present embodiment, the number of times of holding the variable display of the first and second special symbols is set up to 4 times each. Therefore, the maximum number of holdings for the variable display of the special symbol is eight, which is the total number of holdings for the variable display of the special symbol due to the winning of the first starting port 5442 and the second starting port 440.

Further, during the change of the first or second special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74, the identification symbol consisting of numbers changes in the liquid crystal display device 16 except in a specific case. Is displayed. In this embodiment, symbols from "1" to "8" are used as the numbers. Further, as for the identification symbol that is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the first or second special symbol that is being variablely displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is stopped and displayed, and is stopped. Is displayed. The identification symbol is also used as identification information for directing.

Further, when the first or second special symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 73 and the second special symbol display unit 74 is in a specific stop display mode, the player is notified that it is a hit. The effect image to be made is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of types of hits are provided. In addition, when the first or second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the specific stop display mode is set according to the type of hit. In such a configuration, the combination of the identification symbols that are stopped and displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a specific display that can be recognized by the player according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. It becomes an aspect. As a result, the player can recognize the type of the hit in addition to the hit. It should be noted that some of the types of hits have a specific display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize according to the specific stop display mode of the first or second special symbol. According to this, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize that it is a hit and the type of the hit.

[Electrical configuration of gaming machines]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

As shown in FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly composed of a main control circuit 100 that controls a game and a sub control circuit 200 that controls an effect according to the progress of the game.

The main control circuit 100 includes a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102 (read-only memory), a main RAM 103 (read / write memory), and the like.

A main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, and the like are connected to the main CPU 101. The main CPU 101 has a function of executing various processes according to a program stored in the main ROM 102.

The main ROM 102 stores a program for controlling the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the main CPU 101, various tables, and the like.

The main RAM 103 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 101. In the present embodiment, the main RAM 103 is used as the temporary storage area of the main CPU 101, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area in which information on the special symbol game is stored as start-up storage. Specifically, in the main RAM 103, the first special symbol start storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the fluctuating first special symbol is stored as the start storage, and the first for the upper limit of four times. The first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the special symbol is stored as the start storage, are provided. Similarly, in the main RAM 103, the second special symbol start storage area (0) in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the changing second special symbol is stored as the start storage, and the second special for the upper limit of four times. The second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), in which the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the symbol is stored as the start storage, are provided.

Further, the main control circuit 100 includes an initial reset circuit 104 that generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, an I / O port 105, a command output port 106, a backup capacitor 107, and the like. The initial reset circuit 104 is connected to the main CPU 101. The I / O port 105 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 101, and transmits output signals from the main CPU 101 to various devices. The command output port 106 transmits a command from the main CPU 101 to the sub control circuit 200. The backup capacitor 107 holds various data stored in the main RAM 103 by promptly supplying power to the main RAM 103, for example, when the power is cut off.

Further, various devices (members) are connected to the main control circuit 100.

For example, the main control circuit 100 includes a normal symbol display unit 71, a normal symbol hold display unit 72, a first special symbol display unit 73, a second special symbol display unit 74, and a first special symbol hold display unit 75. The second special symbol hold display unit 76, the start port solenoid 4630 that drives the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460, the large winning opening solenoid 620 that drives the shutter 610, and the like are connected. The main control circuit 100 can control the operation of these devices (members) by transmitting a signal. Further, the main control circuit 100 is used to transmit data to a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk, a function of displaying the number of hits, and the like, and a hall computer that manages a pachinko gaming machine for the entire hall. The external terminal board 320 is connected.

Further, the first start port switch 5472, the second start port switch 441, the pass gate switch 49a, the count switch 541, the general winning port switches 53a, 54a, 55a, 56a and the like are connected to the main control circuit 100. .. When a game ball is detected by these members, a predetermined detection signal is supplied to the main control circuit 100 from the members. Further, a backup clear switch 330 or the like that clears the backup data at the time of power failure according to the operation of the manager of the game hall is connected to the main control circuit 100.

Further, a payout / launch control circuit 300 is connected to the main control circuit 100. A payout device 340 for paying out a game ball, a launcher 15 for firing a game ball, a card unit 360, and the like are connected to the payout / launch control circuit 300. The payout device 340 is provided in the payout unit 18. A ball lending operation panel 370 is connected to the card unit 360, and a signal corresponding to the player's operation is supplied to the ball lending operation panel 370.

When the payout / launch control circuit 300 receives the prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 100 and the rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 360, the payout / launch control circuit 300 transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 340. The payout device 340 is controlled to pay out the game ball. Further, in the payout / launch control circuit 300, when the launch handle 32 is gripped by the player and is rotated in the clockwise direction, electric power is applied to the launch solenoid according to the rotation angle (rotation amount). It supplies and controls the launch of the game ball.

Further, a sub control circuit 200 is connected to the command output port 106. The sub control circuit 200 performs display control in the liquid crystal display device 16, control related to the sound generated from the speaker 24, control related to the light of the lamp 25, and the like in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

In the present embodiment, the command is supplied from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200, while the signal cannot be supplied from the sub control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be configured so that a signal can be transmitted from the control circuit 200 to the main control circuit 100.

The sub control circuit 200 includes a sub CPU 201, a program ROM 202, a work RAM 203, a display control circuit 204, a voice control circuit 205, a lamp control circuit 206, an accessory control circuit 207, and the like. The sub control circuit 200 executes an effect according to the progress of the game in response to a command from the main control circuit 100. Further, the sub control circuit 200 is connected to an effect button switch 310 that is turned on / off by operating the effect button 62.

The sub CPU 201 has a function of executing various processes according to the program stored in the program ROM 202. In particular, the sub CPU 201 controls the sub control circuit 200 according to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 100.

The program ROM 202 stores a program for controlling the gaming effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by the sub CPU 201, various tables, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 and the program ROM 202 are configured to be used as the storage means for storing the program, the table, or the like, but the storage medium is not limited to this and can be read by a computer equipped with the control means. If it is, another embodiment may be used. For example, as the storage means, a hard disk device or a storage medium such as a CD-ROM, a DVD-ROM, or a ROM cartridge may be used. Further, the program, the table, or the like may not be recorded in advance, but may be downloaded after the power is turned on and recorded in the work RAM 203 or the like. Further, the programs, tables, and the like may be recorded on different storage media.

The work RAM 203 has a function of storing the values of various flags and variables as a temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201. In the present embodiment, the work RAM 203 is used as the temporary storage area of the sub CPU 201, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any storage medium that can be read or written may be used.

The display control circuit 204 is a circuit for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 16. The display control circuit 204 includes an image data processor (hereinafter referred to as VDP), an image data ROM in which data for generating various image data is stored, a frame buffer for buffering image data, and an image signal for image data. It is equipped with a D / A converter or the like that converts the data.

The display control circuit 204 can perform various processes for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the data supplied from the sub CPU 201. The display control circuit 204 temporarily stores the image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the frame buffer in response to the image display command supplied from the sub CPU 201. The image data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 includes various image data related to the game, such as identification symbol image data indicating the identification symbol, background image data, and effect image data.

Then, the display control circuit 204 supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the converted image signal to the liquid crystal display device 16 at a predetermined timing. When an image signal is supplied to the liquid crystal display device 16, an image related to the image signal is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. In this way, the display control circuit 204 can control the liquid crystal display device 16 to display an image related to the game.

The voice control circuit 205 is a circuit for controlling the voice generated from the speaker 24. The voice control circuit 205 includes a sound source IC that controls voice, a voice data ROM that stores various voice data, an amplifier for amplifying voice signals (hereinafter referred to as AMP), and the like.

The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speaker 24. The sound source IC selects one voice data from a plurality of voice data stored in the voice data ROM in response to the voice generation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Further, the sound source IC reads the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the converted audio signal to the AMP. The AMP amplifies the audio signal and generates audio from the speaker 24.

The lamp control circuit 206 is a circuit for controlling the lamp 25 including the decorative lamp and the like. The lamp control circuit 206 includes a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, a decorative data ROM in which a plurality of types of lamp decorative patterns are stored, and the like.

The accessory control circuit 207 is a circuit for controlling each accessory 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400. The accessory control circuit 207 is a drive circuit for supplying a drive signal to each accessory 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400, a lighting circuit for supplying a lighting control signal, an operation pattern, and a lighting pattern. Has an accessory data ROM or the like in which is stored.

Further, the drive circuit selects one operation pattern from a plurality of operation patterns stored in the accessory data ROM in response to the accessory operation command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected operation pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the drive signal corresponding to the read operation pattern is supplied to control the mechanical operation of each accessory 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400. Further, the lighting circuit selects one lighting pattern from a plurality of lighting patterns stored in the accessory data ROM based on the lighting command supplied from the sub CPU 201. Then, the selected lighting pattern is read from the accessory data ROM, and the lighting control signal corresponding to the read lighting pattern is supplied to control the lighting operation of each accessory 1000, 1100, 1200, 1300, 1400.

[Function flow]
Next, the functional flow of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a functional flow of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

As shown in FIG. 8, the pachinko game is a game in which a game ball is launched by a user's operation, and when the game ball wins various prizes, the payout control process of the game ball is performed. Further, the pachinko game includes a special symbol game using a special symbol and a normal symbol game using a normal symbol.

When it becomes a "big hit" in a special symbol game or when it becomes a "hit" in a normal symbol game, the possibility that the game ball wins is relatively increased, and the payout control process of the game ball is easy to be performed. Become.

In addition, various prizes include a special symbol start prize, which is one condition for variable display of a special symbol in a special symbol game, and one condition for variable display of a normal symbol in a normal symbol game. A certain ordinary symbol start prize is also included.

The term "variable display" as used herein is a concept in which the identification symbol is variablely displayed from the start to the end of one special symbol game. For example, the variable display of the identification symbol is produced in one variable display. And stop production are possible. The variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol may be performed a plurality of times in one variable display. It should be noted that the variable effect is an effect that is visually performed, and its meaning is different from that of the variable display.

Further, in the "variable display", for example, a "derivative display" in which a special symbol (identification symbol) is displayed as a result of a special symbol game can be performed. That is, in the present specification, the operation from the start of the "variable display" to the "derivative display" is referred to as one "variable display".

The outline of the processing flow of the special symbol game and the normal symbol game will be described below. The special symbol game and the normal symbol game are executed as control processing by the main CPU 101.

(1) When there is a special symbol start prize in the special symbol game, random numbers (big hit determination random value and symbol determination random value) are extracted and extracted from the jackpot determination counter and the symbol determination counter, respectively. Each random value is stored (see the flow of the special symbol start winning process in the special symbol game shown in FIG. 8).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, in the special symbol control process during the special symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this discrimination process, it is referred to whether or not various data such as random numbers are stored by the special symbol start winning, and the variable display of the special symbol is performed on the condition that various data such as random values are stored. It is determined that the condition for starting is satisfied.

Next, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, the jackpot determination random value extracted from the jackpot determination counter is referred to, and the jackpot determination as to whether or not to make a "big hit" is performed. After that, the stop symbol determination process is performed. In this process, the symbol determination random value extracted from the symbol determination counter and the result of the jackpot determination described above are referred to, and a special symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined.

Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random number value is extracted from the fluctuation pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, and the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above are referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined.

Next, the effect pattern determination process is performed. In this process, a random value is extracted from the effect pattern determination counter, and the random value, the result of the jackpot determination described above, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed described above, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol described above are referred to. Determine the effect pattern to be executed along with the variable display of the special symbol.

Next, as a result of the determined jackpot determination, the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the effect pattern accompanying the variable display of the special symbol are referred to, and the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the special symbol is performed. , And the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect is executed.

Then, when the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the "big hit" is achieved. In this determination process, if it is determined that a "big hit" has occurred, a big hit game control process for performing a big hit game is executed. In the big hit game, the possibility of various winnings described above increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, the big hit game control process is not executed.

When it is determined that the "big hit" has not been achieved, or when the big hit game control process is completed, the game state transition control process for shifting the game state is performed. In this game state transition control process, a normal game state different from the big hit game state is managed.

As the normal game state, for example, in the above-mentioned big hit determination, a game state in which the probability of being determined as "big hit" increases (hereinafter referred to as "high probability game state") and a special symbol start winning prize are easily obtained. The game state (hereinafter referred to as "short-time game state") and the like can be mentioned. After that, the process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the special symbol is performed again, and then the various processes of the above-mentioned special symbol control process are repeated.

In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the game ball starts winning a prize during the variable display of the special symbol, various data (random value for jackpot determination, random value for determining symbol, etc.) acquired at the time of the starting prize are obtained. ) Is stored until the condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied. In this way, storing various data until the condition for starting variable display of the special symbol is satisfied is called "holding", and holding various data is called starting storage.

That is, if the game ball wins a start prize during the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display (variable display) of the special symbol corresponding to the start prize is suspended, and after the currently executed variable display of the special symbol ends. The variable display of the reserved special symbol is started. In the following, the variable display of the reserved special symbol is also referred to as a "reserved ball".

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as will be described later, two types of special symbol starting prizes (first starting mouth winning and second starting mouth winning) are provided, and a maximum of four for each special symbol starting prize. You can get the reserved ball of. That is, in the present embodiment, a maximum of eight reserved balls can be acquired.

Although not shown in FIG. 8, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the reserved ball has been won (whether or not the "big hit" has been won) based on the above-mentioned information on the reserved ball, and further, the determination result is used. It has a function of performing a predetermined effect based on the above, that is, a look-ahead effect function.

(2) When there is a normal symbol start prize in the normal symbol game, a random number value is extracted from the hit determination counter and the random value value is stored (the normal symbol start prize in the normal symbol game shown in FIG. 8). See processing flow).

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, in the normal symbol control process during the normal symbol game, it is first determined whether or not the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. In this discrimination process, it is referred to whether or not the random number value is stored by the normal symbol start winning prize, and one condition is that the random value is stored, and the condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol is satisfied. Determine.

Next, when the variable display of the normal symbol is started, the random value extracted from the hit determination counter is referred to, and the hit determination as to whether or not to make a "hit" is performed. After that, the fluctuation pattern determination process is performed. In this process, the result of the hit determination is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is determined.

Next, the determined hit determination result and the variation pattern of the normal symbol are referred to, and the variable display control process for controlling the variable display of the normal symbol and the effect control process for performing a predetermined effect are executed.

When the variable display control process and the effect display control process are completed, it is determined whether or not the result is a "hit". In this determination process, if it is determined to be a "hit", a hit game control process for performing a hit game is executed.

In the winning game control process, the possibility of the above-mentioned various winnings, in particular, the possibility of winning the special symbol start of the game ball in the special symbol game increases. On the other hand, if it is determined that the result is not "hit", the hit game control process is not executed. After that, the process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the normal symbol is performed again, and then the various processes of the above-mentioned normal symbol control process are repeated.

As described above, in the pachinko game, the payout control of the game ball is determined by the conditions such as whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit", the transition status of the game state, and whether or not the normal symbol game is a "hit". The ease with which processing is performed changes.

In this embodiment, as the extraction method of various random number values, a soft random number method that generates random number values by executing a program is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the pachinko game machine includes a random number generator in which random numbers are updated at a predetermined cycle, a random number value is obtained from a counter (so-called ring counter) in the random number generator. The hard random number method for extracting the above-mentioned random numbers may be adopted as the above-mentioned extraction method for various random number values.

When the hard random number method is used, it is possible to prevent the same random number value from being extracted in the predetermined cycle by determining the initial value of the random number value at a timing different from the predetermined cycle.

[Liquid crystal display device]
The liquid crystal display device 16 is composed of a liquid crystal display, and performs various effect displays in the display area thereof.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the effect image related to (corresponding to) the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) described later is displayed in the display area. Is displayed in. At this time, for example, when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner in the special symbol unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74), for example, 1 to 8 except for specific cases. A plurality of effect identification symbols (decorative symbols) composed of numbers and various characters are displayed in a variable manner in the display area.

Then, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74), a plurality of identification symbols corresponding to the special symbol are also stopped and displayed in the display area. To.

Then, when the special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) is in a specific mode (the result of the stop display is a "big hit"). , An effect image for making the player understand that it is a "big hit" is displayed in the display area.

As an effect for making the player understand that it is a "big hit", for example, first, a plurality of stop-displayed identification symbols are arranged in a specific mode (for example, the same identification symbols are arranged along a predetermined direction). ), And then an effect such as displaying an image notifying the "big hit" can be mentioned.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, an effect image related to the display contents of the first special symbol hold display unit 75 and the second special symbol hold display unit 76, which will be described later, is displayed. For example, in the display area, hold information (for example, the same number of hold symbols as the hold number) for notifying the hold number (starting storage number) of the variable display of the special symbol is displayed. Further, for example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the look-ahead effect is performed based on the information of the reserved ball of the special symbol, and the advance notice at this time is also displayed in the display area.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display unit 71 described later is in a predetermined mode, an effect image for causing the player to grasp the information is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. A function to display may be further provided.

[Special symbol display]
The special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. The special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) the special symbol in the special symbol game. In the present embodiment, a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) is configured by a 7-segment display that displays a special symbol as a symbol consisting of numbers, symbols, or the like.

The present invention is not limited to this, and the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) may be configured by, for example, a plurality of LEDs. In this case, a display pattern composed of turning on / off of a plurality of LEDs is represented as a special symbol.

The special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) is triggered by the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440 (special symbol starting prize). , The variable display of the special symbol (identification information) is performed. Then, the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) displays the special symbol in a variable manner for a predetermined time, and then displays the stop of the special symbol.

In the following, the special symbol that is variablely displayed when the game ball wins the first starting port 5442 is referred to as the first special symbol. Further, the special symbol that is variablely displayed when the game ball wins the second starting opening 440 is called the second special symbol.

When the first special symbol or the second special symbol stopped and displayed in the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) is a specific mode (“big hit” mode). The gaming state shifts from the normal gaming state to the jackpot gaming state, which is a state advantageous to the player.

That is, in the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74), the first special symbol or the second special symbol may be stopped and displayed in a mode of shifting to the jackpot gaming state. It is a "big hit".

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot 53 is open. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 5442, and the first special symbol is specified in the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74). When the stop display is displayed in the above mode, the large winning opening 53 is opened.

The open state of each large winning opening is maintained until a predetermined number of game balls are won or a certain period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the large winning opening that was in the open state becomes closed.

In the following, a game in which the large winning opening 53 is in a state where it is easy to accept a game ball (open state) is referred to as a round game. Between the round games, the big prize opening is closed.

Further, the round game is counted as the number of rounds such as one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game is referred to as a first round, and the second round game is referred to as a second round.

In the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74), when the special symbol stopped and displayed is in a mode other than a specific mode (a mode of "missing"). , The game state does not change unless you win the fall lottery.

That is, in the special symbol game, the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner by the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74), and then the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the game is based on the result. A game in which the state is transferred or maintained.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 5442 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable first special symbol corresponding to the winning is changed. The display (holding ball) is put on hold.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the reserved variable display of the first special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of the first special symbol to be held (so-called "holding number (number of holding balls)") is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the second starting port 440 during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display (holding ball) of the second special symbol corresponding to the winning is made. Is put on hold.

Then, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the suspended display of the variation in the second special symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays (number of reserved symbols) of the second special symbol to be held is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of pending special symbols for variable display is eight in total.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the first special symbol and the reserved ball of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of one special symbol is preferentially executed over the variable display of the other special symbol. .. Specifically, the reserved ball of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the reserved ball of the first special symbol. The present invention is not limited to this, and when the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are mixed, the variable display of the special symbols may be executed in the reserved order.

[Ordinary symbol display]
The ordinary symbol display unit 71 is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Then, in this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display unit 71 is arranged on the left side of the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) when viewed from the player side.

The normal symbol display unit 71 is a display device that variably displays (variable display and stop display) normal symbols in a normal symbol game, and the normal symbol display unit 71 is composed of a plurality of LEDs (ordinary symbol display LEDs). .. Then, the normal symbol display unit 71 represents a display pattern composed of turning on / off of each normal symbol display LED as a normal symbol.

The normal symbol display unit 71 alternately turns on and off the two normal symbol display LEDs when the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43, and displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol. Then, the normal symbol display unit 71 performs a variable display of the normal symbol for a predetermined time, and then displays a stop display of the normal symbol.

In the normal symbol display unit 71, when the normal symbol stopped and displayed is in a predetermined mode (“hit” mode), the normal electric accessory 46 is changed from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined period. On the other hand, when the normal symbol displayed as stopped is in a mode other than the predetermined mode (a mode of "loss"), the normal electric accessory 46 maintains the closed state.

That is, the ordinary symbol game is a game in which the ordinary symbol is variablely displayed by the ordinary symbol display unit 71, then the ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed, and the ordinary electric accessory 46 operates according to the result.

If the game ball passes through the ball passage detector 43 during the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display of the normal symbol is suspended. Then, when the normal symbol currently being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the reserved normal symbol is started. In the present embodiment, the number of variable displays of ordinary symbols to be held (that is, "the number of holdings") is defined as a maximum of 4 times (pieces).

[Ordinary symbol hold display device]
The normal symbol hold display device 63 is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

The normal symbol hold display device 63 is a device that displays the number of holds for variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hold display device 63 includes a plurality of normal symbol hold display LEDs, and the normal symbol hold display device 63 includes the normal symbol hold display device 63. , By turning on / off each normal symbol hold display LED, the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed.

Specifically, the normal symbol hold display device 63 displays the normal symbol hold display LED according to the number of hold of the variable display of the normal symbol, and the normal symbol hold display LED corresponds to the hold number of the variable display of the normal symbol. Up to 4 lights are turned on.

[1st special symbol hold display device]
The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

The hold display unit 75 for the first special symbol is a device for displaying information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol (holding ball of the first special symbol) that is held. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol hold display unit 75 includes a plurality of first special symbol hold display LEDs.

Specifically, the first special symbol hold display unit 75 displays the first special symbol hold display LED according to the number of holds for the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol hold display LED is the first. Up to 4 lights are lit according to the number of pending special symbols.

[Second special symbol hold display device]
The second special symbol hold display unit 76 is arranged at the lower right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16.

The second special symbol hold display unit 76 is a device that displays information regarding the variable display of the second special symbol (holding ball of the second special symbol) that is being held, and the second special symbol hold display unit 76 is , A plurality of second special symbol hold display LEDs are provided.

Specifically, the second special symbol hold display unit 76 displays the second special symbol hold display LED according to the number of holds for the variable display of the second special symbol, and the second special symbol hold display LED is the second. 2 Up to 4 lights are lit according to the number of pending special symbols.

Next, the data structure and the like of the main control circuit 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 11.

[Random number judgment table]
FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a hit random number determination table (first start port, second start port) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. The hit random number determination table (first start port) is "big hit", "small hit", and "miss" based on the random number value for big hit determination acquired when the game ball wins in the first start port 5442. It is referred to to determine one of the above by lottery. The hit random number determination table (second start opening) determines either "big hit" or "miss" by lottery based on the big hit determination random number value acquired when the game ball wins in the second start opening 440. It will be referred to when you do.

The jackpot determination random number value is a random number value for determining the lottery result performed when the starting opening prize is won. More specifically, the jackpot determination random number value is a value indicating the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol). In the present embodiment, the jackpot determination random value is selected from 0 to 65535 (65536 types).

In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the first starting port 5442, one of "big hit", "small hit" and "missing" is determined by lottery. Therefore, in the hit random number judgment table (at the time of winning the first start opening), "big hit" and "small hit" are set for each value of the probability variation flag ("0 (= off)" or "1 (= on)"). The range (width) of the random number value for big hit judgment in which each of the winning of "missing" is determined, and the corresponding judgment value data ("big hit judgment value data", "small hit judgment value data", and "missing judgment value". The relationship with "data") is defined. The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the “high probability game state”. When the gaming state is the "high probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when the gaming state is the "low probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "0".

In the present embodiment, when the probability variation flag is "0" and the winning random number value is any of "0" to "204" at the time of winning the first starting port 5442, "big hit" is won. , "Big hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of the "big hit" in this case (big hit probability (selection rate)) is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

If the probability variation flag is "0" and the winning random number value is any of "205" to "409" at the time of winning the first starting port 5442, "small hit" is won and "small hit" is won. "Small hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of "small hit" in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

Further, when the probability change flag is "0" and the random value for hit determination is neither "0" to "409" at the time of winning the first starting port 5442, "miss" is won and "loss judgment" is made. Value data "is determined.

On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is "1" and the random value for hit determination is any of "0" to "1637" at the time of winning the first starting port 5442, "big hit" is won and "big hit" is won. "Judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability (selection rate)) of the "big hit" in this case is 1638/65536 (≈1/40), which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is "0".

If the probability variation flag is "1" and the winning random number value is any of "1638" to "1842" at the time of winning the first starting port 5442, "small hit" is won and "small hit" is won. "Small hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of "small hit" in this case is 205/65536 (≈1/319), which is the same as the case where the probability variation flag is "0".

Further, when the probability change flag is "1" and the random value for hit determination is neither "0" to "1842" at the time of winning the first starting port 5442, "miss" is won and "loss judgment" is made. Value data "is determined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the first starting port 5442, the jackpot probability varies depending on whether or not the game state at the time of winning is the “high probability game state”. Specifically, the jackpot probability when the game ball wins the first starting port 5442 when the game state is the "high probability game state" is about eight times as high as when the game state is not the "high probability game state". It gets higher.

Similarly, when the probability variation flag is "0" and the winning random number value is any of "0" to "204" at the time of winning the second starting port 440, "big hit" is won and "big hit" is won. "Big hit judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability of the "big hit" in this case (big hit probability (selection rate)) is 205/65536 (≈1/319).

In addition, when the probability change flag is "0" and the random value for hit determination is neither "0" to "204" at the time of winning the second starting port 440, "miss" is won and "loss judgment" is made. Value data "is determined.

On the other hand, when the probability variation flag is "1" and the random value for hit determination is any of "0" to "1637" at the time of winning the second starting port 440, "big hit" is won and "big hit" is won. "Judgment value data" is determined. That is, the winning probability (big hit probability (selection rate)) of the "big hit" in this case is 1638/65536 (≈1/40), which is higher than that when the probability variation flag is "0".

If the probability variation flag is "1" and the hit determination random value is neither "0" to "1637" at the time of winning the second starting port 440, "miss" is won and "loss judgment" is made. Value data "is determined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game ball wins the second starting port 440, is the game state at the time of winning the "high probability game state" without winning the "small hit"? The jackpot probability fluctuates depending on whether or not, and the jackpot probability when the gaming state is the "high probability gaming state" is about eight times higher than when the gaming state is the "low probability gaming state".

[Design judgment table]
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a symbol determination table (first starting port, second starting port) stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. The symbol determination table (first start port, second start port) is based on the symbol random value acquired when the game ball wins in the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 and the above-mentioned determination value data. Then, it is referred to for selecting the "hit selection symbol command" and the "symbol specification command" that determine the stop symbol. The "hit selection symbol command" is a command for designating a winning symbol determined according to the winning type at the time of winning, and the "symbol specification command" specifies a symbol to be displayed when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. It is a command to do. The symbol random value is extracted from, for example, 0 to 99 (100 types).

According to the symbol determination table (first starting port) of the present embodiment, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "9", 10/100. With the probability of, "z0" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA1" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "10" to "19", "z1" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "ZA1" is selected as the symbol specification command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "20" to "29", "z2" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "ZA1" is selected as the symbol specification command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "30" to "39", "z3" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "ZA1" is selected as the symbol specification command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "40" to "49", "z4" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 10/100. , "ZA1" is selected as the symbol specification command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "50" to "95", "z5" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 46/100. , "ZA1" is selected as the symbol specification command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is "96" or "97", "z6" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 2/100, and the symbol is specified. "ZA4" is selected as the command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is "98" or "99", "z7" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 2/100, and the symbol is specified. "ZA5" is selected as the command. Further, when the small hit determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "99", "z8" is selected as the hit selection symbol command and is used as the symbol designation command. "ZA6" is selected. On the other hand, when the loss determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "99", the hit selection symbol command is not selected and "zA7" is used as the symbol specification command. Be selected.

Further, according to the symbol determination table (second starting port) of the present embodiment, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "24", 25 With a probability of / 100, "z9" is selected as the hit selection symbol command, and "zA8" is selected as the symbol designation command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "25" to "49", "z10" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 25/100. , "ZA8" is selected as the symbol specification command. Further, when the jackpot determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "55" to "99", "z11" is selected as the hit selection symbol command with a probability of 50/100. , "ZA9" is selected as the symbol specification command. On the other hand, when the loss determination value data is obtained and the symbol random value is any of "0" to "99", the hit selection symbol command is not selected and "zA10" is used as the symbol specification command. Be selected.

[Big hit type determination table]
FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100. The jackpot type determination table is referred to for determining the jackpot type such as the number of rounds, whether to turn on the probability variation flag, and whether to turn on the time saving flag according to the hit selection symbol command related to the jackpot. .. In this embodiment, if the jackpot is won regardless of the type of jackpot, the time saving flag is set to "1". The number of time reductions at this time is determined to be any of 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times and 100 times, and the determined number of time reductions is set. The probability change flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the game state is the “high probability game state”. When the gaming state is the "high probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "1", and when the gaming state is the "low probability gaming state", the probability variation flag is "0". Similarly, the time saving flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 73, and is a flag for managing whether or not the gaming state is the “time saving gaming state”. When the gaming state is the "time saving gaming state", the time saving flag is "1", and when the gaming state is the "non-time saving gaming state", the time saving flag is "0". The number of time reductions is the number of fluctuations in the special symbol game in which the time reduction game state can be continued. That is, if the special symbol variation (lottery of the special symbol) is performed for the number of time reductions (100 times) without winning the big hit in the time reduction game state, the time reduction game state ends and the game shifts to the non-time reduction game state. In this embodiment, the high-probability gaming state continues until the next big hit is won. However, if the special symbol fluctuation (special symbol lottery) is performed for a predetermined number of times without winning the big hit, the high-probability gaming state may end and the game may shift to the low-probability gaming state.

According to the jackpot type determination table of the present embodiment, when the hit time selection symbol command is "z0", the number of rounds is "8", and the jackpot of the probability variation flag off and the time saving flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z1", the number of rounds is "8", and the big hit of the probability variation flag off and the time saving flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z3", the number of rounds is "8", and the big hit of the probability variation flag off and the time saving flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z4", the number of rounds is "8", and the big hit of the probability variation flag off and the time saving flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z5", the number of rounds is "8", and the big hit of the probability variation flag on and the time saving flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z6", the number of rounds is "5", and the big hit of the probability variation flag on and the time saving flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z7", the number of rounds is "16", and the big hit of the probability variation flag on and the time saving flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z9", the number of rounds is "5", and the big hit of the probability variation flag off and the time saving flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z10", the number of rounds is "5", and the big hit of the probability variation flag on and the time saving flag on is determined. When the hit selection symbol command is "z11", the number of rounds is "16", and the big hit of the probability variation flag on and the time saving flag on is determined.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot with the time saving flag on is determined regardless of the hit selection symbol command (that is, the jackpot determination value data), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot determination value data is not necessarily limited to this. Depending on the situation, the jackpot of the time saving flag off may be determined.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 201 determines the number of time reductions to any one of 24 times, 30 times, 36 times, 42 times, 48 times, and 100 times, but is not necessarily limited to this. , The time-saving gaming state may be controlled to continue until the next big hit is won, or the time-saving gaming state may be controlled to continue as long as the high-probability gaming state continues.

Further, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 201 is controlled so that the high-probability gaming state continues until the next big hit is won, but the game is not necessarily limited to this, and up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). It may be controlled so that the high-probability gaming state continues (then shifts to the low-probability gaming state), or until the next big hit is substantially won (for example, 10,000) in relation to the winning probability of the big hit. It may be controlled so that the high-probability gaming state continues (up to the number of times), or it may be controlled so that the high-probability gaming state continues until the next big hit is won.

[Flow of game ball]
Hereinafter, the flow of the game ball launched toward the game area 20 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 14. FIG. 12 is an example of a diagram showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the right side region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open. FIG. 13 is an example of a diagram showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the right side region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed. FIG. 14 is an example of a diagram showing a mode in which the game ball flows down the left side region when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open.

As described above, the attacker unit 500 is located at a substantially lower right portion in the gaming area 20 and below the passage gate 49. Therefore, in the big hit game state, so-called right-handed hitting is performed. When the large winning opening 540 is opened by the shutter 610, the right-handed game ball is likely to win the large winning opening 540. In addition, even if it is not in the big hit game state, right-handed hitting is performed even during the electric support.

However, when the player hits to the right, the game ball that has flowed down the right side area loses its expectation when it does not win the big winning opening 540, and just waits for it to flow into the out opening 57 as it is. Will be. Therefore, when the right-handed game ball does not win the big prize opening 540, the player feels a disadvantage and causes a decrease in interest. In particular, in recent years, there has been a demand for an increase in the size of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the current situation is that the place where the attacker unit 500 or the like can be arranged in the game area 20 is limited. Therefore, in order to meet the demand for larger size of the liquid crystal display device 16, the attacker unit 500 must be arranged in the lower part of the gaming area 20 as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. When the attacker unit 500 is arranged at the lower part in the game area 20, it is more remarkable that the right-handed game ball does not win the big winning opening 540 and flows into the out opening 57 as it is.

In this respect, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is arranged in the substantially left lower portion of the gaming area 20. Furthermore, the attacker unit 500 is provided with a game ball guiding member 580. The game ball guiding member 580 is a game area 20 in which an out opening 57 is arranged, including a guide nail 700, for a game ball that has been hit right (flows down the right area) and has not won a prize in the large winning opening 540. A member that leads beyond the center to the upstream of the blade member 4620 arranged in the left side region, and forms a path of the game ball extending on the extension line of the large winning opening 540 toward the flow direction of the game ball. Is. Here, the "upstream of the blade member 4620" is a region where the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 440 if the blade member 4620 is open (hereinafter, "second starting port acceptance" in this specification. Area "). The second starting port receiving area is, for example, a peripheral area of the game ball 223 located above the blade member 4620 in FIG.

In the game area 20, the game ball guiding member is used as a flow path of the game ball that is hit right (flows down the right side area) and reaches the exit side of the large winning opening 540 without winning the big winning opening 540. A flow path connecting the outlet side portion of the 580 and the outlet port 57 is formed by the guide nail 700. The game ball flowing down the flow path always passes through the second starting port receiving area before reaching the out port 57.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the normal symbol determination shifts to the high-probability gaming state when the jackpot gaming state ends, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the electric support state during the time-saving gaming state, and the blades are frequently used. The member 4620 is opened.

As shown in FIG. 12, when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is open, if the right-struck game ball (flowing down the right area) does not win the large winning opening 540, the game is concerned. The ball is always guided by the game ball guiding member 580 and the guiding nail 700 to the second starting port receiving area upstream of the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460.

Of the game balls hit to the right (flowing down the right area), the game balls that did not win the large winning opening 540 are always guided to the second starting opening receiving area upstream of the blade member 4620, so that the second If the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened when the game ball is guided to the start port receiving area, the blade member 4620 is accepted by the blade member 4620 without flowing into the out port 57, and the second start port 440. There is a high possibility of winning a prize. That is, when the blade member 4620 is closed, the out port 57 is at the most downstream position of the game area 20 as described above, but when the blade member 4620 is open, the second out port 57 is replaced with the second out port 57. The starting port 440 is the most downstream position. As described above, the blade member 4620 has a function of changing the most downstream position in the game area 20.

In this way, even if the game ball hit to the right (flowing down the right area) does not win the large winning opening 540, the game ball always reaches the second starting opening receiving area (upstream of the blade member 4620). Since it is guided, the expectation of winning the second starting port 440 will continue, and it will be possible to enhance the interest.

In particular, right-handed strikes are performed in the electric support state. Therefore, although the large winning opening 540 is not opened during the electric support, the most downstream position is changed from the out port 57 to the second starting port 440 by the blade member 4620, so that the game progresses in the electric support state. It can be promoted and enhanced.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 13, when the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is closed, the game ball that is hit right (flows down the right area) and does not win the big winning opening 540. Although it is always guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620, it flows into the out port 57 through the space between the blade member 4620 and the guide nail 700 (that is, the left side of the guide nail 700).

Of the game balls that were hit to the right (flowed down in the right area), the game balls that did not reach the large winning opening 540 (for example, the game balls that flowed down the flow passage leading from the right side of the general winning opening 56 to the out opening 57). ) May be configured to be guided to the out port 57. At this time, among the game balls hit to the right, as the game balls that did not win the big winning opening 540, the game balls that reached the big winning opening 540 but did not win, and the game balls that did not reach the big winning opening 540 without reaching the big winning opening 540. There are game balls that did not win a prize, but any game ball may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620, or only one of the game balls may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620. ..

By the way, as shown in FIG. 14, a left-handed game ball (a game ball that has flowed down the left side region) generally wins at the first starting opening 5442 or the general winning openings 53, 54, 55. It flows into the out port 57 or the out port 450. After the game ball is hit to the left, the game ball 224 that rolls on the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 continues to be expected to win a prize at the first start port 5442, but heads toward the first start port 5442. Regarding the game ball 2226 that deviates from the flow path 222 and does not win a prize in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, the first starting opening (corresponding to the first starting opening 5442 of the present embodiment) in the conventional pachinko machine. The expectation of winning a prize is lost. Further, even if the game ball 224 is rolled on the flow path 222 toward the first starting port 5442, if the first starting port 5442 is not won, the feeling of expectation for winning is lost at that point. In the present embodiment, when the left-handed game ball (the game ball flowing down the left side region) rolls the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 but does not win the first start port 5442, and In any case, even if the player deviates from the flow path 222 toward the first starting port 5442 and does not win a prize in the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, these game balls reach the out opening 57. In the meantime, it always passes through the second starting port receiving area (upstream of the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460). As described above, the upstream of the blade member 4620 is a region (second starting port receiving region) in which the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 440 if the blade member 4620 is open. When the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 is rolled but the first start port 5442 is not won, and when the flow path 222 toward the first start port 5442 is deviated from the flow path 222 and further general winning openings 53, 54, 55 In any case, the expectation of winning the second starting port 440 will continue, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, since the passing gate 49 is arranged in the right side region, there is little expectation that the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be opened when it is hit to the left. However, immediately after the jackpot game state or the time-saving game state ends, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol may be suspended. Further, even if the player hits the left side, the game ball that vigorously jumps out into the game area 20 may flow down the right side area. Therefore, even in the normal gaming state, the blade member 4620 of the normal electric accessory 460 is rarely opened. Moreover, the guide nail 700 immediately flows into the out port 57 not only for the game ball that has flowed down the right side region but also for the game ball that has flowed down to the left side region and has rolled to the guide member 700 side. Since it has a function of suppressing, if the blade member 4620 is open, there is a possibility that the second starting port 440 will win a prize. Therefore, even if the left-handed game ball loses the expectation of winning the first starting opening 5442 and the general winning openings 53, 54, 55, the expectation of winning the second starting opening 440 continues. , It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In the present embodiment, the passage gate 49 is arranged in the right side region, but instead, the passage gate 491 may be arranged in the left side region. In this case, the frequency with which the blade member 4620 of the ordinary electric accessory 460 is opened may be increased as compared with the case where the passing gate 49 is arranged in the right side region. Therefore, even if the left-handed game ball loses the expectation of winning the first starting port 5442, it is possible to continue with a higher expectation of winning the second starting port 440. ..

As a game ball hit to the left (a game ball that has flowed down the left side region), for example, a game ball that has not reached the upper part of the normal electric accessory unit 400 or has not reached the first starting port 5442. There may be a game ball flowing down the outflow port 450 (see, for example, FIGS. 3 and 49) existing below the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 or the downflow passage leading to the out port 57. At this time, among the game balls hit to the left, as the game balls that did not win the first starting port 5442, the game balls that did not reach the upper part of the normal electric accessory unit 400 or the first starting port 5442, and the normal game balls. There is a game ball that has reached above the electric accessory unit 400 or near the first starting port 5442 but has not won a prize, but any game ball may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620, and eventually. Only one of the game balls may be guided to the upstream of the blade member 4620.

Further, when the game ball that has rolled in the direction of the large winning opening 540 among the game balls that have been hit to the left (the game ball that has flowed down the left side region) rolls the game ball guiding member 580, the game ball is the large winning opening 540. It is configured to collide with a rib provided on the shutter 610 or the game ball guiding member 580 to win a prize at the first starting port 5442 or to flow into the out 55 or the out port 450.

Further, in the present embodiment, a game ball that has been hit right (flows down the right side area) and has not won a prize in the large winning opening 540 is sure to pass the center of the game area 20 in which the out opening 57 is arranged to the left side. It is provided with a game ball guiding member 580 that guides the area to the second starting port receiving area. However, the game ball guiding member 580 has a function of guiding such a game ball (a game ball that is hit right (flows down the right side area) and does not win the large winning opening 540) to the second starting opening receiving area. It is not necessary to have, and it may be limited to guiding beyond the center of the game area 20 to the left side area. For example, although the game ball guiding member 580 has a function of guiding such a game ball to the left side region, the game ball guided to the left side region is further distributed to a plurality of regions including the second starting port receiving region. It corresponds to what is configured.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball that has been hit right (flows down the right side area) and has not won the big winning opening 540 is guided to the left side area by the game ball guiding member 580. The game ball guiding member 580 is not always essential, and for example, a game ball that has been hit right and has not won a prize in the large winning opening 540 may be configured to be guided to the left side region only with a guide nail.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball guiding member is used as a flow path of the game ball that is hit right (flows down the right side area) and reaches the exit side of the large winning opening 540 without winning the big winning opening 540. A flow path connecting the exit side portion of the 580 and the out port 57 is formed, and the game ball flowing down the flow path always passes through the second start port receiving area before reaching the out port 57. It is designed to do. In the present embodiment, since the second starting port 440 is formed in the left side region, the game ball flowing down the flow path is always guided to the left side region. However, in view of the idea that the game ball flowing down the above path always passes through the second starting port receiving area before reaching the out port 57, in such a case, the second starting port 440 is in the left side area. It is not mandatory to be in place.

[Structure of back unit]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the back unit 176 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 20. FIG. 15 is an example of a front view of the back unit 176. FIG. 16 is an example of a rear view of the back unit 176. FIG. 17 is an example of a perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 18 is an example of a perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from diagonally above the left side of the back surface. FIG. 19 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 20 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the back unit 176 as viewed from diagonally above the left side of the back surface.

As described above, the back unit 176 includes an upper front accessory 1000, an upper back accessory 1100, a lower accessory 1200, a corner accessory 1300, a side accessory 1400, a middle panel 1500, and an attacker ball gutter 1600. And at least a main board case 1700 and a rear box 1800. The corner accessory 1300 includes an upper corner accessory 1320 and a lower corner accessory 1350.

The rear box 1800 has a box shape, and an opening 1820 is formed substantially in the center. A liquid crystal display device 16 and the like are arranged in the opening 1820.

The upper back accessory 1100 (specifically, the base member 1180 (see, for example, FIG. 67) described later) is mounted and fixed above the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800. Details of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described later.

The lower accessory 1200 (detailed below, the lower accessory fixing base 1220 (see, for example, FIG. 75)) is attached and fixed below the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800. The details of the lower accessory 1200 will be described later.

The side accessory 1400 (specifically, the mounting plate 1410 described later (see, for example, FIG. 105)) is mounted and fixed to the right side of the opening 1820 on the front side of the rear box 1800. Details of the side accessory 1400 will be described later.

In the upper corner accessory 1320 (see, for example, FIG. 86), the first movable body 1330 is in the upper left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 so as to be on the front side of the upper back accessory movable decorative body 110. The body 1340 is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be located at the upper right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16. In the lower corner accessory 1350, the third movable body 1355 is in the lower left corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 and the fourth movable body 1357 is in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal display device 16 so that the lower corner accessory 1350 is on the front side of the lower accessory 1200. It is mounted and fixed to the rear box 1800 so that it is located at each position. The first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are arranged so as to be substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. Details of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described later.

The upper front accessory 1000 (for details, the decorative accessory base member 1010 (see, for example, FIG. 59) described later) is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 so as to be arranged in front of the upper back accessory 1000. To. Details of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described later.

The middle panel 1500 is arranged in an area corresponding to a part of the game area 20 on the back surface of the transparent panel 172, and includes a first middle panel 1520 and a second middle panel 1550. The first middle panel 1520 is a plate-shaped member having a pattern or pattern on the front surface, and the pattern or pattern on the front surface can be visually recognized via the transparent panel 172. The second middle panel 1550 is a plate-shaped member having an annular opening window 1552, which will be described in detail later, and is configured such that a predetermined picture appears on the opening window when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Details of the second middle panel 1550 will be described later.

The attacker ball gutter 1600 is a gutter-shaped one that accepts a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 56 and discharges it to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 joins the gaming ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening 540 and is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The lamp relay board 1710, the main control relay board 1720, and the like are housed in the main board case 1700.

The back unit 176 further comprises a first decorative design 1900 and a second decorative design 1920. The first decorative design 1900 is attached to the right side of the front side of the upper back accessory 1100. The second decorative design 1920 is attached to the left side on the front side of the upper back accessory 1100. The first decorative design 1900 and the second decorative design 1920 are decorated on the front surface, and both have a design function without being movable.

[Attacker unit]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the attacker unit 500 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 21 to 32.

The attacker unit 500 includes a base member 510, a front plate portion 520, a taxiway 530, a large winning opening 540, a rear case 550, and a special electric accessory 600.

The base member 510 shown in FIGS. 21 to 26, and FIGS. 28 and 29 is a member that is the basis of the attacker unit 500. The base member 510 is formed in an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The base member 510 is arranged so that the longitudinal direction is directed to the left-right direction and the plate surface thereof is directed to the front-rear direction. Various members constituting the attacker unit 500 are attached to the base member 510. A slit 511 is formed in the base member 510.

The slit 511 is formed so as to penetrate the base member 510 in the front-rear direction. The slit 511 is formed on the upper portion of the base member 510 in a substantially straight line extending from the right side to the left side while being gently inclined in a front view. A shutter 610 (more specifically, an induction portion 611 of the shutter 610), which will be described later, is arranged in the slit 511.

The front plate portion 520 shown in FIGS. 21 to 25 and 27 is a member arranged at the front end portion of the attacker unit 500. The front plate portion 520 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the base member 510. The front plate portion 520 is arranged with its plate surface facing in the front-rear direction. The front plate portion 520 faces the base member 510 in the front-rear direction, and is arranged in a state of being separated forward from the base member 510. In this way, a gap (hereinafter referred to as "special electric accessory space R2") is formed between the front plate portion 520 and the base member 510 to the extent that a game ball can enter. The special electric accessory space R2 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the front plate portion 520 and the base member 510 when viewed from the front. The front plate portion 520 is attached to the base member 510 via screws or the like. The front plate portion 520 is formed of a transparent resin material, and the rear of the front plate portion 520 is visible to the player.

The taxiway 530 shown in FIGS. 21 and 23 to 29 appropriately guides the moving game ball in a predetermined direction. The taxiway 530 is formed by a shutter 610 and a substantially plate-shaped member (wall portion) erected rearward from the front plate portion 520. The taxiway 530 includes a first taxiway 531 and a second taxiway 532 and a third taxiway 533.

As described above, the taxiway 530 (more specifically, the first taxiway 531) is formed by the shutter 610. Here, as will be described later, the shutter 610 is configured to be able to move forward and backward with respect to the base member 510 via the slit 511. In such a configuration of the shutter 610, the first taxiway 531 is formed when the shutter 610 advances forward with respect to the base member 510. Therefore, in the following, for convenience, the shutter 610 will be described as being in a state of advancing forward with respect to the base member 510 (a state in which the first taxiway 531 is formed).

The first taxiway 531 is arranged near the upper end portion of the special electric accessory space R2. The first taxiway 531 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from the right side to the left side while gently sloping. The length of the first taxiway 531 in the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) is formed to be slightly shorter than that of the base member 510. The left end portion of the first taxiway 531 is formed in the vicinity of the left end portion of the special electric accessory space R2. The right end portion of the first taxiway 531 is formed in the vicinity of the right end portion of the special electric accessory space R2. The first taxiway 531 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from right to left. The first taxiway 531 includes a deceleration rib 534.

The deceleration rib 534 reduces the moving speed of the game ball guided (moved) by the first taxiway 531 (deceleration means). The reduction rib 534 is composed of a plurality of rear projections 534a projecting forward from the base member 510, and a plurality of front projections 534b projecting rearward from the front plate portion 520. In this embodiment, six posterior projections 534a are provided. Further, five front protrusions 534b are provided. These plurality of posterior projections 534a and anterior projections 534b are arranged at appropriate intervals along the extending direction (left-right direction) of the first taxiway 531. The appropriate interval is set to be at least longer than the diameter of the game ball. Further, these plurality of posterior projections 534a and anterior projections 534b are arranged so as not to overlap each other in the front view (so as not to face each other in the front-rear direction but to be displaced in the left-right direction).

With such a configuration of the first taxiway 531, the game ball (moved by the first taxiway 531) moves in a zigzag manner in a plan view while colliding with the posterior projection 534a and the anterior projection 534b. (Because the smooth movement of the game ball is restricted), the movement speed will decrease.

By reducing the moving speed of the game balls moved by the first taxiway 531 in this way, it is possible to create a situation in which a plurality of game balls are moving on the first taxiway 531. In this way, when a plurality of game balls are moving on the first taxiway 531, the plurality of game balls are guided to the third taxiway 533 only by opening the shutter 610 once. However, it is possible to win a prize in the large prize opening 540. That is, it is possible to quickly perform round digestion in a jackpot game. Further, even if the opening time of the shutter 610 is short, if many game balls are retained on the shutter 610, many prizes can be generated. In addition, since many game balls can be won at one time, it is easy to generate more prizes (so-called over prizes) than can be won in one round of big hit games.

The second taxiway 532 is arranged immediately to the right of the first taxiway 531 in the special electric accessory space R2. The second taxiway 532 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from the right side to the left side while gently sloping. The inclination angle of the second taxiway 532 is formed to be substantially the same as the inclination angle of the first taxiway 531. In this way, the second taxiway 532, together with the first taxiway 531 is configured as one substantially linear taxiway that gently slopes from right to left. The second taxiway 532 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from the right side to the left side (first taxiway 531 side).

The third taxiway 533 is arranged in the substantially central portion of the special electric accessory space R2 in the vertical direction. The third taxiway 533 is formed in a substantially straight line extending from the right side to the left side while gently sloping. The third taxiway 533 is arranged below the first taxiway 531. The third taxiway 533 is formed to have substantially the same shape and size as the first taxiway 531 in front view.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29 and the like, a wall portion connected to the third taxiway 533 is arranged between the left end portion of the third taxiway 533 and the left end portion of the first taxiway 531. Further, a wall portion connected to the third taxiway 533 is arranged between the right end portion of the third taxiway 533 and the right end portion of the second taxiway 532. In this way, the third taxiway 533 is formed in a concave shape in the front view.

The third taxiway 533 configured in this way guides the moving game ball from the right side to the left side (large winning opening 540 side). The third taxiway 533 includes a guide portion 535.

The guide portion 535 is formed at the bottom of the third taxiway 533. The guide portion 535 is a plate-shaped member having a substantially triangular shape in a plan view. The guide unit 535 is configured to be able to guide the game ball guided (moved) by the third taxiway 533 backward.

The large winning opening 540 shown in FIGS. 25, 26, 28 and 29 is formed by the base member 510 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The large winning opening 540 is formed behind the lowermost part of the third taxiway 533 (behind the guide portion 535). The large winning opening 540 is provided with a count switch 541. As shown in FIG. 25, the count switch 541 is arranged below the rear of the large winning opening 540.

The rear case 550 shown in FIGS. 21, 23 to 25, 29, 31 and 32 includes various members (shutter 610, large winning opening solenoid 620, link arm 630, etc.) constituting the special electric accessory 600. ) Is accommodated. The rear case 550 is formed in a substantially rectangular hollow substantially box shape in a plan view. As shown in FIG. 31, in the rear case 550, the upper space and the lower space are partitioned by a substantially flat plate-shaped mounting portion 551 formed in a substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. That is, the rear case 550 is formed into a two-story structure by the mounting portion 551, and predetermined members are arranged in each of the upper space and the lower space. Specifically, a shutter 610, a link arm 630, and the like are arranged in the upper space. Further, a large winning opening solenoid 620 or the like is arranged in the lower space. The rear case 550 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 via screws or the like. The inside and the outside of the rear case 550 (in front of the base member 510) are communicated with each other through the slit 511.

[Special electric accessory]
Hereinafter, the configuration of the special electric accessory 6000 according to the second embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 33 to 48.

The special electric accessory 6000 switches between a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the large winning opening 540 of the game ball (open state) and a state in which it is difficult to win a prize in the large winning opening 540 of the game ball (closed state). Although it is a member that operates for this purpose, the arrangement configuration and the like of various members will be described below assuming that the member is in a closed state unless otherwise specified.

As shown in FIGS. 33 to 35, the special electric accessory 6000 includes an accommodating portion 6001, a shutter 6002, a large winning opening solenoid 6003, a link arm 6004, and a regulating member 6005.

The accommodating portion 6001 shown in FIGS. 33 to 36 is a member accommodating various members (shutter 6002, large winning opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, regulating member 6005, etc.) constituting the special electric accessory 6000. The accommodating portion 6001 is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper side and the front side open. The accommodating portion 6001 is attached to the rear side surface of the base member 510 (see FIG. 21 and the like) via a screw or the like. The accommodating portion 6001 includes a communication opening 6011, a support shaft 6012, a boss portion 6013, and an induction opening 6014.

The communication opening 6011 communicates the upper side and the lower side of the accommodating portion 6001. The communication opening 6011 is formed on the right side of the accommodating portion 6001. The communication opening 6011 is formed so as to penetrate the accommodating portion 6001 in the vertical direction. The communication opening 6011 is formed so as to surround the boss portion 6013, which will be described later, from the rear to the right in a plan view.

The support shaft 6012 rotatably supports the link arm 6004 described later. The support shaft 6012 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The support shaft 6012 is formed so as to project upward. The support shaft 6012 is the right rear portion of the accommodating portion 6001 and is formed behind the communication opening 6011.

The boss portion 6013 rotatably supports the regulating member 6005 described later. The boss portion 6013 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The boss portion 6013 is formed so as to project upward. The boss portion 6013 is near the center of the accommodating portion 6001 (slightly to the right from the center) in a plan view, and is formed on the left front side of the communication opening 6011. In the appropriate drawings such as FIGS. 33 to 35, the boss portion 6013 shows a state in which a screw is attached to support the regulating member 6005.

The guide opening 6014 is for inserting the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 described later. More specifically, as will be described later, it defines a movement (displacement) path of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005. The guide opening 6014 is formed in the vicinity of the center of the accommodating portion 6001 (slightly to the right of the center and to the left of the boss portion 6013) in a plan view. The guide opening 6014 is formed so as to penetrate the accommodating portion 6001 in the vertical direction. The guide opening 6014 is formed in a substantially L-shape in a plan view bent in the middle from one end to the other end in the longitudinal direction. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 36 (a), the lead opening 6014 comprises a first lead opening 6016 and a second lead opening 6017.

The first guide opening 6016 is formed so as to extend substantially linearly in the left-right direction. The first guide opening 6016 is formed rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the center P of the boss portion 6013. The length of the first guide opening 6016 in the left-right direction is formed to be substantially the same as the length of the connecting opening 6036 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003, which will be described later.

The second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to extend in an arc shape in a plan view. More specifically, the second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to overlap a part of the virtual circle centered on the center P of the boss portion 6013 (see the arrow of the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 36 (a)). In this way, the second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to extend along the outer shape of the boss portion 6013 in a plan view in the vicinity of the boss portion 6013. The rear end of the second lead opening 6017 is connected to the left end of the first lead opening 6016. The front end portion of the second guide opening 6017 is formed forward in the front-rear direction with respect to the center P of the boss portion 6013.

The shutter 6002 shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 is a member (a member that switches between an open state and a closed state) that opens and closes the large winning opening 540 by the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 described later. The configuration of the shutter 6002 is substantially the same as that of the shutter 610 of the special electric accessory 600 according to the first embodiment (see FIGS. 29 and 30C). The shutter 6002 includes an elongated plate portion 6021, a connecting plate portion 6022, and a connecting shaft 6023.

The elongated plate portion 6021 is a member that forms the first taxiway 531 (see FIG. 29 and the like). The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed in an elongated substantially flat plate shape. The elongated plate portion 6021 is formed so that the longitudinal direction is directed to the left-right direction in a plan view and the elongated plate portion 6021 is downward to the left in a front view (so that the upper side surface faces the upper left side).

The connecting plate portion 6022 is a member that connects the elongated plate portion 6021 and the connecting shaft 6023 described later. The connecting plate portion 6022 is formed in a substantially rectangular flat plate shape in a plan view. The connecting plate portion 6022 is formed so as to extend rearward from the central portion in the left-right direction of the elongated plate portion 6021.

The connecting shaft 6023 is connected to the link arm 6004 described later. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed so as to project upward. The connecting shaft 6023 is formed in the vicinity of the rear end portion of the connecting plate portion 6022.

In the shutter 6002 having such a configuration, the elongated plate portion 6021 is inserted into the slit 511 (see FIG. 29 and the like) from the rear, and the connecting plate portion 6022 is placed on the bottom surface of the accommodating portion 6001. It is housed in 6001. The shutter 6002 is configured to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the accommodating portion 6001.

The large winning opening solenoid 6003 shown in FIGS. 34, 35 and 37 is a member for driving the shutter 6002. The winning opening solenoid 6003 includes a solenoid accommodating unit 6031, a power generating unit 6032, a plunger 6033, a power transmission unit 6034, and a spring 6035.

The solenoid accommodating unit 6031 is a member accommodating various members constituting the large winning opening solenoid 6003. The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper side. The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is arranged so that the longitudinal direction is directed to the left-right direction. The solenoid accommodating portion 6031 is attached to the accommodating portion 6001 from below.

The power generation unit 6032 is a member that generates power for the large winning opening solenoid 6003. The power generation unit 6032 is composed of a coil, a fixed iron core, or the like (not shown). The power generation unit 6032 can suck the plunger 6033, which will be described later, in response to the energization from the predetermined power source. The power generation unit 6032 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape. The power generation unit 6032 is housed inside (left part) of the solenoid accommodating unit 6031 with the longitudinal direction (axial direction) facing left and right.

The plunger 6033 is a member (movable iron core) formed in a substantially rod shape. The plunger 6033 is arranged so that the longitudinal direction (axial direction) is directed to the left-right direction. The plunger 6033 is arranged so as to extend to the right from the power generation unit 6032. The plunger 6033 is configured to be able to reciprocate in the left-right direction with respect to the power generation unit 6032.

The power transmission unit 6034 is a member that transmits the power generated by the large winning opening solenoid 6003 to another member (specifically, the link arm 6004). The power transmission unit 6034 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The power transmission unit 6034 is housed inside (right portion) of the solenoid accommodating portion 6031 and is attached to the right end portion of the plunger 6033. The power transmission unit 6034 includes a connection opening 6036 and a connection protrusion 6037.

The connecting opening 6036 is connected to the link arm 6004 described later. The connecting opening 6036 is formed on the right side of the power transmission unit 6034 in a plan view. The connecting opening 6036 is formed so as to penetrate the power transmission unit 6034 in the vertical direction.

The connecting protrusion 6037 is connected to the regulating member 6005 described later. The connecting protrusion 6037 is formed by a pair of plate-shaped portions formed so as to protrude upward. The pair of plate-shaped portions are formed so as to be parallel to each other on the left and right sides. With such a configuration, the connecting protrusion 6037 has a gap extending in the front-rear direction between the pair of plate-shaped portions. The connecting protrusion 6037 is formed at the left rear end of the power transmission portion 6034. In the following, the connecting protrusion 6037 refers to the gap.

The spring 6035 is a so-called compression coil spring. The spring 6035 is arranged between the power generation unit 6032 and the power transmission unit 6034 in a state in which the plunger 6033 is inserted and is always compressed. In this way, the spring 6035 always gives a rightward urging force to the plunger 6033 (power transmission unit 6034).

In the large winning opening solenoid 6003 having such a configuration, when the power generation unit 6032 is not energized, the plunger 6033 moves to the right by the urging force of the spring 6035. On the other hand, when the power generation unit 6032 is energized, the plunger 6033 moves to the left against the urging force of the spring 6035 by the suction force of the power generation unit 6032. As described above, in the large winning opening solenoid 6003, the plunger 6033 can be reciprocated in the left-right direction with respect to the power generation unit 6032 by turning on and off the power generation unit 6032 to generate power.

In the present embodiment, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the right (that is, when the power generating unit 6032 is not energized), the shutter 6002 slides forward to move the game ball. It becomes difficult to win a prize in the large winning opening 540 (closed state). On the other hand, when the plunger 6033 is moving to the left (that is, when the power generating unit 6032 is energized), the shutter 6002 slides backward to the large winning opening 540 of the game ball. It becomes a state where it is easy to win a prize (open state).

The link arm 6004 shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 and 38 connects the large winning opening solenoid 6003 and the shutter 6002 in an interlocking manner (interlocking connection), and transmits the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 to the shutter 6002. It is a member. The link arm 6004 is formed in a substantially L-shape in a plan view by a portion extending substantially in the left-right direction (first link extending portion 6041) and a portion extending substantially in the front-rear direction (second link extending portion 6042). Will be done. The link arm 6004 includes a central cylinder portion 6043, a connecting opening 6044, a connecting shaft 6045, and a regulating protrusion 6046.

The central tubular portion 6043 is inserted through the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001. The central tubular portion 6043 is formed in a substantially center of the link arm 6004 (a connection portion between the first link extending portion 6041 and the second link extending portion 6042) in a plan view. The central tubular portion 6043 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. When the support shaft 6012 is inserted through the central cylinder portion 6043, the link arm 6004 is rotatably supported clockwise or counterclockwise with respect to the central cylinder portion 6043 in a plan view.

The connecting opening 6044 is inserted through the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002. The connecting opening 6044 is formed at the left (front) end of the first link extending portion 6041. The connecting opening 6044 is formed so as to penetrate the first link extending portion 6041 in the vertical direction. The connecting opening 6044 is formed in a long hole shape extending linearly from the tip end side to the base end portion side (central cylinder portion 6043 side). The length of the connecting opening 6044 in the lateral direction in the plan view is formed so as to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002.

The connecting shaft 6045 is connected to the connecting opening 6036 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed so as to project downward. The connecting shaft 6045 is formed at the front (front) end of the second link extending portion 6042. The outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6045 is formed to be smaller than the inner diameter (length in the left-right direction) of the connecting opening 6036 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003.

The regulation protrusion 6046 is in contact with the regulation block 6054 of the regulation member 6005, which will be described later, in a predetermined case. The regulation protrusion 6046 is formed in a plate shape so as to protrude downward. The regulation protrusion 6046 is formed in the vicinity of the base end portion of the first link extension portion 6041 and is formed on the front left side of the central cylinder portion 6043 in a plan view. The rear side surface of the regulation protrusion 6046 is formed so as to be a flat surface facing rearward.

The restricting member 6005 shown in FIGS. 33 to 35 and 39 is a member for restricting the unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state. The regulating member 6005 includes a central cylinder portion 6053, a regulating block portion 6054, a connecting shaft 6055, and an induction shaft 6056.

The central tubular portion 6053 is inserted into the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001. The central tubular portion 6053 is formed substantially in the center of the regulating member 6005 in a plan view. The central tubular portion 6053 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. Further, the central tubular portion 6053 is formed in a long hole shape extending in the left-right direction in a plan view.

Further, a plate-shaped portion (first regulation extension portion 6051) extending so as to spread in a plan view is formed on the right rear side of the central cylinder portion 6053. Further, on the left side of the central tubular portion 6053, a plate-shaped portion (second regulation extension portion 6052) extending so as to spread in a plan view is formed. In this way, the central cylinder portion 6053, the first regulation extension portion 6051, and the second regulation extension portion 6052 are formed in a substantially L-shape in terms of their positional relationship with each other in a plan view. When the boss portion 6013 is inserted through the central cylinder portion 6053, the regulating member 6005 is pivotally supported clockwise or counterclockwise around the central cylinder portion 6053 in a plan view.

The regulation block portion 6054 is in contact with the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 in a predetermined case. The regulation block portion 6054 is a substantially rectangular parallelepiped (block-shaped) portion protruding upward. The regulation block portion 6054 is formed substantially in the center of the first regulation extension portion 6051 (that is, to the right rear of the central cylinder portion 6053) in a plan view. The front side surface of the regulation block portion 6054 is formed so as to be a flat surface facing forward.

The connecting shaft 6055 is connected to the large winning opening solenoid 6003. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed so as to project downward. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed substantially in the center of the first regulation extension portion 6051 (that is, to the right rear of the central cylinder portion 6053) in a plan view. In this way, the axis of the connecting shaft 6055 is formed so as to substantially overlap with the axis of the regulation block portion 6054 in the vertical direction. The outer diameter of the connecting shaft 6055 is formed so as to be smaller than the width of the connecting protrusion 6037 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037) of the power transmission unit 6034.

The guide shaft 6056 is inserted through the guide opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001. The guide shaft 6056 is formed in a substantially columnar shape with the longitudinal direction directed in the vertical direction. The guide shaft 6056 is formed so as to project downward. The connecting shaft 6055 is formed substantially in the center of the second regulation extension portion 6052 (that is, to the left of the central cylinder portion 6053) in a plan view. The outer diameter of the guide shaft 6056 is formed so as to be substantially the same as the length of the guide opening 6014 (first guide opening 6016 and second guide opening 6017) in the lateral view.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 33 to 35 and FIGS. 40 to 44, the assembly configuration of the accommodating portion 6001, the shutter 6002, the large winning opening solenoid 6003, the link arm 6004, and the regulating member 6005 in the special electric accessory 6000 will be described. do.

In the drawings after FIG. 43, the accommodating portion 6001 is shown by a broken line, but the support shaft 6012, the boss portion 6013, and the guide opening portion 6014 are shown by solid lines for convenience of explanation. Further, in the drawings after FIG. 43, the link arm 6004 is shown by a broken line, but the regulating protrusion 6046 is shown by a solid line for convenience of explanation. Further, in the drawings after FIG. 44, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the configuration of each member is simplified.

First, the outline of the assembly configuration of various members (shutter 6002, large winning opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, and regulation member 6005) with respect to the accommodating portion 6001 will be described.

The shutter 6002 is placed on the bottom surface of the accommodating portion 6001. In this way, the shutter 6002 is arranged so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction with respect to the accommodating portion 6001.

Further, the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is attached to the accommodating portion 6001 from below. In this way, the upper side and the lower side of the accommodating portion 6001 (power transmission portion 6034 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003) are communicated with each other via the communication opening 6011.

Further, the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001 is inserted into the central tubular portion 6043 of the link arm 6004 so as to be relatively rotatable from below. In this way, the link arm 6004 is rotatably supported by the accommodating portion 6001 clockwise or counterclockwise with respect to the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001 in a plan view.

Further, the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 is inserted into the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 so as to be relatively rotatable from below. In this way, the regulating member 6005 is rotatably supported by the accommodating portion 6001 clockwise or counterclockwise with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 in a plan view.

Next, the details of the assembly configuration of various members will be described.

As described above, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 moves downward to the accommodating portion 6001 via the communication opening 6011 of the accommodating portion 6001. Is projected. The connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is inserted from above into the connecting opening 6036 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003 below the accommodating portion 6001. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the large winning opening solenoid 6003 are interlocked with each other via the connecting shaft 6045 and the connecting opening 6036.

As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is arranged so as to be in contact with the left edge portion of the connecting opening 6036 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003. That is, the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 is arranged with a gap in the left-right direction in a plan view between the connecting shaft 6045 and the right edge portion of the connecting opening 6036 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003.

Further, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 is inserted from below into the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 are interlocked with each other via the connecting opening 6044 and the connecting shaft 6023.

Further, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001, the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 is in contact with the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005.

As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the rear side surface of the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front surface of the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 are planes parallel to each other. There is surface contact (not contact).

Further, in a state where the link arm 6004 is supported by the support shaft 6012 of the accommodating portion 6001, as shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 is the central cylinder of the regulating member 6005. It is arranged so as to be in contact with the left edge portion of the portion 6053.

Further, in a state where the restricting member 6005 is supported by the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the restricting member 6005 protrudes downward of the accommodating portion 6001 via the communication opening 6011 of the accommodating portion 6001. Will be done. The connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 is inserted from above into the connecting protrusion 6037 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037) of the large winning opening solenoid 6003 below the accommodating portion 6001. In this way, the link arm 6004 and the restricting member 6005 are interlockably connected to each other via the connecting shaft 6055 and the connecting protrusion 6037.

As shown in FIG. 44 (b), the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 is arranged in front of the connecting protrusion 6037 (that is, the gap of the connecting protrusion 6037) of the large winning opening solenoid 6003.

Further, in a state where the regulating member 6005 is supported by the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is inserted from above into the guiding opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001.

As shown in FIG. 44 (b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is the first guide opening among the first guide opening 6016 and the second guide opening 6017 of the guide opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001. It is arranged so as to be located within the portion 6016 (more specifically, to abut the right end of the first lead opening 6016).

As described above, in the state where the left edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the guiding shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the first guiding opening 6016. It will be in contact with the right end of.

In the following, using FIGS. 44 and 48, unintentional opening (more specifically) of the shutter 6002 by the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the regulating member 6005 and the accommodating portion 6001 when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state. Explains in detail the regulation of the unintentional rotation of the link arm 6004 and the unintentional movement of the shutter 6002).

In the present embodiment, the unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 is not an opening according to the power generated by the large winning opening solenoid 6003, but an external force directly applied to the shutter 6002 (for example, a game ball to the shutter 6002). It refers to the opening in response to a collision (or a fraudulent act on the shutter 6002 performed by a fraudulent person).

In the following description, the rotation direction of each member is based on a plan view unless otherwise specified. Further, in the following description, a state in which the unintentional opening of the shutter 6002 is restricted by the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the regulating member 6005 and the accommodating portion 6001 is referred to as a “locked state”.

In the special electric accessory 6000 assembled as described above, when an external force (a force that slides the shutter 6002 backward) is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the shutter 6002 is moved through the connecting opening 6044 and the connecting shaft 6023. , A force that rotates clockwise is transmitted from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004.

As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the regulating protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 is rearward (that is, the moving direction when the link arm rotates clockwise) with the regulating block portion 6054 of the regulating member 6005. Be abutted. Therefore, when a force that rotates clockwise is transmitted from the shutter 6002 to the link arm 6004, the link arm 6004 counterclockwise to the regulation member 6005 via the regulation protrusion 6046 and the regulation block 6054. A rotating force is transmitted.

Here, as shown in FIG. 44 (b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is located in the first guide opening 6016 (more specifically, with the right end of the first guide opening 6016). Arranged (to abut). That is, the edge portion (hereinafter referred to as the front side edge portion) of the first guide opening 6016 is arranged in front of the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 (moving direction when the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). To. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 48 (a), even when a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulating member 6005, the induction shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is the first. The restricting member 6005 cannot rotate because it interferes with the front edge of the guide opening 6016.

As described above, since the regulating member 6005 cannot rotate, the link arm 6004 transmitting the force to the regulating member 6005 cannot rotate either. Further, since the link arm 6004 cannot rotate, the shutter 6002 transmitting the force to the link arm 6004 cannot also move. That is, even when an external force is directly applied to the shutter 6002, the shutter 6002 does not move backward against the external force and can maintain the closed state.

As described above, when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is located in the first guide opening 6016, the shutter 6002 is intended by the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the regulating member 6005 and the accommodating portion 6001. It is in a state (locked state) in which the opening (more specifically, the unintentional rotation of the link arm 6004 and the unintentional movement of the shutter 6002) is restricted.

In the locked state, when a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the restricting member 6005, the rear side surface of the restricting protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the restricting block portion 6054 The front side surfaces are pressed against each other with a relatively strong force. However, since the rear side surface of the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the front surface of the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 are in surface contact with each other instead of point contact as described above, the durability of each is improved. Can be made to.

Hereinafter, the configuration in which the shutter 6002 is opened according to the power generated by the large winning opening solenoid 6003 when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 44 to 48.

As will be described later, when the shutter 6002 is opened in response to the power generated by the large winning opening solenoid 6003, the regulating member 6005 and the accommodating portion 6001 are different from the case where an external force is directly applied to the shutter 6002. The locked state by the induction opening 6014 (locking means) is released.

When the induction shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is located in the first induction opening 6016 (when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state), when the shutter 6002 is opened, the power generation unit 6032 of the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is energized. Is done. When the power generation unit 6032 is energized, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the plunger 6033 starts to move to the left, and power is generated by the large winning opening solenoid 6003. Further, when the movement of the plunger 6033 to the left is started, the power transmission unit 6034 (connecting opening 6036 and connecting protrusion 6037) fixed to the right end portion of the plunger 6033 also moves to the left in the same manner.

When the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 moves to the left, the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the regulating member 6005 via the connecting protrusion 6037 and the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005. .. Specifically, the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left. In this way, when the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted, the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the accommodating portion 6001.

Specifically, the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, and the right edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 abuts on the boss portion 6013. Further, the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the first guide opening 6016 of the accommodating portion 6001, and the left end portion of the first guide opening 6016 (rear end of the second guide opening 6017). Part).

In the following, the movement of the power transmission unit 6034 until the right edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulation member 6005 is brought into contact with the boss portion 6013 (the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is accommodated in the first induction opening portion of the accommodating portion 6001). The movement until it comes into contact with the left end portion of 6016) is referred to as "first movement of the power transmission unit 6034". Further, the movement of the power transmission unit 6034 after the right edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulation member 6005 is brought into contact with the boss portion 6013 (the guide shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is accommodated in the first induction opening 6016 of the accommodating portion 6001). The movement after being brought into contact with the left end portion of the power transmission unit 6034 is referred to as "second movement of the power transmission unit 6034".

Further, when the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 moves to the left due to the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the connection opening 6036 moves to the left with respect to the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. Then, the right edge of the connecting opening 6036 comes into contact with the connecting shaft 6045. In the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 does not press any of the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 during the movement. That is, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the power from the grand prize opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004.

In the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the timing at which the induction shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 abuts on the left end portion of the first induction opening 6016 (the rear end portion of the second induction opening 6017) and the regulation. The timing at which the right edge of the central tubular portion 6053 of the member 6005 abuts on the boss portion 6013 and the timing at which the right edge of the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmission portion 6034 abuts on the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 are all. It is set to be almost the same.

Further, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the induction shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is located in the first induction opening 6016, and the front of the guidance shaft 6056 (the regulation member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). The front edge portion of the first guide opening 6016 is arranged in the moving direction). That is, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, even when a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the regulation member 6005, the induction shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 is used. Since it interferes with the front side edge portion of the first guide opening 6016, the locked state by the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the regulating member 6005 and the accommodating portion 6001 is continued.

Further, as described above, in the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034, the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is not transmitted to the link arm 6004. That is, the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted from the power transmission unit 6034 to the regulation member 6005, but not to other members (for example, the link arm 6004). In this way, although the restricting member 6005 moves to the left, the link arm 6004 and the shutter 6002 do not rotate (move) in any direction, and maintain the posture when the shutter 6002 is in the closed state. Become.

In such a state, as shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, when the power transmission unit 6034 moves further to the left (when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement), the connecting protrusion of the power transmission unit 6034 Power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the regulating member 6005 via the connecting shaft 6055 of the 6037 and the regulating member 6005. Specifically, the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left.

Here, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement, the right edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is in contact with the boss portion 6013. That is, the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 cannot move to the left with respect to the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001. Therefore, when the connecting protrusion 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left, the regulating member 6005 tends to rotate counterclockwise around the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001.

Further, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement, the induction shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 hits the left end portion (rear end portion of the second induction opening 6017) of the first induction opening 6016 of the accommodating portion 6001. Being touched. The second guide opening 6017 is formed so as to overlap a part of the virtual circle centered on the center P of the boss portion 6013. That is, an opening is formed in front of the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 (movement direction when the restricting member 6005 rotates counterclockwise) along a locus on which the guide shaft 6056 moves (). There is nothing to interfere with when the induction shaft 6056 moves).

In this way, when the connecting protrusion 6037 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left and the regulating member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, FIG. 48. As shown in (b), the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 is guided by the second guide opening 6017 of the accommodating portion 6001, and the second guide opening 6017 moves forward. When the restricting member 6005 tries to rotate counterclockwise around the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001, the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 moves rearward relative to the power transmission portion 6034. I will do it.

In the regulating member 6005, the position of the center of rotation is different in the left-right direction depending on whether the power transmission unit 6034 makes the first movement or the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement as described above. ing. Specifically, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the first movement, the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 that is in contact with the left edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is positioned at the center of rotation. And. When the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement, the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001 that is in contact with the right edge portion of the central cylinder portion 6053 of the regulating member 6005 is set as the position of the rotation center.

In this way, the regulating member 6005 is moved to the front side of the first guide opening 6016 in front of the guide shaft 6056 (moving direction when the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise) by changing the position of the rotation center. It is switching whether there is an edge or the second lead opening 6017 is extended.

In this way, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement, the locked state of the guide opening 6014 (locking means) of the restricting member 6005 and the accommodating unit 6001 is released, and the induction shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is accommodated. The second guide opening 6017 of the portion 6001 can be moved forward. That is, when the connecting protrusion 6037 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6055 of the regulating member 6005 to the left, the regulating member 6005 rotates counterclockwise around the boss portion 6013 of the accommodating portion 6001. do.

Further, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement, the right edge portion of the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 is in contact with the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. That is, the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the link arm 6004 via the connection opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 and the connection shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004. Specifically, the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 to the left. In this way, when the connecting opening 6036 of the power transmission unit 6034 presses the connecting shaft 6045 of the link arm 6004 to the left, the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise.

When the power transmission unit 6034 is performing the first movement (when it is in the locked state), when the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, that is, with the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004. When a force that rotates counterclockwise is transmitted from the link arm 6004 to the restricting member 6005 via the restricting block portion 6054 of the restricting member 6005, the guide shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 opens the first induction opening. The restricting member 6005 could not rotate because it interfered with the front edge of the portion 6016.

However, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement, the induction shaft 6056 of the regulation member 6005 can move the second induction opening 6017 of the accommodation unit 6001 forward as described above, so that the regulation member The regulation block portion 6054 of 6005 will also move backward. When the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 moves rearward, it moves in a direction away from the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004.

Therefore, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement and the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block 6054 of the regulation member 6005 Does not interfere with. That is, the link arm 6004 can rotate counterclockwise.

Further, when the link arm 6004 rotates counterclockwise, the power from the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is transmitted to the shutter 6002 via the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 and the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002. Specifically, the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 presses the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 backward. In this way, when the connecting opening 6044 of the link arm 6004 presses the connecting shaft 6023 of the shutter 6002 backward, the shutter 6002 starts sliding backward.

The second movement of the power transmission unit 6034 ends when the induction shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 reaches the front end portion of the second induction opening 6017 of the accommodating portion 6001, as shown in FIG. 47. In this way, when the guide shaft 6056 of the regulating member 6005 reaches the front end portion of the second guide opening 6017 of the accommodating portion 6001, the shutter 6002 is opened.

As described above, the configuration in which the shutter 6002 is released from the closed state has been described, but when the shutter 6002 is closed from the open state, the shutter 6002 is opened after the energization of the large winning opening solenoid 6003 is stopped. Various members (shutter 6002, large winning opening solenoid 6003, link arm 6004, and regulation member 6005) operate in the reverse order of the above.

Here, conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a technique of providing a displaceable displacement member at a position where a game ball easily passes and a position where the game ball is difficult to pass, for example, with respect to a passing area. Is known. For example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-307103.

In the technique described in JP-A-2008-307103, a door member of a winning device is provided as the displacement member. Further, a solenoid is adopted as a drive source for displacing the door member (moving it back and forth between the opening position and the closing position).

Further, in the technique described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-307103, the locking portion provided in the transmission means of the solenoid and the engaging protrusion provided in the door member come into contact with each other to close the door. It is possible to restrict (lock) the door member from being opened at the position.

However, since the locking portion and the engaging protrusion are required to have a certain degree of accuracy in their positional relationship with each other, if there is aged deterioration of the solenoid or foreign matter is mixed in the drive path of the solenoid, they are completely compatible with each other. Will not contact. In this way, if the lock portion and the engaging protrusion are not completely in contact with each other, the door member may be loosened or the door member may be slightly opened at the closed position (unintended displacement is performed). There was a possibility) and it was inconvenient.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and when the displacement member is displaced to a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass, the unintended displacement of the displacement member is more reliably regulated. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be used.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is
A game board 17 having a game area 20 on which the game ball rolls, and a second starting port 440 (passing area) provided in the game area 20 through which the game ball can pass.
Displacement members (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) that can be displaced to a position where the game ball can easily pass and a position where the game ball cannot easily pass with respect to the second starting port 440 (passing area).
The large winning opening solenoid 6003 (driving means) that drives the displacement member, and
A gaming machine provided with a main control circuit 100 (drive control means) capable of controlling the grand prize opening solenoid 6003 (drive means).
The displacement member is in a state where the displacement is controlled to a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass, and the main control circuit 100 (drive control means) is controlled to displace the displacement member to a position where the game ball can easily pass. The displacement member is provided with a locking means (regulating member 6005 and induction opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001) that can lock the displacement member at a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through.
The large winning opening solenoid 6003 (driving means) can transmit the power generated by the power generating unit 6032 to the displacement member by coming into contact with the power generating unit 6032 that generates power and at least a part of the displacement member. Power transmission unit 6034, including
The locking means has a restricting member 6005 (displacement portion) that regulates the displacement of the displacement member by contacting at least a part of the displacement member, and an induction opening 6014 (displacement guidance) that regulates the displacement path of the restricting portion. Part), and the displacement path is different from the first lead opening 6016 (first displacement section) and the first lead opening 6016 (first displacement section). (Second displacement section), the displacement member is displaced to a position where the game ball can easily pass and a position where the game ball is difficult to pass in a state where at least a part thereof is in contact with the power transmission unit 6034. Controlled, the restricting member 6005 (displacement section) can be displaced along the guide opening 6014 (displacement guiding section) with the displacement of the power transmission section 6034, and the locking means is the regulating member 6005. When the (regulatory portion) is located in the first guide opening 6016 (first displacement section), the locked state of the displacement member is maintained, and the restrictor 6005 (regulatory portion) is the second guide opening 6017. When it is located in (second displacement section), the locked state of the displacement member is released.

With such a configuration, the locking means (induction opening 6014 of the regulating member 6005 and the accommodating portion 6001) is provided only when, for example, the induction shaft 6056 of the restricting member 6005 is located at the right end of the first induction opening 6016. Instead, the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) can be kept locked while the lead shaft 6056 is located within the first lead opening 6016. That is, even when the positional relationship between the regulating member 6005 and the induction opening 6014 of the accommodating portion 6001 is slightly deviated (for example, even if the power transmission unit 6034 is not arranged in the normal position), the locked state. Can be maintained. Therefore, when the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is displaced to a position where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through, the unintended displacement of the displacement member (shutter 6002 and link arm 6004) is more reliably regulated. can do.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the displacement of the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) includes movement and rotation, and the locking means is such that the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is the first. When it is located in the one-lead opening 6016 (first displacement section), the rotation of the restricting member 6005 (regulating portion) is restricted and locked while the restricting member 6005 (regulating portion) can be moved. When the state is maintained and the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is located in the second induction opening 6017 (second displacement section), the position of the rotation center of the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion) is regulated. By making the member 6005 (regulatory portion) different from the case where it is located in the first induction opening 6016 (first displacement section), the restricting member 6005 (regulatory portion) can be rotated and the locked state is released. It is something to do.

With such a configuration, the regulating member 6005 (regulating portion), which is one member, can switch between maintaining and releasing the locked state by a combination of two operations (movement and rotation). In this way, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where, for example, a member that performs two operations (movement and rotation) is provided. In particular, in the special electric accessory as in the present embodiment, the space for arranging the parts is limited, so that it is useful to have such a configuration.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment,
The displacement member includes a shutter 6002 (game ball guiding portion) for guiding the game ball and a link arm 6004 (link portion) connected to the game ball guiding portion, and the power transmission unit 6034 is the link arm. It is in contact with 6004 (link portion).

With such a configuration, since the power transmission unit 6034 is in contact with the link arm 6004 (link unit) instead of the shutter 6002 (game ball guidance unit), it does not come into direct contact with the shutter 6002 (game ball guidance unit). The shutter 6002 (game ball guiding portion) can be locked.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above configuration, and various modifications can be made within the scope of the invention described in the claims.

For example, in the present embodiment, the special electric accessory 6000 has been described as an example of the object to be locked, but the object to be locked is not limited to this, and is an ordinary electric accessory or the like. You may.

Further, when the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034 is completed, the regulation block unit 6054 of the regulation member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the link arm 6004. In this way, when the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 moves to the left with respect to the link arm 6004, the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 are in contact with each other. It is possible to cancel the state. That is, the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block 6054 of the regulation member 6005 can be arranged so as not to overlap in the front-rear direction.

According to such a configuration, when the power transmission unit 6034 makes the second movement and the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the regulation protrusion 6046 and the regulation member 6005 of the link arm 6004 Interference with the regulation block portion 6054 (regulation of rotation of the link arm 6004) can be more reliably prevented.

Further, even when the first movement of the power transmission unit 6034 is completed, the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 and the regulation block 6054 of the regulation member 6005 are maintained in contact with each other, and the link arm is maintained. When the 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise, the regulation protrusion 6046 of the link arm 6004 presses the regulation block portion 6054 of the regulation member 6005 to assist the rotation of the regulation member 6005. ..

Further, the configuration of the guide opening 6014 (first guide opening 6016 and second guide opening 6017) is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment. For example, in the guide opening 6014 (displacement guide), when the power transmission unit 6034 is performing the first movement (when it is in the locked state), the link arm 6004 tries to rotate counterclockwise. In addition, it may be formed so as to interfere with the movement of the guide shaft 6056 in front of the guide shaft 6056 (the movement direction when the restricting member 6005 rotates counterclockwise). From the viewpoint of smoothly promoting the movement of the guide shaft 6056, the configuration according to the present embodiment formed along the movement path of the guide shaft 6056 is desirable.

[Structure of ordinary electric accessory unit 400]
The configuration of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. FIG. 49 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the ordinary electric accessory unit 400 viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view).

The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 is attached and fixed to the lower left of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the game area 20. The ordinary electric accessory unit 400 includes a general winning opening 53, 54, 55, a second starting opening 440, a second starting opening switch 441 for detecting the winning of a game ball to the second starting opening 440, and an out opening 450. A housing member 443 that receives the game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 440 and the game ball that has been accepted in the out port 450 and discharges it to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the front surface of the second starting port 440 and the out port 450. The front cover 445 provided in the above and the ordinary electric accessory 460 are provided. The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are formed in a plate-shaped opening forming member 420. The opening forming member 420 is formed with a hole 442 through which the rotation shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620, which will be described later, penetrates.

The second starting port 440 and the out port 450 are arranged adjacent to each other, the second starting port 440 is arranged on the right side in the front view, and the out port 450 is arranged on the left side in the front view.

On the back surface of the front cover 445, a wall 4452 that separates the second starting port 440 and the out port 450 is formed. The wall 4452 prevents the game ball (the game ball that wins the second starting port 440) that has passed through the upper part of the blade member 4620 when the blade member 4620 is opened from being accepted by the out port 450, and also prevents the game ball from being accepted by the out port 450. It has a function of preventing the game ball from winning the second starting port 440 when the blade member 4620 is not opened.

The second starting port switch 441 is arranged on the back side of the second starting port 440 so that the game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 440 can be detected.

The accommodating member 443 is provided with an opening 4434 and an opening 4436 at a portion corresponding to each of the second starting port 440 and the out opening 450, and the second starting port 440 is won and detected by the second starting port switch 441. The game ball is housed in the opening 4434, and the game ball received in the out opening 450 is housed in the opening 4436. The game balls housed in the openings 4434 and 4436 are collected by a game ball circulation facility provided in an island facility (not shown). Further, the accommodating member 443 has a hole 4432 through which the rotation shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620, which will be described later, penetrates.

[Composition of ordinary electric accessory 460]
The configuration of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 53. FIG. 51 is an example of a diagram showing an ordinary electric accessory 460, a second start port switch 441, and an accommodating member 443. FIG. 52 is a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460. FIG. 53 is an example of a rear view of the ordinary electric accessory 460 as viewed from diagonally above to the right.

The ordinary electric accessory 460 includes a base cover 4610, a blade member 4620, a start port solenoid 4630, and a power transmission mechanism 4640 that transmits power from the start port solenoid 4630 to the blade member 4620.

The base cover 4610 accommodates the starting port solenoid 4630 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 with the accommodating member 443, and is attached to the back surface side of the opening forming member 420. The back side of the base cover 4610 is attached and fixed to the transparent panel 172 described above. A guide groove 4612 long in the left-right direction is formed on the front side of the base cover 4610. Further, on the front side of the base cover 4610, a bearing (not shown) that rotatably supports the pin 4648 described later is formed.

The blade member 4620 is provided with a rotating shaft 4622 below the paper surface. The rotary shaft 4622 penetrates the hole 442 formed in the opening forming member 420 and the hole 4432 formed in the accommodating member 443, and is rotatably supported by the bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642 described later. The rotary shaft 4622 is notched at a portion pivotally supported by the bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642, and has a non-circular cross-sectional shape in the axial direction. Further, when the power from the starting port solenoid 4630 is transmitted to the rotating shaft 4622 as a rotational force by the power transmission mechanism 4640, the blade member 4620 rotates about the rotating shaft 4622 as the rotation center. In the present embodiment, the blade member 4620 is in a closed state when standing up, and is in an open state when rotated to the right with the rotation shaft 4622 as the rotation center from the closed state.

The starting port solenoid 4630 includes a plunger 4632 that expands and contracts in the left-right direction in the front view, and has a flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 (the tip on the right side in the front view). The start port solenoid 4630 is normally (non-excited) in a state in which the plunger 4632 is extended to the right in the front view, and when excited, the plunger 4632 moves to the left in the front view (contraction direction).

The power transmission mechanism 4640 converts such power into rotational force and transmits it to the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620 as the plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630 expands and contracts in the left-right direction. The power transmission mechanism 4640 is connected to the blade connecting member 4642 connected to the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620, the flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630, and the flange connecting member 4646 and the blade connecting member 4642. It is provided with a link member 4644 provided between the flange connecting member 4646 and the flange connecting member 4646.

The blade connecting member 4642 has a bearing 46444 that pivotally supports the rotating shaft 4622 of the blade member 4620. The bearing 46444 of the blade connecting member 4642 corresponds to the shape of the rotating shaft 4622 that supports the shaft. Therefore, the blade connecting member 4642 rotates with the rotating shaft 4622 about the rotating shaft 4622 as the rotation center. Further, the blade connecting member 4642 has a support shaft 46426 protruding toward the back surface side. The support shaft 46426 can rotate around a rotating shaft 4622 that is pivotally supported by the bearing 46424.

The link member 4644 is a member having a curved shape when viewed from the front, and an elongated hole 46442 is formed at an end portion below the front view. A support shaft 46426 of the blade connecting member 4642 is slidably connected to the elongated hole 46442. At the end of the link member 4644 above the front view, a support shaft 46446 protruding toward the back surface is formed. Below the support shaft 46446, an engagement shaft 46448 projecting to the back surface side is formed. A bearing 46444 that rotatably supports the pin 4648 is formed in the central portion of the link member 4644 (a portion where the angle of the dogleg is changed). The link member 4644 is rotatable about a pin 4648 pivotally supported by the bearing 46444 as a rotation center. When the link member 4644 rotates around the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the bearing 46444, the support shaft 46446 and the engaging shaft 46448 also rotate around the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the bearing 46444.

The flange connecting member 4646 has a flange holding portion 46462, a connecting hole 46464, and an engaging groove 46466. The flange holding portion 46462 sandwiches the flange 4634 at the tip of the plunger 4632 of the starting port solenoid 4630, and the flange connecting member 4646 moves in the expansion / contraction direction of the plunger 4632 as the plunger 4632 expands / contracts. A support shaft 46446 of the link member 4644 is connected to the connecting hole 46464 so as to be able to move in the connecting hole 46464. The engaging shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 is engaged with the engaging groove 46466. Here, the engaging shaft 46448 has a cross-sectional shape that crosses the longitudinal direction and has a drop shape having a tip portion. Then, the link member 4644 engages with the engagement groove 46466 at the tip end portion. Further, in the flange connecting member 4646, a guide piece 46468 long in the left-right direction is formed on the back surface side (base cover 4610 side). The guide piece 46468 is guided by the guide groove 4612 formed in the base cover 4610.

[Operation explanation of ordinary electric accessory 460]
Next, the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 55. FIG. 54 shows an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 (shown by a long-dashed line) when the blade member 4620 is in the closed state, and a normal state when the blade member 4620 is in the transition state from the closed state to the open state. It is an example of the rear view which shows the aspect (shown by a solid line) of the electric accessory 460. FIG. 55 shows an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the transition state (shown by the alternate long and short dash line) and an aspect of the ordinary electric accessory 460 when the blade member 4620 is in the open state (solid line). It is a rear view which shows (illustrated by).

When the start port solenoid 4630 is excited, the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction (leftward in front view (rightward in FIGS. 54 and 55)). When the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction, the flange 4634 (see FIGS. 49 and 50) moves in the contraction direction. When the flange 4634 moves in the contraction direction, the flange connecting member 4646 that sandwiches the flange 4634 by the flange sandwiching portion 46462 moves in the contraction direction. When the flange connecting member 4646 moves in the contraction direction, the engaging shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engaged with the engaging groove 46466 of the flange connecting member 4646 is disengaged. When the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engaged in the engagement groove 46466 of the flange connecting member 4646 is disengaged, the link member 4644 faces the front with the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the pin insertion hole 46444 as the center of rotation. It rotates counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 54 and 55) visually. At this time, the link member 4644 can move downward in the connecting hole 46464 of the flange connecting member 4646. When the link member 4644 rotates counterclockwise with the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the pin insertion hole 46444 as the center of rotation, the support shaft 46426 slidably connected in the elongated hole 46442 of the blade connecting member 4642 becomes The blade connecting member 4642 rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft 4622, and the blade member 4620 operates toward the open state.

The operation of the blade member 4620 from the open state to the closed state moves in the direction in which the plunger 4632 extends due to the start port solenoid 4630 being de-excited, and moves in the opposite direction to the operation from the closed state to the open state. It is done by. The portion of the engaging groove 46466 that comes into contact with the engaging shaft 46448 so that the engaging shaft 46448 can be smoothly engaged with the engaging groove 46466 when the blade member 4620 operates from the open state to the closed state. Is tilted diagonally downward to the right (diagonally downward to the left in FIGS. 54 and 55) in front view.

[Functional explanation of ordinary electric accessory 460]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the function of the ordinary electric accessory 460 will be described. FIG. 56 is a rear view of the blade member 4620 and the power transmission mechanism 4640 for explaining the function of the flange connecting member 4646, and is a diagram for explaining (A) the opening of the blade member 4620 is prevented. , (B) It is a figure for demonstrating that the blade member 4620 is allowed to open. In FIGS. 56A and 56B, the start port solenoid 4630 is not shown.

When the blade member 4620 is closed (when the plunger 4632 of the start port solenoid 4630 (both see, eg, FIG. 54) is non-excited), the engagement shaft 46448 of the link member 4644 engages the engagement groove 46466. Therefore, the link member 4644 cannot rotate (rotate around the pin 4648 pivotally supported by the pin insertion hole 46444) (see FIG. 56 (a)). Therefore, unless the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction (unless the start port solenoid 4630 is excited except for special circumstances such as failure), the blade member 4620 cannot be opened even if it is attempted to be opened. Therefore, even if an external force is applied to illegally open the blade member 4620, this can be prevented.

On the other hand, when the start port solenoid 4630 is excited, the plunger 4632 moves in the contraction direction as described above, the engagement between the engagement shaft 46448 and the engagement groove 46466 is released, and the blade member 4620 is released (FIG. FIG. 56 (b)).

In this way, the link member 4644 constituting the engaging shaft 46448, the flange connecting member 4646 constituting the engaging groove 46466, and the starting port solenoid 4630 prevent the blade member 4620 from being illegally opened. It functions as a means to prevent unauthorized opening.

[Structure of upper front accessory 1000]
The configuration of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 60. FIG. 57 is an example of a front view of the upper front accessory 1000 in a normal mode (a mode when it is in the origin position). FIG. 58 is an example of a rear view of the upper front accessory 1000 in a normal embodiment. FIG. 59 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 60 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper front accessory 1000 viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view).

The upper front accessory 1000 can be operated with respect to the base plate 1010 to which various members constituting the upper front accessory 1000 are attached, the decorative plate 1030 attached and fixed to the front side of the base plate 1010, and the base plate 1010. A movable decorative body 1040 configured, a drive motor 1050 as a drive source for operating the movable decorative body 1040, and a plurality of gears 1060 capable of transmitting the power of the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040. A force transmission member 1020 that transmits power from the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040 via the plurality of gears 1060, and a coil spring 1070 as an example of an elastic member that urges the movable decorative body 1040 toward the origin position. , A photo sensor 1080 (see FIG. 60) that detects the position of the movable decorative body 1040. The gear 1060 and the force transmission member 1020 function as a force transmission mechanism for transmitting the power of the drive motor 1050 to the movable decorative body 1040.

The base plate 1010 is a plate-shaped member that is attached and fixed to the upper part of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above so as to be located on the front side of the upper back accessory 1100. On the front surface side of the base plate 1010, a first support shaft 1011, a second support shaft 1012, a third support shaft 1013, and a fourth support shaft 1014, which are connected to various members of the force transmission member 1020, are formed. Further, in the base plate 1010, when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the cutout portion 1016 formed at the portion where the bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022, which will be described later, is located, and the movable decorative body 1040 are at the origin position. A notch 1017 formed at a position corresponding to a coil spring support shaft 1042 (lower end portion of the coil spring 1070) formed on the back surface side of the movable decorative body 1040 is formed. In this specification, the notch 1016 and the notch 1017 are referred to as a back side first notch 1016 and a back side second notch 1017, respectively. Further, the base plate 1010 has a bearing 1054 that pivotally supports a hollow boss 10662 formed in the center of the first gear 1062 described later, and a hole 1015 corresponding to the movable range of the boss 10672 of the fourth gear 1067 described later. A hole 1018 corresponding to the movable range of the position detection piece 10682 of the position detection gear 1068, which will be described later, is formed.

Although not shown, the decorative plate 1030 is decorated on the front side. The decorative plate 1030 is formed at a portion (a position on the front side corresponding to the first notch on the back side 1016) where the bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022, which will be described later, is located when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position. The cutout portion 1036 is formed, and the cutout portion 1038 formed at the portion where the lower end portion of the coil spring 1070 is located (the position on the front side corresponding to the second notch portion 1017 on the back surface side) is formed. In this specification, the notch 1036 and the notch 1038 are referred to as a front side first notch 1036 and a front side second notch 1038, respectively.

The movable decorative body 1040 includes a coil spring support shaft 1042 connected to the lower end of the coil spring 1070, a first transmission member side support shaft 1044 pivotally supported by a bearing 10226 of the first transmission member 1022 described later, and a description thereof, which will be described later. A second transmission member side support shaft 1046 that is pivotally supported by the bearing 10264 of the second transmission member 1026 is formed.

The drive motor 1050 is mounted and fixed to the base plate 1010 via the motor mounting member 1054. Further, the drive motor 1050 is a motor with a speed reducer, and the rotation speed of the drive motor 1050 is reduced to output power from the motor output shaft 1052.

The gear 1060 includes a first gear 1062, a second gear 1064, a third gear 1066, a fourth gear 1067, and a position detection gear 1068. Of these gears, the first gear 1062, the second gear 1064, the third gear 1066, and the fourth gear 1067 have a function of transmitting the power output from the motor output shaft 1052 to the force transmission member 1020, but the position. The detection gear 1068 does not have such a function.

A hollow shaft 10622 is formed at the center of the first gear 1062. The motor output shaft 1052 is press-fitted into the hollow shaft 10622. As a result, when the drive motor 1050 rotates, the first gear 1062 rotates with the center of the first gear 1062 (motor output shaft 1052) as the center of rotation.

In the fourth gear 1067, a boss 10672 is formed at a portion on the front surface side radially separated from the center 10674 by a predetermined distance. The position detection gear 1068 is formed with a position detection piece 10682 at a portion on the front surface side radially separated from the center 1068 by a predetermined distance. The position detection gear 1068 has substantially the same diameter as the fourth gear 1067. Therefore, the position detection gear 1068 rotates in the opposite direction by the same rotation angle in synchronization with the rotation of the fourth gear 1067. In this way, the position of the movable decorative body 1040 can be detected. In the present embodiment, the position detection of the movable decorative body 1040 detects whether or not it is at the origin position.

The force transmission member 1020 includes a first transmission member 1022 in which the power from the drive motor 1050 is transmitted via the gear 1060, a rack 1024 in which the power transmitted to the first transmission member 1022 is transmitted, and a first transmission member. It includes a second transmission member 1026 in which the power from 1022 is transmitted via the rack 1024.

The first transmission member 1022 is a fan-shaped plate-shaped member, and a bearing 10222 is formed at the center in the radial direction. The bearing 10222 pivotally supports the first support shaft 1011 formed on the base plate 1010. The first transmission member 1022 is provided from the outside to the inside in the radial direction (that is, the center of the first transmission member 1022 (bearing 10222)) along the side 1022a on the left side in the front view of the two radial sides 1022a and 1022b. An elongated hole 10224 is formed in the direction toward the direction. A boss 10672 of the fourth gear 1067 penetrating the hole 1015 is movably connected to the slot 10224 in the slot 10224. Of the two radial sides 1022a and 1022b of the first transmission member 1022, the bearing 10226 is formed at the end portion on the outer side in the radial direction along the side 1022b on the right side in the front view. The bearing 10226 pivotally supports a support shaft 1044 formed on the movable decorative body 1040. The side 1022b of the first transmission member 1022 becomes substantially horizontal when the movable decorative body 1040 is in the origin position. Further, the first transmission member 1022 includes a gear 10228 that is coaxial with the first support shaft 1011 (bearing 10222) and rotates in synchronization with the rotation of the first transmission member 1022.

The second transmission member 1026 is a rod-shaped member that becomes substantially horizontal when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, and the bearing 10262 is formed at the end on the left side in the front view and at the right end in the front view. Bearing 10264 is formed. The bearing 10262 pivotally supports the fourth support shaft 1014 of the base plate 1010. The bearing 10264 pivotally supports the support shaft 1046 of the movable decorative body 1040. Further, the second transmission member 1026 includes a gear 10266 coaxial with the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262). The gear 10266 has substantially the same diameter as the gear 10228 provided on the first transmission member 1022.

A rack 1024 for transmitting power from the first transmission member 1022 to the second transmission member 1026 is provided between the first transmission member 1022 and the second transmission member 1026. The rack 1024 is a rod-shaped member provided substantially horizontally, and the gear 10244 is formed on the right side of the front view (first transmission member 1022 side), and the gear 10248 is formed on the left side of the front view (second transmission member 1026 side). Is formed. The gear 10244 meshes with the gear 10228 and converts the power in the rotational direction of the gear 10228 into a substantially horizontal direction. The gear 10248 further converts the power converted in the substantially horizontal direction by the gear 10244 in the rotational direction and transmits the power to the second transmission member 1026. The rack 1024 has a substantially horizontal elongated hole 10242 formed on the right side (gear 10244 side) of the front view, and a substantially horizontal elongated hole 10246 formed on the left side of the front view (gear 10248 side). The second support shaft 1012 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the slotted hole 10242, and the third support shaft 1013 formed on the base plate 1010 is connected to the slotted hole 10246.

The coil spring 1070 urges the movable decorative body 1040 toward the origin position. The upper end of the coil spring 1070 is attached and fixed to the back surface side of the base plate 1010, and the lower end is attached and fixed to the coil spring support shaft 1042 formed on the back surface of the movable decorative body 1040. When the movable ornament 1040 is in the origin position, the lower end of the coil spring 1070 is located in the front second notch 1038 and the back second notch 1017.

The photo sensor 1080 is provided so as to be located in the photo sensor arrangement region 1019 formed on the base plate 1010. The photo sensor 1080 detects the position of the movable decorative body 1040 by detecting the position detection piece 10682 provided on the position detection gear 1068. In the present embodiment, the photo sensor 1080 is provided so that the position detection piece 10682 can be detected when the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position.

[Operation explanation of upper front accessory 1000]
Next, the operation of the upper front accessory 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 63. FIG. 61 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 at the origin position. FIG. 62 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 in which the movable decorative body 1040 is moving downward. FIG. 63 is a front view showing an example of the upper front accessory 1000 when the movable decorative body 1040 moves downward to the operation limit position. In FIGS. 61 to 63, the constituent members and the like of the force transmission member 1020 are shown by broken lines so that the movement of each member can be understood.

When the movable decorative body 1040 is at the origin position, the drive motor 1050 rotates and the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the first gear 1062 rotates counterclockwise in front view. do. When the first gear 1062 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the second gear 1064 that meshes with the teeth of the first gear 1062 rotates clockwise in front view. When the second gear 1064 rotates clockwise in front view, the third gear 1066 that meshes with the teeth of the second gear 1064 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the fourth gear 1067 that meshes with the third gear 1066 rotates clockwise in front view with the center 10674 of the fourth gear 1067 as the center of rotation. When the fourth gear 1067 rotates clockwise with the center 10674 as the center of rotation in the front view, the boss 10672 also rotates in the circumferential direction with the center 10674 as the center of rotation and moves clockwise along the inside of the hole 1015. Since the boss 10672 is movably connected in the slotted hole 10224, when the boss 10672 rotates clockwise in front view with the center 10674 as the center of rotation, the first transmission member 1022 (that is, the gear 10228) becomes the first support shaft. It rotates clockwise with 1011 (bearing 10222) as the center of rotation in front view. When the first transmission member 1022 rotates clockwise with the first support shaft 1011 as the center of rotation, the support shaft 1044 pivotally supported by the bearing 10226 rotates clockwise with the first support shaft 1011 as the center of rotation. Move to.

When the gear 10228 rotates clockwise with the first support shaft 1011 as the center of rotation, the power of the gear 10228 is transmitted to the gear 10244, and the rack 1024 moves substantially horizontally to the right in the front view. Here, the second support shaft 1012 connected to the slotted hole 10242 and the third support shaft 1013 connected to the slotted hole 10246 function as guides for moving the rack 1024 in a substantially horizontal direction. When the rack 1024 moves substantially horizontally to the right in front view, this power is transmitted to the gear 10266, and the gear 10266 rotates clockwise in front view with the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) as the center of rotation. When the gear 10266 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation, the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) as the center of rotation. When the second transmission member 1026 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation, the support shaft 1046 pivotally supported by the bearing 10264 rotates clockwise with the fourth support shaft 1014 as the center of rotation. Move to.

Here, the gear 10228 and the gear 10266 have the same diameter, the distance from the first support shaft 1011 (bearing 10122) to the support shaft 1044 (bearing 10226), and the distance from the fourth support shaft 1014 (bearing 10262) to the support shaft. The distance to 1046 (bearing 10264) is the same. Therefore, when the motor output shaft 1052 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the support shaft 1044 and the support shaft 1046 synchronize with each other, and the clock in front view with the first support shaft 1011 and the fourth support shaft 1014 as the rotation centers, respectively. Works around. As a result, the movable decorative body 1040 operates downward (that is, toward the front surface of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) while drawing an arc clockwise in the front view while maintaining a substantially horizontal state.

When the third gear 1066 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the position detection gear 1068 that meshes with the third gear 1066 also rotates clockwise with the center 1068 of the position detection gear 1068 as the center of rotation. Rotate. The position detection gear 1068 does not mesh with the fourth gear 1067, but the fourth gear 1067 and the position detection gear 1068 have the same diameter and both mesh with the third gear 1066. Therefore, the rotation angle of the 4th gear 1067 and the rotation angle of the position detection gear 1068 are the same, and the position of the position detection piece 10682 formed on the position detection gear 1068 is detected by the photo sensor 1080 to obtain the fourth gear. The rotation angle of the gear 1067 and thus the position of the movable decorative body 1040 can be detected.

When the drive motor 1050 rotates and the motor output shaft 1052 rotates clockwise in front view, the movable decorative body 1040 arcs counterclockwise in front view while maintaining a substantially horizontal state by the reverse movement of the above-mentioned movement. It works upward while drawing.

In this way, the movable decorative body 1040 can be operated between the origin position and the operation limit position. Here, the movement of the movable decorative body 1040 from the origin position toward the front surface of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 (movable body effect) is when the game ball wins in the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440. It is performed based on the result of the hit judgment performed in. On the other hand, the movement from the front surface of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 toward the origin position is performed when the movable body effect based on the result of the hit determination this time is completed, and is based on the result of the hit determination from the next time onward. It will be prepared for the movable body production to be performed.

[Structure of upper back accessory 1100]
The configuration of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 70. FIG. 64 is an example of a front view of the upper back accessory 1100 in a normal mode (a mode when it is in the origin position). FIG. 65 is an example of a rear view of the upper back accessory 1100 in a normal embodiment. FIG. 66 is an example of a perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 67 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 68 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper back accessory 1100 as viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view). 69 is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 65 in FIG. 69, and an enlarged view of a portion X shown in FIG. 70 is an example of a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB shown in FIG. 65 in FIG. 70, and an enlarged view of a portion Y shown in FIG.

The line AA shown in FIG. 65 is a vertical line passing through the center of the bearing 11724 (described later) formed on the extended portion 11741 (described later) of the upper left arm 1172, and is shown in FIG. 65. The BB line is a line that vertically crosses the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172.

The upper back accessory 1100 is made of a substantially flat plate metal and has a substantially frame shape without a lower side. A left drive mechanism having a base member 1180 on which various members are mounted and a left motor 1151 and the like. The 1150, the right drive mechanism 1160 having the right side motor 1161 and the like, the decorative cover 1130 that covers the left side motor 1151 and the like from the front so as not to be visible to the player, and the right side motor 1161 and the like from the front so as not to be visible to the player. A movable decorative body 1110 that can be moved up and down by a decorative cover 1140 to be covered, a left side drive mechanism 1150, and a right side drive mechanism 1160, and a pair of left and right covered decorative bodies 1120 that are axially supported and movable by the movable decorative body 1110. The pantograph mechanism 1170 and the pantograph mechanism 1170, one end of which is connected to the base member 1180 and the other end of which is connected to the covering decorative body 1120 and operates (contracts in a substantially diamond shape) with the vertical movement of the movable decorative body 1110. A member that regulates operation and is attached to a substantially central portion of the base member 1180, and a static decorative body 1196 that is a member decorated on the front surface and is fixedly attached to the base member 1180. Be prepared.

The base member 1180 has a central plate portion 1182 extending in the left-right direction, a left vertical plate portion 1184 extending downward from the left end portion of the central plate portion 1182, and a right vertical plate portion extending downward from the right end portion of the central plate portion 1182. It has 1186 and.

A static decorative body 1196 is attached to the front surface of the central plate portion 1182 as a decorative body that is decorated on the front surface and does not operate. A horizontally long rectangular central plate 1188 is provided at the upper end of the substantially center of the central plate portion 1182 so as to face upward. The front surface of the central plate 1188 has a pair of left support shafts 11882 and right support shafts 11884 that project forward.

On the front surface of the central plate 1188, a regulating member 1190 that regulates the operation of the pantograph mechanism 1170 beyond a certain level is attached below the left support shaft 11882 and the right support shaft 11884. The regulating member 1190 is a trapezoidal plate member and has a left contact surface 1192 inclined toward the lower left and a right contact surface 1194 inclined toward the lower right.

The left vertical plate portion 1184 is configured so that the left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted can be mounted. A hole 11842 is formed in the left vertical plate portion 1184 at a portion corresponding to the output shaft of the left motor 1151 when the left motor mounting member 1152 is attached. Further, a left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 and a left transmission arm mounting shaft 11884 are formed on the front surface of the left vertical plate portion 1184. A substantially C-shaped hole 11846 is formed around the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 when viewed from the front. This hole 11846 is formed corresponding to the locus of movement of the support shaft 11562 formed in the driven gear 1156 when the driven gear 1156, which will be described later, rotates.

The right vertical plate portion 1186 is configured to be capable of mounting the right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is mounted. A hole 1186 is formed in the right vertical plate portion 1186 at a portion corresponding to the output shaft of the right motor 1161 when the right motor mounting member 1162 is attached. Further, a right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 and a right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 are formed on the front surface of the right vertical plate portion 1186. A substantially C-shaped hole 11866 is formed around the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 when viewed from the front. This hole 11866 is formed corresponding to the locus of movement of the support shaft 1166 formed in the driven gear 1166 when the driven gear 1166, which will be described later, rotates.

The left drive mechanism 1150 includes a left motor 1151, a left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted, a drive gear 1157, a driven gear 1156, a left arm member 1155, and a left transmission arm 1154. Of these, the left arm member 1155, the driven gear 1156, and the drive gear 1157 function as a left drive transmission member that transmits power from the left side motor 1151 to the left transmission arm 1154. The installation area of the left drive transmission member in the vertical direction (operating direction of the movable decorative body 1110) is provided on the left outer side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the front view, and is provided in the vertical direction of the movable decorative body 1110. It is smaller than the operating range. The hollow shaft 11544 formed at one end (right side) of the left transmission drive arm 1154 is pivotally supported by the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11884 in the above-mentioned installation area of the left transmission drive member.

The left side motor 1151 is a motor capable of forward rotation and reverse rotation. The left motor 1151 is attached to the left motor mounting member 1152. In the left motor mounting member 1152 to which the left motor 1151 is mounted, the output shaft of the left motor 1151 is coaxial with the drive gear 1157 and penetrates the hole 1184 formed in the left vertical plate portion 1184. Attached to. Therefore, when the left side motor 1151 rotates, the drive gear 1157 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the left side motor 1151.

The driven gear 1156 meshes with the drive gear 1157. When the drive gear 1157 rotates, the driven gear 1156 rotates in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation. The driven gear 1156 is a gear having a larger diameter than the drive gear 1157. As a result, the rotational force of the left side motor 1151 transmitted from the drive gear 1157 is amplified. Further, the driven gear 1156 has a bearing 11564 in the center and a support shaft 11562 separated from the center by a predetermined distance on the front surface. The driven gear 1156 is rotatably supported by a bearing 11564 on the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844 so that the driven gear 1156 can rotate about the left driven gear mounting shaft 11844.

The left arm member 1155 is a member having a substantially anti-C shape (substantially C shape when viewed from the rear) when viewed from the front, and has a left arm bearing 11552 at one end (the end on the upper side of the paper) and the other end. It has a left arm bearing shaft 11554 at the portion (the end on the lower side of the paper). The left arm bearing 11552 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 11562 of the driven gear 1156.

The left transmission arm 1154 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the left motor 1151 to the movable decorative body 1110 via the drive gear 1157, the driven gear 1156, and the left arm member 1155. The left transmission arm 1154 has a hollow shaft 11544 protruding forward at one end (left side) and an elongated hole 11542 at the other (center side) end. A boss 1112 (a boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decorative body 1110), which will be described later, is slidably connected to the elongated hole 11542 to support the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the left transmission arm 1154 has a left arm bearing 11548 that is rotatably supported by the left arm support shaft 11554 of the left arm member 1155. The hollow shaft 11544 rotates on the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 in the installation area of the left drive transmission member so that the left transmission arm 1154 can rotate (circular motion) around the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848. It is possible to support the axis. Further, a coil spring 1153 is extrapolated to the hollow shaft 11544 as an example of an elastic member that urges the left transmission arm 1154 counterclockwise (counterclockwise rotation direction).

The right drive mechanism 1160 includes a right motor 1161, a right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is mounted, a drive gear 1167, a driven gear 1166, a right arm member 1165, and a right transmission arm 1164. Of these, the right arm member 1165, the driven gear 1166, and the drive gear 1167 function as the right drive transmission member that transmits the power from the right motor 1161 to the right transmission arm 1164. The installation area of the right drive transmission member in the vertical direction (operating direction of the movable decorative body 1110) is provided on the right outer side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 in the front view, and is provided in the vertical direction of the movable decorative body 1110. It is smaller than the operating range. The hollow shaft 11644 formed at one end (right side) of the right transmission drive arm 1164 is pivotally supported by the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 within the installation area of the right side drive transmission member.

The right side motor 1161 is a motor capable of forward rotation and reverse rotation. The right motor 1161 is attached to the right motor mounting member 1162. The right motor mounting member 1162 to which the right motor 1161 is mounted is located in the right vertical plate portion 1186 so that the output shaft of the right motor 1161 is coaxial with the drive gear 1167 and penetrates the hole 1186 formed in the right vertical plate portion 1186. It is attached. Therefore, when the right motor 1161 rotates, the drive gear 1167 rotates coaxially with the output shaft of the right motor 1161.

The driven gear 1166 meshes with the drive gear 1167. When the drive gear 1167 rotates, the driven gear 1166 rotates in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation. The driven gear 1166 is a gear having a larger diameter than the drive gear 1167. As a result, the rotational force of the right motor 1161 transmitted from the drive gear 1167 is amplified. Further, the driven gear 1166 has a bearing 11664 in the center and a support shaft 11662 separated from the center by a predetermined distance in the front surface. The driven gear 1166 is rotatably supported by a bearing 11664 on the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864 so that the driven gear 1166 can rotate about the right driven gear mounting shaft 11864.

The right arm member 1165 is a member having a substantially C-shape when viewed from the front (substantially C-shaped when viewed from the rear), has a right arm bearing 11652 at one end (the end on the upper side of the paper), and the other end. It has a right arm bearing shaft 11654 at the portion (the end on the lower side of the paper). The right arm bearing 11652 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 11662 of the driven gear 1166.

The right transmission arm 1164 is a member that transmits the rotational force of the right motor 1161 to the movable decorative body 1110 via the drive gear 1167, the driven gear 1166, and the right arm member 1165. The right transmission arm 1164 has a hollow shaft 11644 that projects forward at one end (right side) and an elongated hole 11642 at the other (center side) end. A boss 1114 (a boss formed on the rear surface of the movable decorative body 1110), which will be described later, is slidably connected to the elongated hole 11642 to support the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the right transmission arm 1164 has a right arm bearing 11648 that is rotatably supported by the right arm support shaft 11654 of the right arm member 1165. The hollow shaft 11644 rotates on the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 in the above-mentioned installation area of the right drive transmission member so that the right transmission arm 1164 can rotate (circular motion) around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868. It is possible to support the axis. Further, a coil spring 1163 is extrapolated to the hollow shaft 1164 as an example of an elastic member that urges the right transmission arm 1164 clockwise (right rotation direction).

In this way, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 support the movable decorative body 1110 from both the left and right sides, and the power from the left side motor 1154 and the right side motor 1161 is transmitted to the left side drive transmission member and the right side drive transmission member described above. It is transmitted through.

The pantograph mechanism 1170 has an upper left arm 1172, a lower left arm 1174, an upper right arm 1176, and a lower right arm 1178. The pantograph mechanism 1170 constitutes a substantially diamond-shaped side by four arms of the upper left arm 1172, the lower left arm 1174, the upper right arm 1176, and the lower right arm 1178, and deforms the shape of the substantially diamond (upper left arm 1172). And the lower left arm 1174 (the angle formed by the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178) are changed). The upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 are made of a colorless and transparent resin. The lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are made of black resin.

As the above "substantially diamond shape", of the four arms of the upper left arm 1172, the lower left arm 1174, the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178, for example, two sets of arms facing each other are parallel (for example, the upper left). The lower right arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 are parallel, the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 are parallel), and the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 have the same length, and the four parallel sides. It is also assumed to be a shape or a square. Also, of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178, for example, two pairs of arms facing each other have the same length (for example, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower right arm 1178 have the same length, and the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right part. It does not have to be the same length as the arm 1176), and moreover, for example, one of the two sets of arms facing each other has the same length and the other set of arms. The lengths of the may be different. That is, the lengths of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are not limited to a specific length, and various variations can be adopted. Further, considering that each arm, that is, the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) operates, the arms facing each other do not always have to be parallel, and the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120). The arms facing each other may change from a non-parallel state to a parallel state, or may change from a parallel state to a non-parallel state according to the drive of the above. Further, regarding the above-mentioned "opposite arms are parallel", it may be difficult to obtain perfect parallelism in consideration of the structure when the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) is driven. Since it is assumed, if the tilting directions of the facing arms are oriented in the same direction, it is considered to be parallel (substantially parallel). Further, even when each of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 has a different length, the accessory (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) can be moved (for example, the operation limit position from the origin position). The lengths of the four arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178 can be varied in various ways.

The upper left arm 1172 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along a virtual surface substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction, has a bearing 11722 at the end on the center side, and has a bearing on the left end. It has a bearing 11724 in the portion. The bearing 11722 is rotatably supported by the left support shaft 11882.

The lower left arm 1174 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along a virtual surface substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction. An extension portion 11741 extending upward (on the upper left arm 1172 side) is formed. The thickness of the extended portion 11741 in the front-rear direction is thinner than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction. The extension portion 11741 is formed with a support shaft 11742 extending in the front-rear direction at a position above the upper end 11743 of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174. Further, a hollow shaft 11744 is formed at the central end of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction.

The upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are connected to each other by rotatably supporting the bearing 11724 on the support shaft 11742. The left upper arm 1172 and the left lower arm 1174 are connected to each other at the origin position (the position where both the upper left arm 1172 and the left lower arm 1174 are in a horizontal state, for example, the embodiment shown in FIG. 65). Except for the bearings 11724 and the support shafts 11742), they are arranged side by side substantially parallel to each other without overlapping in the front-rear direction. At this time, the longitudinal portions (the portions excluding the bearing 11724 and the support shaft 11742) of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side surface. This makes it possible to reduce the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction. Further, the hollow shaft 11744 penetrates the elongated hole 11104 of the movable decorative body 1110 and is pivotally supported by the guide shaft 11224. The vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174.

The upper right arm 1176 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction, is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along a virtual surface substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction, has a bearing 11762 at the central end, and has a right end. It has a bearing 11764 in the portion. The bearing 11762 is rotatably supported by the right support shaft 11884.

The lower right arm 1178 has a predetermined thickness in the front-rear direction and is in the shape of a horizontally long flat plate along a virtual surface substantially orthogonal to the front-rear direction. An extension portion 11781 extending upward (on the right lower arm 1178 side) is formed. The thickness of the extended portion 11781 in the front-rear direction is thinner than the thickness of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction. The extension portion 11781 is formed with a support shaft 11782 extending in the front-rear direction at a position above the upper end 11783 of the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178. Further, a hollow shaft 11784 is formed at the central end of the lower right arm 1178 in the front-rear direction.

The upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other by rotatably supporting the bearing 11864 on the support shaft 11782. The upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are connected to each other (bearing) at the origin position (the position where both the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are in a horizontal state, for example, the embodiment shown in FIG. 65). Except for 11764 and the support shaft 11782), they are arranged side by side substantially parallel to each other without overlapping in the front-rear direction. At this time, the longitudinal portions of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 (the portions excluding the bearing 1176 and the support shaft 11782) are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side surface. This makes it possible to reduce the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction. In the present embodiment, the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction is within the thickness range of the left side motor 1151 and the right side motor 1161. Further, the hollow shaft 11784 is pivotally supported by the guide shaft 11244 through the elongated hole 11108 of the movable decorative body 1110. The vertical direction at the origin position is the width direction of the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178.

In the above, it has been described that the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are arranged on substantially the same plane as the longitudinal portions of the respective arms 1172 and 1174 when viewed from the side surface. A detailed positional relationship between the 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction will be described.

The front left position of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) of the longitudinal portion is F1, and the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion in the front-rear direction is B1 (FIGS. 69 (B) and 70 (B). reference). Further, in the lower left arm 1174, the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion in the front-rear direction (thickness direction) is F2, and the rearmost surface position in the front-rear direction is B2 (see FIGS. 69 (B) and 70 (B)). ). Here, the frontmost position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 is located behind the frontmost position F2 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174, and the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172. The rearmost surface position B1 in the front-rear direction is located behind the rearmost surface position B2 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174. However, the rearmost surface position B2 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 is rearward of the foremost front position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the last in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172. It is located in front of the surface position B1 (between the frontmost position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the rearmost surface position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172). That is, when the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are viewed in a cross section that vertically crosses the longitudinal portion of each arm 1172, 1174, the thickness portion of each arm 1172, 1174 is in the vertical direction (width direction of each arm). ) (The positional relationship in which the longitudinal portions of each of the arms 1172 and 1174 are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side surface).

In the present embodiment, the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 are arranged on substantially the same plane when viewed from the side surface, but more specifically, than the lower left arm 1174. The upper left arm 1172 is configured to be located slightly rearward. However, instead of this, the upper left arm 1172 may be configured to be slightly located on the front side of the lower left arm 1174. That is, in the present embodiment, the frontmost position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 is located behind the frontmost position F2 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174, and the upper left arm The rearmost surface position B1 of the longitudinal portion of the 1172 in the anteroposterior direction is located posterior to the rearmost surface position B2 of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 in the anteroposterior direction, and the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the anteroposterior direction. Although the position B2 is configured to be located behind the frontmost position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and in front of the rearmost surface position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172. Instead, the foremost position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the anterior-posterior direction is located posterior to the foremost position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the anteroposterior direction, and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174. The position of the rearmost surface in the front-rear direction is located behind the position of the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 in the anteroposterior direction, and the position of the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the anteroposterior direction is the lower left arm 1174. Behind the frontmost position in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 and in front of the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the longitudinal portion of the left lower arm 1174 (the rearmost surface position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction is the lower left arm). It may be configured to be located between the frontmost position in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of 1174 and the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction).

Further, in the present embodiment, the rearmost surface position B2 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 is behind the frontmost position F1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal axis of the upper left arm 1172. Positioned in front of the rearmost surface position B1 in the front-rear direction of the portion (between the foremost front position F1 in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the rearmost surface position B1 in the longitudinal direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172). are doing. However, instead of this, the total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (from the position of the frontmost arm to the position of the rearmost arm among the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174). As long as the thickness) can be reduced, the position of the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction and the position of the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction may be substantially flush with each other. The frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction and the frontmost position of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the front-rear direction may be substantially flush with each other. Further, the position of the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 in the front-rear direction and the position of the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 in the longitudinal direction are substantially flush with each other, and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174. The frontmost position in the front-rear direction and the frontmost position in the front-rear direction of the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 are configured to be substantially flush with each other (that is, the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are substantially on the same plane). You may.

Since the positional relationship between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 in the front-rear direction is the same as the positional relationship between the lower left arm 1174 and the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, the longitudinal portion of the upper left arm 1172 and the longitudinal portion of the lower left arm 1174 (the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 and the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178) are in the vertical direction (width direction of each arm). The total thickness of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the front-back direction of the longitudinal portion of the lower right arm 1178) without reducing the thickness of each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178. The thickness from the frontmost position to the position of the rearmost surface of the longitudinal portion of the upper right arm 1176 in the front-rear direction) can be reduced, and the area occupied by the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. When the pachinko gaming machine is installed in the pachinko hall, it is restricted by the length in the front-rear direction, but by reducing the area occupied by the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction, other roles can be obtained in the front-rear direction of the pantograph mechanism 1170. It is possible to arrange objects, and it is possible to perform a dynamic movable effect using a plurality of accessories that overlap in the front-back direction.

Further, in the contracted state of the pantograph mechanism 1170, the extended portion 11741 is extended upward to a position exceeding the upper end 11734 of the lower left arm 1174, so that the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 are at the origin position. It becomes almost horizontal. Similarly, since the extended portion 11781 is extended upward to a position exceeding the upper end 11783 of the lower right arm 1178, the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178 are in a substantially horizontal state at the origin position. Since the extension portion 11741 (extension portion 11781) is formed, the movable range of the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (upper right arm 1176 and lower right arm 1178) can be further increased. Become. Moreover, since each of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 can be made thick, the strength of each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 can be increased and the arms can be stabilized during operation. Furthermore, by making it possible to increase the strength of each arm 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178, it is possible to increase the size of the movable accessory that operates with the operation of each of these arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178. It will be possible to perform more dynamic movable effects.

In this way, by setting the positional relationship between the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left arm 1174 (the positional relationship between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178) as described above, a plurality of accessories overlapping in the front-rear direction can be obtained. It is possible to execute the dynamic movable effect used and the dynamic movable effect by increasing the size of the movable accessory, and it is possible to further enhance the game entertainment by the movable effect.

The movable decorative body 1110 is decorated on the front surface and has openings 1101 and 1105 formed at positions substantially symmetrical to each other. Lenses 1103 and 1107 are fitted in these openings 1101 and 1105, respectively. The movable decorative body 1110 is slidable up and down by the left side drive mechanism 1150 and the right side drive mechanism 1160 together with the cover decorative body 1120. The movable decorative body 1110 has a hole 11102, an elongated hole 11104, a hole 11106 and an elongated hole 11108, and a boss 1112 and a boss 1114. The holes 11102 and 11106 are holes provided at positions that are substantially symmetrical with each other. The elongated hole 11104 and the hole 11106 are provided at positions that are substantially symmetrical with each other, and are vertically elongated elongated holes. The boss 1112 and the boss 1114 are provided at positions that are substantially symmetrical with each other on the back surface side of the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the movable decorative body 1110 has an LED substrate 1116 in which a large number of LEDs are arranged behind the lenses 1103 and 1107, and is configured to be capable of emitting light according to the progress of the game. When the LED arranged on the LED substrate 1116 emits light, the light emission is displayed through the lenses 1103 and 1107.

The covering decoration body 1120 has a covering decoration body 1122 arranged on the left side of the movable decoration body 1110 and a covering decoration body 1124 arranged on the right side of the movable decoration body 1110. The covering decoration 1122 has a support shaft 11222 and a guide shaft 11224. The covering decoration 1124 has a support shaft 11242 and a guide shaft 11244.

In the covering decorative body 1122, the support shaft 11222 is rotatably supported by the hole 11102 of the movable decorative body 1112, and the guide shaft 11224 is slidably inserted into the elongated hole 11104 of the movable decorative body 1110. Further, the covering decoration 1122 is connected to the pantograph mechanism 1170 (specifically, it is rotatably supported by a bearing 11744 at the central end of the lower left arm 1174). As a result, the covering decorative body 1122 covers the front surface (lens 1103) of the movable decorative body 1110 and is movably arranged with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 with the support shaft 11222 as the center of rotation.

In the covering decoration body 1124, the support shaft 11242 is rotatably supported by the hole 11106 of the movable decoration body 1114, and the guide shaft 11244 is slidably inserted into the elongated hole 11108 of the movable decoration body 1114. Further, the covering decoration body 1124 is connected to the pantograph mechanism 1170 (specifically, it is rotatably supported by a bearing 11784 at the central end of the lower right arm 1178). As a result, the covering decorative body 1124 covers the front surface (lens 1107) of the movable decorative body 1110 and is movably arranged with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 with the support shaft 11242 as the center of rotation.

The covering decoration body 1122 and the covering decoration body 1124 are arranged so as to be substantially symmetrical with each other.

[Operation explanation of upper back accessory 1100]
Next, the operation of the upper back accessory 1100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 75. FIG. 71 is a view showing an example of the upper back surface accessory 1100 before the start of operation, that is, in the normal mode (a mode when it is in the origin position), where FIG. 71 is a front view and FIG. 71 is a rear view. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of an embodiment in which the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 have reached the limit position after the upper back accessory 1100 has started to operate. Is a front view and (B) is a rear view. 73 is a view showing an example of the mode when the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 reach the limit position, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. .. In FIG. 74, after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 of the pantograph mechanism 1170 are operated to the operation limit position, the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 are further rotated, and the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are movable decorations. It is a figure which shows an example of the mode when the body 1110 operates toward the lower side of a paper surface (when the covering decorative body 1120 starts operating with respect to a movable decorative body 1110), (A) is a front view, (B). ) Is the rear view. 75 is a view showing an example of a mode in which the covering decorative body 1120 is moved to the operating limit with respect to the movable decorative body 1110, in which (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view.

As shown in FIG. 71, when the upper back accessory 1100 is in the origin position, the pantograph mechanism 1170 is in a closed state (the longitudinal portions of the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, and 1178 are all in a substantially horizontal state). be. Here, with respect to the members (lower left arm 1174 and lower right arm 1178) that can be hidden by the movable decorative body 1110 when the movable decorative body 1110 is operated toward the lower side of the paper surface, the back surface of the movable decorative body 1110 is used. The members (upper left arm 1172 and upper right arm 1176) that are difficult to hide with the movable decorative body 1110 are made of colorless and transparent members so as to be positioned on the side and hidden as much as possible. As a result, there is little possibility that the visual recognition of the image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is hindered by the arms 1172, 1174, 1176, 1178, and it is difficult for the player to notice.

Then, as the movable decorative body 1110 operates toward the lower side of the paper surface, the longitudinal portions of the respective arms 1172, 1174, 1176 change their postures in the vertical direction, and the upper arms 1172, 1176 and the lower arms 1174, 1178 The angle formed by is increasing. When the movable decorative body 1110 is operated toward the lower side of the paper, the longitudinal direction of each of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 is directed in the vertical direction, but until the movable decorative body 1110 exceeds a certain operating range. The lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 remain located on the back side of the movable ornament 1110.

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the drive gear 1157 also rotates counterclockwise. When the drive gear 1157 rotates counterclockwise, the driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise. The support shaft 11562 is located above the paper when it is in the origin position (when the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 are in the origin position), and when the driven gear 1156 rotates clockwise, the bearing 11564 (left). It orbits clockwise around the driven gear mounting shaft 11844). When the support shaft 11562 orbits clockwise around the bearing 11564 (left driven gear mounting shaft 11844), the left arm member 1155 is pushed down toward the lower left. When the left arm member 1155 is pushed down toward the lower left, a clockwise pressing force centered on the hollow shaft 11544 (left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848) acts on the left transmission arm 1154. When a clockwise pressing force centered on the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 acts on the left transmission arm 1154, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise with the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 as a fulcrum. When the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise, the boss 1112 slidably connected to the slot 11542 moves in the slot 11542 while moving the movable ornament 1110 downward.

When the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in front view, the drive gear 1167 also rotates clockwise. When the drive gear 1167 rotates clockwise, the driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise. The support shaft 11662 is located above the paper surface when it is in the origin position (when the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 are in the origin position), and when the driven gear 1166 rotates counterclockwise, the bearing 11664 ( It orbits counterclockwise around the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868). When the support shaft 11662 orbits counterclockwise around the bearing 11664 (right driven gear mounting shaft 11864), the right arm member 1165 is pushed down toward the lower right. When the right arm member 1165 is pushed down toward the lower right, a counterclockwise pushing force centered on the hollow shaft 11644 (right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868) acts on the right transmission arm 1164. When a counterclockwise pressing force centered on the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 acts on the right transmission arm 1164, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise with the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 as a fulcrum. .. When the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 1114 slidably connected to the slot 11642 moves within the slot 11642 while moving the movable ornament 1110 downward.

When the movable decoration 1110 moves downward, the covering decorative body 1122, 1124 also moves downward along with the movement of the movable decorative body 1110. This is because the guide shafts 11224, 11244 of the covering decorative body 1122, 1124 are slidably inserted into the elongated holes 11104, 11108 of the movable decorative body 1110, so that gravity occurs when the movable decorative body 1110 moves downward. This is because the covering ornament 1122, 1124 also moves downward by the action.

When the left side motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in front view and the right side motor 1161 rotates clockwise in front view in synchronization with this, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 maintain a substantially horizontal state on the paper surface. It works downward.

When the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in front view and the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 move toward the lower side of the paper surface, the lower center side hollow shaft 1744 connected to the covering decorative body 1122 moves below the paper surface. Pushed down towards. As a result, the lower left arm 1174 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 11742 as the fulcrum, and the upper left arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise with the bearing 11722 (center left support shaft 1182) as the fulcrum. When the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in front view and the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 move toward the lower side of the paper surface, the hollow shaft 11784 connected to the covering decorative body 1124 pushes down toward the lower side of the paper surface. Be done. As a result, the lower right arm 1178 rotates counterclockwise with the support shaft 11782 as the fulcrum, and the upper right arm 1176 rotates clockwise with the bearing 11762 (center right support shaft 11884) as the fulcrum. In this way, the pantograph mechanism 1170 operates.

By the way, when the upper left arm 1172 rotates counterclockwise with the bearing 11722 (central left support shaft 11882) as a fulcrum, it eventually comes into contact with the left contact surface 1192 of the regulating member 1190. Further, when the upper right arm 1176 rotates clockwise with the bearing 11762 (central right support shaft 11884) as a fulcrum, the upper right arm 1176 eventually comes into contact with the right contact surface 1194 of the regulating member 1190. The position of the upper left arm 1172 when it comes into contact with the left contact surface 1192 is the operating limit position toward the lower part of the paper surface, and the position of the upper right arm 1176 when it comes into contact with the right contact surface 1194 is the position of the paper surface. It is the operating limit position facing downward.

When the left upper arm 1172 moves to the operating limit position and then the left motor 1151 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the movable decorative body 1110 moves further downward on the paper surface, and the hollow shaft 11744 has the elongated hole 11104. Move from the lower end position to the upper end position. Along with this, the covering decoration 1122 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 11222 as a fulcrum. Further, when the upper right arm 1176 moves to the operating limit position and then the right motor 1161 rotates clockwise in front view, the movable decorative body 1110 moves further downward on the paper surface, and the hollow shaft 11784 has a long hole 11108. Move from the lower end position to the upper end position. Along with this, the covering decoration body 1124 rotates counterclockwise with the support shaft 11242 as a fulcrum. In this way, the covering decorative body 1122 and the covering decorative body 1124 operate together with the movable decorative body 1110 from the origin position toward the lower side of the paper surface, and the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 operate toward the lower side of the paper surface. When the movable decorative body 1110 operates to the limit position and further moves toward the lower side of the paper surface, the covering decorative body 1120 operates relative to the movable decorative body 1110. When the covering decorative body 1120 operates relative to the movable decorative body 1110, the lenses 1103 and 1107 fitted in the openings 1101 and 1105 are exposed and become visible to the player. The amount of exposure of the lenses 1103 and 1107 increases as the relative working range of the covering decorative body 1120 with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 increases.

In this way, the upper back accessory 1100 can move in the vertical direction between the origin position (see FIG. 71) and the descending end position (see FIG. 73). Specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 is movable between the origin position and the descending end position, and the covering decorative body 1120 is between the origin position and the operation limit position of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176. Can be moved. The operating limit position is such that after the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 have moved to the descending end position, the covering decorative body 1120 reaches the limit with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 while the movable decorative body 1110 is in the descending end position. It is the activated position. That is, the vertical position of the movable decorative body 1110 is the same at the descending end position and the operating limit position. When the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120 are at the origin position, they stand by at a position that does not interfere with the visual recognition of the image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. On the other hand, when the upper back accessory 1100 (specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) is in the descending end position, the liquid crystal display device 16 includes the case where the covering decorative body 1120 is in the operating limit position. Located in front of the display area. That is, when the upper back accessory 1100 at the origin position moves toward the descending end position, the upper back accessory 1100 (movable decorative body 1110 and covering decorative body 1120) moves from the origin position to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Will advance forward. The advance of the upper back accessory 1100 toward the front from the origin position to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is the progress of the game (for example, the winning (passing) of the game ball to the first starting port 762 or the second starting port 752. ) Is executed according to the result of the hit judgment executed under the condition).

When the upper back accessory 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, the upper right arm 1176 and the upper left arm 1172 are exposed at positions visible to the player, but the upper right arm 1176 and the upper right arm 1176 and the upper left arm 1172 are exposed. Since the upper left arm 1172 is made of a transparent resin, it does not interfere with the visual recognition of the effect image displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Moreover, since the upper back accessory 1100 (specifically, the movable decorative body 1110 and the covering decorative body 1120) moves up and down by the pantograph mechanism, the fulcrum between the upper right arm 1176 and the lower right arm 1178, and the upper left arm 1172 and the lower left. The fulcrum with the portion arm 1174 is on the side of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and not only does not hinder the player's visibility (the player tends to gaze at the central portion), but also the left drive mechanism. The 1150 and the right side drive mechanism 1160 can be compactly provided in a range smaller than the vertical movable range of the upper back accessory 1100. Although the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are made of black resin, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right even if the upper back accessory 1100 advances toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Since the arm 1178 moves so as to be hidden behind the movable decorative body 1110, it is difficult for the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 to enter the player's view. Further, by reducing the thickness of the pantograph mechanism 1170 in the front-rear direction, the upper back accessory 1100 can be made thinner as a whole (in the present embodiment, the thickness is about the width of the left side motor 1151 and the right side motor 1161). ing).

Further, at the beginning of the operation of the movable decorative body 1110, both the movable decorative body 1110 and the coated decorative body 1120 start to operate from the origin position, and the covered decorative body 1120 (covered decorative body) with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 from the middle. 1122 and the covering decoration 1124) will start operating relatively. That is, since the covering decoration body 1120 is not operating with respect to the movable decoration body 1110 at the beginning of the operation of the movable decoration body 1110, the covering decoration body 1120 is operated from the beginning of the operation of the movable decoration body 1110. It is difficult to predict the final shape, and the movable decorative body 1110 will operate beyond the player's expectation from the middle, and it will be possible to enhance the interest.

In the present embodiment, the covering decorative body 1120 (covered decorative body 1122 and the covering decorative body 1124) is not operating with respect to the movable decorative body 1110 at the beginning of the operation of the movable decorative body 1110, and is movable from the middle. The covering decorative body 1120 is configured to start operating relative to the decorative body 1110, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the covering decorative body 1120 operates regardless of the position of the movable decorative body 1110. May be.

By the way, after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 abut on the left contact surface 1192 and the right contact surface 1194 (after reaching the operating limit position), the left motor 1151 and the right motor 1161 further rotate. Even so, the postures of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 (the directions in which the longitudinal portions of the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 each face) do not change. On the other hand, regarding the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178, even after the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 abut on the left contact surface 1192 and the right contact surface 1194, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1174 and the lower right arm, respectively. Each longitudinal portion of the arm 1178 changes its posture in the vertical direction. If the longitudinal portions of the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction, the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 will eventually be exposed from the back side of the movable decoration body 1110. ..

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cover decorative body 1120 (covered decorative body 1122) is opposed to the movable decorative body 1110 before the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 are exposed from the back side of the movable decorative body 1110. And the covering decoration body 1124) is made to operate relatively. That is, when the movable decorative body 1110 operates downward on the paper surface, the longitudinal portions of the left lower arm 1174 and the right lower arm 1178 change their postures in the vertical direction. And the lower right arm 1178 will appear in a position that can be visually recognized from the front, and at that timing, the covering decorative body 1120 is operated relatively upward with respect to the movable decorative body 1110, and the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm are operated. The arm 1178 is located on the back side of the covering decoration body 1120. When the covering decoration body 1120 operates relative to the movable decoration body 1110, the accessory area (the area where the movable decoration body 1110 and the covering decoration body 1120 are combined) that can be visually recognized from the front becomes large. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the lower left arm 1174 and the lower right arm 1178 from being exposed in a natural manner without discomfort for the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, after the upper back accessory 1100 at the origin position starts operating toward the descending end position, the upper left arm 1172 and the upper right arm 1176 each have a left contact surface. When abutting on the 1192 and the right contact surface 1194, the movable decorative body 1110 continues to operate toward the descending end position, and the coated decorative body 1120 (covered decorative body 1122 and the coated decorative body 1122 and the coated decorative body) is attached to the movable decorative body 1110. The body 1124) operates upward. Here, the operation of the covering decorative body 1122 with respect to the movable decorative body 1100 is performed by one operation control such as simply rotating the left side motor 1151 counterclockwise in a front view. Similarly, the operation of the covering decoration body 1124 with respect to the movable decoration body 1100 is performed by one operation control such as simply rotating the right side motor 1161 clockwise in a front view. That is, for both the covering decoration body 1122 and the covering decoration body 1124, the corresponding motors (the left side motor 1151 for the covering decoration body 1122 and the right side motor 1161 for the covering decoration body 1124) are simply rotated in a specific direction. With one simple motion control, it is possible to operate the movable decorative body 1100 independently of the operation of the movable decorative body 1100 while continuing the operation of the movable decorative body 1100. Moreover, since each of the covering decoration body 1122 and the covering decoration body 1124 only rotates one motor, the movable decoration body 1100 can be operated while continuing the operation of the movable decoration body 1100 with a simple configuration and space saving. It is possible to operate independently of the operation of. In particular, in recent years, it has become mainstream to increase the size of movable accessories and arrange multiple movable accessories, so the contribution to space saving is a great effect.

By the way, conventionally, when the accessory is operated substantially linearly in the vertical direction, drive mechanisms are provided on both sides of the accessory, and the drive mechanism is used to perform linear motion in the vertical direction. When the drive mechanisms are provided on both sides of the accessory, it is necessary to provide the drive mechanism at least over the operating range of the accessory in the vertical direction, and the installation of the drive mechanism requires a large area. Space can be saved if the accessory can be operated by the circular motion, but in this case, the accessory is also operated by the circular motion. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the left transmission arm 1154 rotates clockwise with the left transmission arm mounting shaft 11848 as a fulcrum, and the boss 1112 slidably connected to the slot 11542 moves in the slot 11542. While moving the movable decorative body 1110 downward. In synchronization with this, the right transmission arm 1164 rotates counterclockwise with the right transmission arm mounting shaft 11868 as a fulcrum, and the boss 1114 slidably connected to the slot 11642 moves in the slot 11642. While moving the movable decorative body 1110 downward. That is, according to the present embodiment, each of the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 is made to move in an arc with one end as a fulcrum, while the posture of the movable decorative body 1110 is held substantially horizontally. The movable decorative body 1110 can be moved substantially linearly in the vertical direction over an operating range larger than the installation area of the drive mechanism. Moreover, since the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 perform an arc motion, the installation area of the drive mechanism (left side drive mechanism 1150, right side drive mechanism 1160) for driving the movable decorative body 1110 in the vertical direction is set to the movable decorative body 1110. It can be made smaller than the operating range of the above, which can greatly contribute to space saving.

Further, in the present embodiment, the front surface of the movable decorative body 1110, the covering decorative body 1120, the decorative cover 1130, the decorative cover 1140, the left transmission arm 1154, the right transmission arm 1164, and the static decorative body 1196 is decorated with the same system. Is given. The same type of decoration means, for example, a decoration that evokes the same idea, and if a decoration that can be recognized as having the same color, pattern, or shape in appearance is given, the same idea can be recalled. In the present embodiment, the front surface of each of the above members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, 1196 has the same color in appearance and the same accessory (upper back accessory 1100). It is decorated so that it can be recognized as being there. Moreover, since the upper back accessory 1100 is a character shape related to the concept of the game machine, the same members 1110, 1120, 1130, 1140, 1154, 1164, 1196 are decorated in the same system on the front surface. A character shape is formed.

In conventional gaming machines such as pachinko machines, in particular, a support member that supports a movable member (corresponding to the movable decorative body 1110 of the present embodiment) and a drive member that drives the movable member (left transmission of the present embodiment). (Equivalent to the arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164), there was a possibility that the movable accessory could be visually recognized when it advanced to the front side of the liquid crystal display device. In this respect, in the present embodiment, unlike such a conventional gaming machine, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are intentionally made visible in front view, and then other members (movable decorative body 1110). , Covered decorative body 1120, decorative cover 1130, 1140, and static decorative body 1196) so as to be recognized by the player as a member constituting the same accessory (upper back accessory 1100). Moreover, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are assimilated with the other members regardless of the position between the origin position and the operation limit position due to the operation of the movable decorative body 1110 (for example). , (A) of each of FIGS. 71 to 75). More specifically, the left transmission arm 1154 is decorated to have continuity between the movable decorative body 1110 and the decorative cover 1130, and the right transmission arm 1164 is decorated with the movable decorative body 1110 and the decorative cover. It is decorated to have continuity with 1140. Moreover, the left transmission arm 1154, the right transmission arm 1164, and the front surfaces of the other members are decorated in the same system to form one character shape. In this way, while the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are intentionally visible from the front, the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are connected to the movable decorative body 1110 to support the movable decorative body 1110. It is difficult for the player to grasp that the member is a member. Further, while the movable decorative body 1110 is shaped like an eye, the left transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are shaped so that the outer corners of the eyes are imaged from the left and right ends of the movable decorative body 1110. .. Therefore, it seems more difficult for the player to understand that the transmission arm 1154 and the right transmission arm 1164 are members for driving the movable decorative body 1110.

[Structure of lower part 1200]
The configuration of the lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 81. FIG. 76 is an example of a front view of the lower accessory 1200 in a normal mode (a mode when it is in the origin position). FIG. 77 is an example of a rear view of the lower accessory 1200 in a normal embodiment. FIG. 78 is an example of a perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 79 is an example of a rear perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed diagonally from above on the left. FIG. 80 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 81 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower accessory 1200 viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view).

The lower accessory 1200 includes a lower accessory fixing base 1220 to which various members constituting the lower accessory 1200 are attached, and a lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 configured to be operable with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220. The left guide 1260 member and the right guide 1270 member that guide the vertical movement of the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 on both the left and right sides, and the auxiliary that exerts an upward urging force on the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 that moves up and down. The power of the lower accessory drive motor 1230 as a drive source for operating the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 with respect to the arm 1280 and the lower accessory fixed base 1220, and the lower accessory drive motor 1230 is movable. It comprises a gear 1240 transmitted to the decorative body 1210 and a transparent resin rear cover 1250 disposed behind the gear 1240. Although the rear cover 1250 is made of transparent resin, various members such as the gear 1240 are not shown in FIGS. 77 and 79 so that the shape of the rear cover 1250 can be easily grasped. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 and the lower accessory drive motor 1230 function as an actuating mechanism for moving the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 up and down.

The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is a horizontally long rectangular plate-shaped member. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 is attached and fixed to the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. A lower accessory drive motor 1230 is attached to substantially the center of the lower portion on the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220. On the left side of the front surface of the lower accessory fixing base 1220, a support shaft 12202 that pivotally supports the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed so as to face forward. A pair of left and right support shafts 12203 and 12205 are formed on the back surface side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 toward the rear. The lower accessory fixing base 1220 has a pair of semicircular holes 12204, 12206 that are substantially symmetrical with respect to the lower accessory drive motor 1230 and bulge outward above the lower accessory drive motor 1230. It is formed. The hole 12204 is formed so as to draw an arc centered on the support shaft 12203. The hole 12206 is formed so as to draw an arc centered on the support shaft 12205. A photo sensor 12208 for detecting the position of the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 is arranged on the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and on the right side of the lower accessory drive motor 1230. In the present embodiment, the photo sensor 12208 detects whether or not the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the origin position.

The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is a decorative member that is long in the lateral direction. It is attached to the front side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to be able to operate in the vertical direction with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220. The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 has a lower accessory movable base 12102 made of transparent resin that can be operated in the vertical direction with respect to the lower accessory fixed base 1220, and a lower accessory fixed base 1220 that is decorated on the front surface. A lower accessory decorative cover 12104 that moves up and down together with the lower accessory movable base 12102 is provided. The lower accessory decorative cover 12104 is configured to allow light from the rear to pass forward.

A pair of elongated holes 12106, 12108 are formed on the left and right sides of the lower accessory movable base 12102. The elongated holes 12106 and 12108 are elongated holes that are long in the lateral direction. A boss 12110 that engages with the auxiliary arm 1280 is formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102 toward the front on the right side of the elongated hole 12106.

Further, on the lower accessory movable base 12102, an LED substrate on which an LED (not shown) as a light emitting source is arranged is mounted on the front side. When the LED arranged on the LED substrate emits light, it emits light forward through the lower accessory decorative cover 12104. As a result, for example, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect according to the vertical movement of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210.

The left guide member 1260 is a vertically long plate-shaped member, and is attached to the left side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 in the attachment portions 1264 and 12606. The left guide member 1260 is attached to the left side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower accessory movable base 12102 with the lower accessory fixing base 1220. Then, the groove formed between the left guide member 1260 and the lower accessory fixing base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower accessory movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220. ..

The right guide member 1270 is a vertically long plate-shaped member, and is attached to the right side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 in the attachment portions 1274 and 12706. The right guide member 1270 is attached to the right side of the lower accessory fixing base 1220 so as to sandwich the lower accessory movable base 12102 with the lower accessory fixing base 1220. Then, the groove formed between the right guide member 1270 and the lower accessory fixing base 1220 functions as a guide groove when the lower accessory movable base 12102 moves up and down with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220. ..

The auxiliary arm 1280 is a rod-shaped member provided on the front left side of the lower accessory decorative cover 12104. The auxiliary arm 1280 has a bearing 12804 at the left end end that is pivotally supported by a support shaft 12202 of the lower accessory fixing base 1220. The auxiliary arm 1280 has an elongated hole 12802 formed at the right end thereof to engage with the boss 12110 formed on the lower accessory movable base 12102.

An auxiliary coil spring 1290 is provided as an example of an elastic member between the support shaft 12202 formed on the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and the bearing 12804 formed on the auxiliary arm 1280. The auxiliary coil spring 1290 urges the auxiliary arm 1280 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) with the bearing 12804 (support shaft 12202) as the center of rotation. The urging force of the auxiliary coil spring 1290 toward the counterclockwise direction assists the upward movement of the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 with respect to the lower accessory fixing base 1220.

The lower accessory drive motor 1230 is a stepping motor, and its rotation is controlled by a pulse signal from the accessory control circuit 207.

The gear 1240 is provided behind the lower accessory fixing base 1220. The gear 1240 includes a drive gear 12402 provided coaxially with the lower accessory drive motor 1230, and a left driven gear 12404 and a right driven gear 12406.

The left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter, and left and right so that the height direction position of the rotation center of the left driven gear 12404 and the height direction position of the rotation center of the right driven gear 12406 are the same. They are arranged side by side. Further, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate in the opposite directions in synchronization with each other.

The left driven gear 12404 has a bearing 12404a in the center. The bearing 12404a rotatably supports the support shaft 12203. The teeth of the left driven gear 12404 mesh with the teeth of the drive gear 12402. The right driven gear 12406 has a bearing 12406a in the center. The bearing 12406a rotatably supports the support shaft 12205. The teeth of the right driven gear 12406 mesh with the teeth of the left driven gear 12404 and do not mesh with the teeth of the drive gear 12402. That is, the rotational force of the lower accessory drive motor 1230 is transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 through the drive gear 12402, and the rotational force transmitted to the left driven gear 12404 is further transmitted to the right driven gear 12406. In this way, the rotation of the drive gear 12402 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate in synchronization with each other.

The left driven gear 12404 has a boss 12405 formed on the front surface at a portion radially separated from the center of the left driven gear 12404 by a predetermined distance. Similarly, with respect to the right driven gear 12406, a boss 12407 is formed on the front surface at a portion radially separated from the center of the right driven gear 12406 by a predetermined distance. The distance from the center of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405 is the same as the distance from the center of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407.

It should be noted that "the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 have the same diameter", "the center height direction position of the left driven gear 12404 is the same as the center height direction position of the right driven gear 12406", and "the left driven gear 12406". The distance from the center of the gear 12404 to the boss 12405 and the distance from the center of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 are the same. " Instead, when the power of the lower accessory drive motor 1230 is transmitted to the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 is stably (balanced in the left-right direction) while maintaining the same posture in appearance. It suffices as long as it is within a range in which a colleague can be transmitted substantially evenly to the left and right of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 so that it can move up and down.

The boss 12405 penetrates the hole 12204 formed in the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and is slidably connected to the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Here, the hole 12204 is formed corresponding to a locus in which the boss 12405 orbits around the support shaft 12203 when the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise.

The boss 12407 penetrates the hole 12206 formed in the lower accessory fixing base 1220 and is slidably connected to the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Here, the hole 12206 is formed corresponding to a locus in which the boss 12407 orbits around the support shaft 12205 when the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise.

In the normal state, the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 are respectively located at the lowermost lowermost positions (positions shown in FIG. 82).

The holes 12204 and 12206 also have a function of defining the movement range of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 (that is, the rotation range of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406), respectively.

When the uppermost position of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 when the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are rotated is set as the uppermost position, the holes 12204 and the hole 12206 are both at least the lowermost position and the uppermost position. It needs to be formed so that the bosses 12405 and 12407 can move between them. In the present embodiment, the hole 12404 is formed from the lowermost position (see FIG. 82) to a position that exceeds the uppermost position clockwise. Further, the hole 12206 is formed from the lowermost position (see FIG. 82) to a position exceeding the uppermost position counterclockwise.

Here, of the two positions where the vertical direction line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 and the hole 12204 intersect, the upper side is the uppermost position of the boss 12405 and the lower part is the lowermost position of the boss 12405. Of the two positions where the vertical direction line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 and the hole 12206 intersect, the upper end is the uppermost position of the boss 12407, and the lower end is the lowermost position of the boss 12407 (whichever). Also see FIG. 84). However, in FIG. 84, both the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 have moved to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position.

The "position slightly beyond the uppermost position" of the boss 12405 is the right side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (right side of FIG. 84 (A), FIG. 84). (Left side of (B)), which is a position where the substantially uppermost position can be maintained. Further, the "position beyond the uppermost end position" of the boss 12407 is the left side of the front view (left side of FIG. 84 (A), FIG. 84 (B)) with respect to the line of the vertical direction line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406. ) On the right side). However, it is preferable that the degree of the "exceeding position" is so small that it is difficult to recognize that the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 has been lowered when the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 has moved upward. This is because if the bosses 12405 and 12407 greatly exceed the uppermost end position, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 descends to a position lower than the uppermost end position.

[Operation explanation of the lower accessory 1200]
Next, the operation of the lower accessory 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. 82 is a view showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 before the start of operation, that is, in the normal mode (the mode when the position is at the origin), where FIG. 82 is a front view and FIG. 82 is a rear view. FIG. 83 is a view showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when it is operated to the intermediate position, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of the lower accessory 1200 when it is operated to the operating limit, in which (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. In addition, in FIG. 84, these are illustrated so that the mode of the boss 12407 and the elongated hole 12108 can be grasped.

The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is movable in the vertical direction between the origin position (see FIG. 82) and the operating limit position (see FIG. 84). When the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is at the origin position, it is hidden behind the center unit 74, which makes it difficult for the player to see it. On the other hand, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is in the operation limit position, it is located in front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. That is, when the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 at the origin position moves toward the operation limit position, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 faces forward from the rear of the center unit 74 toward the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. Will advance. The advance of the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 from the rear of the center unit 74 toward the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is the progress of the game (for example, the game to the first start port 762 or the second start port 752). It is executed according to the result of the hit judgment executed on the condition that the ball wins (passes).

When the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates counterclockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise and the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates clockwise, the boss 12405, which is located at the lowermost position in the normal state, rotates clockwise while drawing an arc whose radius is the linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405. Rotate and move to. When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12407, which is located at the lowermost position in the normal state, reverses while drawing an arc whose radius is the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407. Rotate and move clockwise. That is, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 rises toward the operating limit position.

While the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the origin position (see FIG. 82) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 83), the boss 12405 moves leftward in the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving to the right in FIGS. 82 (B) and 83 (B), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward. The boss 12407 moves the lower accessory movable base 12102 upward while moving to the right (leftward in FIGS. 82 (B) and 83 (B)) in the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Push up. At this time, the holes 12204 and 12206 function as guide grooves for guiding the operation of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407, respectively, and as described above, the operating ranges of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 (left driven gear 12404 and right driven gear). It also has a function to specify the rotation range of 12406).

Further, while the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the intermediate position (see FIG. 83) to the operation limit position (see FIG. 84), the boss 12405 enters the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving to the right (to the left in FIGS. 83B and 84B), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward, and the boss 12407 is an elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. The lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed upward while moving in the left direction (right direction in FIGS. 83 (B) and 84 (B)). Since the auxiliary coil spring 1290 applies a counterclockwise urging force with the bearing 12804 as a fulcrum to the auxiliary arm 1280, the auxiliary coil spring 1290 exerts a force to push up the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 upward. Supported.

When the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates clockwise, the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise and the right driven gear 12406 rotates clockwise. When the left driven gear 12404 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12405 rotates counterclockwise while drawing an arc having a linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405. When the right driven gear 12406 rotates counterclockwise, the boss 12407 rotates clockwise while drawing an arc having a linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 as a radius. That is, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 descends toward the origin position.

While the lower accessory movable decoration 1210 operates from the operating limit position (see FIG. 84) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 83), the boss 12405 moves leftward in the slot 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving to the right (to the right in FIGS. 83B and 84B), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward, and the boss 12407 enters the slotted hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving to the right (to the left in FIGS. 83B and 84B), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward. Further, while the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 operates from the intermediate position (see FIG. 83) to the origin position (see FIG. 82), the boss 12405 is right in the elongated hole 12106 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. While moving in the direction (to the left in FIGS. 82 (B) and 83 (B)), the lower accessory movable base 12102 is pushed downward, and the boss 12407 is inside the elongated hole 12108 formed in the lower accessory movable base 12102. Pushes the lower accessory movable base 12102 downward while moving to the left (to the right in FIGS. 82 (B) and 83 (B)).

As described above, the height direction position of the rotation center of the left driven gear 12404 and the height direction position of the rotation center of the right driven gear 12406 are the same, and the diameter of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are the same. The diameter is the same. Further, the linear distance RL from the center 12404a of the left driven gear 12404 to the boss 12405 and the linear distance RR from the center 12406a of the right driven gear 12406 to the boss 12407 are the same distance (length). Therefore, when the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates, the height direction position of the boss 12405 and the height direction position of the right driven gear 12406 are the same. Here, since the LED substrate is mounted on the lower accessory movable base 12102, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 to be raised has a considerable weight. Moreover, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is a long accessory in the left-right direction. When raising such an accessory, there is a possibility that power will be transmitted biased to either the left or right side. However, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, even if the ascending object is a little heavy or has a long accessory in the left-right direction, only the rotational force (power) of one lower accessory drive motor 1230 is sufficient. The lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 is stable (balanced in the left-right direction) while maintaining the posture when it is in the origin position (see FIG. 82) without the power being transmitted unevenly to either the left or right side. It is possible to operate in the vertical direction.

By the way, when operating the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 from the origin position to the operation limit position, the accessory control circuit 207 is necessary for operating the lower accessory drive motor 1230 from the origin position to the operation limit position. The pulse signal is output so that the rotation speed exceeds the maximum rotation speed (rotation beyond the operating limit position). The lower accessory movable decorative body 1210, which has started to operate by the rotation of the lower accessory drive motor 1230, physically collides with the boss 12405 at the end of the hole 12204 and the boss 12407 collides with the end of the hole 12206. It will be stopped. In this way, the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 can be quickly operated from the origin position to the operation limit position.

Here, the hole 12204 is formed up to the center side of the vertical direction line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (on the right side of the paper surface of the vertical direction line LL in FIG. 84A). Similarly, the hole 12206 is formed up to the center side of the vertical direction line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406 (on the left side of the paper surface of the vertical direction line LR in FIG. 84A). Therefore, when the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 moves to the operation limit position, the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost end position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeds the uppermost end position. That is, the boss 12405 is located on the center side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (on the right side of the paper surface of the vertical line LL in FIG. 84 (A)), and is the center of the right driven gear 12406. The boss 12407 is located on the center side of the vertical ship LR passing through the OR (on the left side of the paper surface of the vertical line LL in FIG. 84 (A)).

When the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly above the uppermost position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly above the uppermost position, a downward force (for example, gravity) with respect to the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210. However, the holes 12204 and 12206 regulate the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406. Therefore, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 cannot rotate in any direction, and the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 is locked at this position.

In this way, when the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 moves to the operating limit position, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 does not descend due to gravity, and of course, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 is subjected to external vibration or the like. Even if a large force is applied, it does not descend and is held at the operating limit position unless the lower accessory drive motor 1230 rotates in the direction toward the origin position (clockwise). As a result, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 is locked in a series of operations for moving the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 upward with a simple configuration without newly providing a member as a lock mechanism. It is possible to maintain the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 above.

If the boss 12405 is not on the left side of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (if the boss 12407 is not on the right side of the vertical line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406) , The movement of the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 downward is locked. Therefore, even when the boss 12405 is on the line of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the line of the vertical direction line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), it is also downward. The movement of the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 toward is locked. When the boss 12405 is on the line of the vertical line LL passing through the center OL of the left driven gear 12404 (when the boss 12407 is on the line of the vertical direction line LR passing through the center OR of the right driven gear 12406), the lower accessory movable decoration The gravity of the body 1210 acts in the vertical direction, and the component force of the applied gravity acts in the rotation direction of the left driven gear 12404 (right driven gear 12406). This is because the driven gear 12406 does not act in the horizontal right direction when viewed from the front.

In the present embodiment, when the boss 12405 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position and the boss 12407 moves to a position slightly exceeding the uppermost position, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 The rotation is restricted, because it is desired to hold the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) at the uppermost position, and the target accessory to be raised (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102). The movement range of the bosses 12405 and 12407 can be appropriately changed according to the position where the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment is desired to be held. For example, the rotation range of the left driven gear 12404 is set to a position rotated 90 degrees further to the right side of the front view (the right side of FIG. 84 (A) and the left side of FIG. 84 (B)) from the line of the vertical direction line LL. When the rotation range of the right driven gear 12406 is further rotated 90 degrees to the left side of the front view (the left side of FIG. 84 (A) and the right side of FIG. 84 (B)) from the vertical line LR, it is the most. The lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 can be held at an intermediate position between the upper end position and the lowermost position position.

Further, in the present embodiment, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are rotated to rotate the boss 12405 and the boss 12407, and the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102). ) Is moved up and down, but the mode in which the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 is moved up and down is not limited to this, and a force acting member that exerts a force on the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (in the present embodiment). The bosses in the form (corresponding to 12405 and 12407) may move up and down in an arc to move the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 up and down. Therefore, instead of using gears (corresponding to the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 of the present embodiment) for the movement of the force acting member, for example, the above-mentioned portion is radially separated from the center by a predetermined distance. A rotating member or the like on which a force acting member is formed may be used.

Further, the above-mentioned force acting member (corresponding to the bosses 12405 and 12407 of the present embodiment) can be moved by drawing a perfect circular arc by using a gear, but is not necessarily moved by drawing a perfect circular arc. It is not necessary, and you may move it by drawing an elliptical arc. That is, when the moving direction of the force acting member becomes the horizontal direction, the symmetrical accessory in the moving direction (horizontal direction) of the force acting member (lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment (more specifically, the lower accessory movable). The component force of the load (corresponding to the base 12102) becomes 0, and the force acting member does not move due to the load of the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 of the present embodiment). Therefore, unless the drive source of the force acting member (corresponding to the lower accessory drive motor 1230 of the present embodiment) is driven in the direction in which the target accessory is lowered, a simple configuration is performed without newly providing a member as a lock mechanism. Then, the target accessory can be locked upward in a series of actions for moving the target accessory upward.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 (movement of the boss 12405 and the boss 12407) is not stopped by stopping the drive of the lower accessory drive motor 1230, but is a hole. It is physically stopped by 12204 and 12206. For example, if the target accessory (corresponding to the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 of the present embodiment) is stopped upward by controlling the motor (corresponding to the lower accessory drive motor 1230 of the present embodiment), the target accessory is stopped. There is no choice but to decelerate the rotation of the motor near the upper position to be desired, and there is a possibility that the ascending speed of the target accessory in the vicinity of the upper position will decrease. In this respect, as in the present embodiment, by physically restricting the movement of the force acting member (corresponding to the bosses 12405 and 12407 of the present embodiment), the target accessory is used unless the rotation of the motor is decelerated. High-speed movement can be achieved with a simple configuration without stalling near the upper position where you want to stop. Moreover, since the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 are arranged side by side as a pair, even if the symmetrical accessory has a horizontally long shape that is long in the left-right direction, the target combination is maintained in the left-right direction. You can move things up and down.

Further, in the present embodiment, the left driven gear 12404 and the right driven gear 12406 rotate in the opposite directions in synchronization with each other. That is, the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 move in the opposite directions in synchronization with each other. As a result, even if an external force (for example, vibration) is applied to the lower accessory movable decorative body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) in either the left or right direction, the lower accessory drive motor As long as the 1230 is not driven, the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 (more specifically, the lower accessory movable base 12102) can be locked near the uppermost end position. This is because the lower accessory movable decoration body 1210 does not descend unless the boss 12405 and the boss 12407 move in opposite directions.

[Corner character 1300]
As described above, the corner accessory 1300 includes an upper corner accessory 1320 and a lower corner accessory 1350. Here, the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described first, then the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described, and then the mode when the corner accessory 1300 is operated to the operation limit position will be described.

[Structure of upper corner accessory 1320]
The configuration of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 to 88. FIG. 85 is an example of a front view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. 86 is an example of a rear view of the upper corner accessory 1320. FIG. 87 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 88 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the upper corner accessory 1320 viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view).

The upper corner accessory 1320 includes a fixed plate 1322 to which various members constituting the upper corner accessory 1320 are attached, a first movable body 1330 and a second movable body 1340 configured to be operable with respect to the fixed plate 1322. A motor 1332 as a drive source for operating the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340, and a power transmission mechanism 1333 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1332 to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340. And a photo sensor 1345 for confirming the origin positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340.

The fixing plate 1322 is a horizontally long plate-shaped member that is on the back side of the upper front accessory 1000 and the front side of the upper back accessory 1100, and is attached and fixed to the upper part of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. Support shafts 13222, 13224, 13226 are formed on the front surface side of the fixing plate 1322. A hole 13225 is formed between the support shaft 13222 and the support shaft 13224 in the left-right direction and above the support shafts 13222 and 13224. Around the support shaft 13226, a hole 13229 is formed in substantially the upper half of the circumference of the support shaft 13226.

The first movable body 1330 includes a decorative portion 13302 decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13304 integrally formed with the decorative portion 13302. A bearing 13306 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13222 is formed at the base end portion of the arm portion 13304. A support shaft 13308 is formed on the upper right side of the bearing 13306 when viewed from the front. The first movable body 1330 is rotatable around the bearing 13306 (support shaft 13222). Further, on the back surface of the first movable body 1330, a long linear slope 13307 is formed along the moving direction of the first movable body 1330. The slope 13307 has a mountain-shaped shape that rises from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

The second movable body 1340 includes a decorative portion 13402 decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13404 integrally formed with the decorative portion 13402. A bearing 13406 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13228 is formed at the base end portion of the arm portion 13404. A support shaft 13408 is formed on the upper left side of the bearing 13406 in the front view. The second movable body 1340 is rotatable around the bearing 13406 (support shaft 13228). Further, on the back surface of the second movable body 1340, a long linear slope 13407 is formed along the moving direction of the second movable body 1340. The slope 13407 has a mountain-shaped shape that rises from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

The motor 1332 is mounted and fixed to the fixing plate 1322 via the motor mounting member 1331. Further, the power of the motor 1332 is output from the motor output shaft 13322.

The power transmission mechanism 1333 includes a first gear 1334, a second gear 1335, a third gear 1336, a first transmission arm 1337, and a second transmission arm 1338. The first gear 1334 and the second gear 1335 are meshed with each other, and the second gear 1335 and the third gear 1336 are meshed with each other. Power from the motor 1332 is transmitted to the first movable body 1330 via the gears 1334 and 1335, respectively. Power from the motor 1332 is transmitted to the second movable body 1340 via the gears 1334 to 1336.

A hollow shaft 13342 is formed in the center of the first gear 1334. The hollow shaft 13342 is pivotally supported by the motor output shaft 13322 so that it can rotate coaxially with the motor output shaft 13322. The hollow shaft 13342 pivotally supported by the motor output shaft 13322 is located in the hole 13225.

A hollow shaft 13352 is formed in the center of the second gear 1335. The hollow shaft 13352 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 13224. Further, on the front surface side of the second gear 1335, a boss 13354 is formed at a portion radially outward from the center by a predetermined distance.

A hollow shaft 13362 is formed in the center of the third gear 1336. The hollow shaft 13362 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 13226. Further, on the front surface side of the third gear 1336, a boss 13364 is formed at a portion radially outward from the center by a predetermined distance. On the back surface side of the third gear 1336, a boss 13366 is formed at a portion radially outward from the center by a predetermined distance. The boss 13366 moves in the hole 13229 when the third gear 1336 rotates. The boss 13364 and the boss 13366 are formed on opposite surfaces to each other substantially diagonally with respect to the center of the third gear 1336. A detection piece 13368 that can be detected by the photo sensor 1345 is formed on the front surface of the third gear 1336.

The first transmission arm 1337 has a C-shaped curved portion 13370 and a rod-shaped portion 13371. A bearing 13372 is formed at the end on the rod-shaped portion 13371 side. The bearing 13372 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13308. A bearing 13374 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13370 side. The bearing 13374 is rotatably supported by the boss 13354.

The second transmission arm 1338 has a C-shaped curved portion 13380 and a rod-shaped portion 13381. A bearing 13382 is formed at the end on the rod-shaped portion 13381 side. The bearing 13382 is rotatably supported by a support shaft 13408. A bearing 13384 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13380 side. The bearing 13384 is rotatably supported by the boss 13364.

The photo sensor 1345 detects the positions of the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340, and in the present embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are the origin positions (see FIG. 89 described later). ), It is attached so that the detection piece 13368 can be detected.

[Operation explanation of upper corner accessory 1320]
Next, the operation of the upper corner accessory 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 92. FIG. 89 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are at the origin position. FIG. 90 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 start operating from the origin position. FIG. 91 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are further operated from the position shown in FIG. 90. FIG. 92 is an example of a rear view showing when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit position.

When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are in the origin position, the first movable body 1330 is located in the upper left corner portion of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the second movable body 1340 is located in the upper right corner portion of the liquid crystal display device 16. Is located in. At the origin position, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are arranged behind the upper front accessory 1000 (see, for example, FIG. 19), so that they are difficult to see in front view.

When the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are located at the origin position (see FIG. 89), the motor 1332 rotates and the motor output shaft 13322 is counterclockwise in front view (clockwise in FIGS. 89 to 92). When rotated to, the first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the first gear 1334 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise in front view. When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise in front view, the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise in front view.

When the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 13324 (hollow shaft 13352) as the center of rotation, the boss 13354 (see FIG. 87) rotates clockwise with the hollow shaft 13352 (support shaft 13324) as the center. Orbit to. When the boss 13354 orbits clockwise around the hollow shaft 13352 in front view, the bearing 13374 pivotally supported by the boss 13354 also orbits clockwise around the support shaft 13224. As a result, the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 moves to the left (to the right in FIGS. 89 to 92) when viewed from the front. Since the bearing 13372 of the first transmission arm 1337 is rotatably supported by the support shaft 13308 of the first movable body 1330, when the bearing 13372 moves to the left in front view, the support shaft 13308 is attached to the fixed plate 1322. It rotates counterclockwise in front view with the formed support shaft 13222 (bearing 13306) as the center of rotation. That is, the first movable body 1330 rotates counterclockwise with the support shaft 13222 as the center of rotation, and as a result, the first movable body 1330 rotates from the origin position to the lower right (display area of the liquid crystal display device 16). Move toward (in front of).

Further, when the second gear 1335 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 13324 (hollow shaft 13352) as the center of rotation, the third gear 1336 counterclockwise with the hollow shaft 13362 (support shaft 13326) as the center of rotation. Rotate around. When the third gear 1336 rotates counterclockwise in front view with the support shaft 13326 as the center of rotation, the boss 13364 (see FIG. 87) rotates counterclockwise in front view around the hollow shaft 13362. When the boss 13364 orbits counterclockwise in front view around the hollow shaft 13362, the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 moves in the right direction (left direction in FIGS. 89 to 92) in front view. Since the bearing 13382 of the second transmission arm 1338 is rotatably externally attached to the support shaft 13408 of the second movable body 1340, when the bearing 13382 moves to the right in front view, the support shaft 13408 becomes the fixing plate 1322. It rotates clockwise with the formed support shaft 13228 (bearing 13406) as the center of rotation. That is, the second movable body 1340 moves from the origin position toward the lower left (front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) with the support shaft 13228 as the center of rotation.

In this way, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 can be operated synchronously by the rotation of one motor 1332.

Further, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move in a direction in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are close to each other from the origin position which is difficult to see from the front view. That is, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the outside to the inside of the field of view in the front view.

When the motor 1332 rotates and the motor output shaft 13322 rotates clockwise in front view, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 operate in the direction of returning to the origin position due to the movement opposite to the above-mentioned movement. do.

By the way, when the first movable body 1330 moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the first movable body 1330 and the fixed plate 1322 interfere with each other, and the first movable body 1330 smoothly returns to the origin position. There is a risk that it will not be possible to recover. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the slope 13307 formed on the back surface of the first movable body 1330 slides on the flat surface portion of the fixed plate 1322, whereby the first movable body 1330 can be smoothly returned to the origin position. ing. Similarly, for the second movable body 1340, the slope 13407 formed on the back surface of the second movable body 1340 slides on the flat surface portion of the fixed plate 1322, so that the second movable body 1340 is smoothly moved to the origin position. It is possible to make a good return.

[Composition of lower corner accessory 1350]
The configuration of the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. FIG. 93 is an example of a front view of the lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. 94 is an example of a rear view of the lower corner accessory 1350. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 96 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the lower corner accessory 1350 as viewed from diagonally above the left side of the back surface.

The lower corner accessory 1350 includes a fixed plate 1352 to which various members constituting the lower corner accessory 1350 are attached, a third movable body 1355 and a fourth movable body 1357 configured to be operable with respect to the fixed plate 1352. A motor 1354 as a drive source for operating the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357, and a power transmission mechanism 1360 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the motor 1354 to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357. And a photo sensor 1375 for confirming the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357.

The fixing plate 1352 is a horizontally long plate-shaped member which is the back side of the middle panel 1500 and the front side of the lower accessory 1200 and is fixedly attached to the lower part of the rear box 1800. Support shafts 13522, 13523, 13524, 13525, 13526, 13527, 13528, 13259 are formed on the front surface side of the fixing plate 1352. Around the support shaft 13527, a hole 13530 is formed in substantially the lower half of the circumference of the support shaft 13527.

The third movable body 1355 includes a decorative portion 13552 decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13554 integrally configured with the decorative portion 13552. An arm cover 13559 is provided on the back surface of the arm portion 13554. A hole 135592 is formed at the central end of the arm cover 13559. A bearing 13556 that pivotally supports the support shaft 13524 is formed at the base end portion of the arm portion 13554. A support shaft 13558 is formed at the lower right of the front view of the bearing 13556. The third movable body 1355 is rotatable about a support shaft 13524 on which the bearing 13556 is pivotally supported. Further, a coil spring 1395 is provided between the bearing 13556 of the arm portion 13554 and the hole 135592 of the arm cover 13559. The coil spring 1395 is urged clockwise with the support shaft 13524 as the center of rotation. As a result, a clockwise urging force with the support shaft 13524 as the center of rotation acts on the third movable body 1355. Further, on the back surface of the third movable body 1355, a long linear slope 13557 is formed along the moving direction of the third movable body 1355. The slope 13557 has a mountain-shaped shape that rises from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

The fourth movable body 1357 includes a decorative portion 1357 that is decorated with characters and the like, and an arm portion 13574 that is integrally formed with the decorative portion 1357. An arm cover 13579 is provided on the back surface of the arm portion 13574. A hole 135792 is formed at the central end of the arm cover 13579. A bearing 13576 that supports the support shaft 13259 is formed at the base end of the arm portion 13574. A support shaft 13578 is formed in the lower left of the front view of the bearing 13576. The fourth movable body 1357 is rotatable about a support shaft 13259 on which the bearing 13576 is pivotally supported. Further, a coil spring 1396 is provided between the bearing 13576 of the arm portion 13574 and the hole 135792 of the arm cover 13579. The coil spring 1396 is urged counterclockwise with the support shaft 13259 as the center of rotation. As a result, a counterclockwise urging force with the support shaft 13259 as the center of rotation acts on the fourth movable body 1357. Further, on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357, a long linear slope 13557 is formed along the moving direction of the fourth movable body 1357. The slope 13757 has a mountain-shaped shape that rises from both sides in the longitudinal direction toward the center.

The motor 1354 is mounted and fixed to the fixing plate 1352 via the motor mounting member 1356. The power of the motor 1354 is output from the motor output shaft 1354.

The power transmission mechanism 1360 includes a first gear 1361, a second gear 1362, a third gear 1363, a fourth gear 1364, a fifth gear 1365, a sixth gear 1366, a seventh gear 1376, and each gear. A third transmission arm 1370 that transmits power from all or part of 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366, 1367 to the third movable body 1355, and each gear 1361, 1362, 1363, 1364, 1365, 1366. , 1372 includes a fourth transmission arm 1372 that transmits power from all or part of the 1367 to the fourth movable body 1357.

A hollow shaft 13612 is formed in the center of the first gear 1361. The motor output shaft 13542 is press-fitted into the hollow shaft 13642 so that it can rotate coaxially with the motor output shaft 13542.

The power from the motor 1354 is transmitted in the order of the first gear 1361, the second gear 1362, the third gear 1363, the fourth gear 1364, the fifth gear 1365, the sixth gear 1366, and the seventh gear 1367. In the sixth gear 1366, a hollow shaft 13662 is formed in the center, and a boss 13664 is formed in a portion radially outward from the center at a predetermined distance. Further, in the sixth gear 1366, a detection piece 13666 that can be detected by the photo sensor 1375 is formed on the front surface at a portion radially outward from the center by a predetermined distance. Further, in the 7th gear 1367, a hollow shaft 13672 that rotatably supports the support shaft 13528 is formed at the center, and a boss 13674 is formed at a portion radially outward from the center by a predetermined distance.

The third transmission arm 1370 has a C-shaped curved portion 13702 and a rod-shaped portion 13704. A bearing 13706 is formed at the end of the rod-shaped portion 13704 on the side. The bearing 13706 rotatably supports the support shaft 13558 of the third movable body 1355. A bearing 13708 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13702 side. The bearing 13708 rotatably supports the boss 13664 of the sixth gear 1366.

The fourth transmission arm 1372 has a C-shaped curved portion 13722 and a rod-shaped portion 13724. A bearing 13726 is formed at the end on the rod-shaped portion 13724 side. The bearing 13726 rotatably supports the support shaft 13578. A bearing 13728 is formed at the end on the curved portion 13722 side. The bearing 13728 rotatably supports the boss 13674.

The photo sensor 1375 detects the positions of the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357, and in the present embodiment, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are the origin positions (see FIG. 97 described later). ), It is attached so that the detection piece 13666 can be detected.

[Operation explanation of lower corner accessory 1350]
Next, the operation of the lower corner accessory 1350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99. FIG. 97 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position. FIG. 98 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 start operating from the origin position. FIG. 99 is an example of a rear view showing when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position.

When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are in the origin position, the third movable body 1355 is located in the lower left corner portion of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, and the fourth movable body 1357 is the liquid crystal display device 16. It is located in the lower right corner of the display area. At the origin position, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are arranged behind the first middle panel 1520 and the second middle panel 1550, so that they are difficult to see in front view.

When the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are at the origin position (see FIG. 97), the motor 1354 rotates and the motor output shaft 13542 is clockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIGS. 97 to 99). When rotated to, the 1st gear 1361 rotates clockwise in front view. When the first gear 1361 rotates clockwise in front view, the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the second gear 1362 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise in front view. When the third gear 1363 rotates clockwise in front view, the fourth gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the 4th gear 1364 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the 5th gear 1365 rotates clockwise in front view. When the fifth gear 1365 rotates clockwise in front view, the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise in front view. When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the seventh gear 1367 rotates clockwise in front view.

When the sixth gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise (clockwise in FIGS. 97 to 99) with the support shaft 13527 (hollow shaft 13662) as the center of rotation, the boss 13664 (see FIG. 95) centers on the hollow shaft 13662. It orbits counterclockwise in front view. When the boss 13664 orbits counterclockwise in front view around the hollow shaft 13662, the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 moves to the left (right direction in FIGS. 97 to 99) in front view. Since the bearing 13706 of the third transmission arm 1370 rotatably supports the third movable body 1355 support shaft 13558, when the bearing 13706 moves to the left in front view, the support shaft 13558 is formed on the fixed plate 1352. It rotates clockwise with the support shaft 13524 (bearing 13556) as the center of rotation. That is, the third movable body 1355 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 13524 as the center of rotation, and as a result, the third movable body 1355 moves upward from the origin position.

Further, when the 6th gear 1366 rotates counterclockwise with the support shaft 13327 (hollow shaft 13662) as the center of rotation, the 7th gear 1367 watches with the support shaft 13528 (hollow shaft 13672) as the center of rotation. Rotate around. When the 7th gear 1367 rotates clockwise with the support shaft 13528 as the center of rotation, the boss 13674 (see FIG. 95) rotates clockwise with the hollow shaft 13672 as the center. When the boss 13672 orbits clockwise around the hollow shaft 13672 in a front view, the bearing 13726 of the fourth transmission arm 1372 moves in the right direction (left direction in FIGS. 97 to 99) in the front view. Since the bearing 13726 of the 4th transmission arm 1372 rotatably supports the support shaft 13578 of the 4th movable body 1357, when the bearing 13726 moves to the right in front view, the support shaft 13578 becomes a fixed plate 1352. It rotates counterclockwise in front view with the formed support shaft 13259 (bearing 13576) as the center of rotation. That is, the fourth movable body 1357 moves upward from the origin position with the support shaft 13259 as the center of rotation.

In this way, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 can be operated synchronously by the rotation of one motor 1354.

Further, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move in a direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are close to each other from the origin position which is difficult to see from the front view. That is, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the outside to the inside of the field of view in the front view.

When the motor 1354 rotates and the motor output shaft 1354 rotates counterclockwise in front view, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 return to the origin position due to the movement opposite to the above-mentioned movement. Operate.

By the way, when the third movable body 1355 moved to the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 returns to the origin position, the third movable body 1355 and the fixed plate 1352 interfere with each other, and the third movable body 1355 smoothly returns to the origin position. There is a risk that it will not be possible to recover. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the slope 13557 formed on the back surface of the third movable body 1355 slides on the flat surface portion of the fixed plate 1352, whereby the third movable body 1355 can be smoothly returned to the origin position. ing. Similarly, for the fourth movable body 1357, the slope 13377 formed on the back surface of the fourth movable body 1357 slides on the flat surface portion of the fixed plate 1352, so that the fourth movable body 13570 is smoothly moved to the origin position. It is possible to make a good return.

[Aspect when the corner accessory 1300 operates to the operating limit position]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102, an embodiment when the corner accessory 1300 is operated to the operation limit position will be described. FIG. 100 is a back unit showing an embodiment in which all of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 of the corner accessory 1300 are operated to the operation limit position. It is an example of the front view of 176. FIG. 101 shows when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are operated to the operation limit position, and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position in the corner accessory 1300. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows the aspect of. FIG. 102 shows when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position, and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position in the corner accessory 1300. It is an example of the front view of the back unit 176 which shows the aspect of. However, in FIGS. 100 to 102, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the upper front accessory 1000, the lower accessory 1200, the middle panel 1500, and the attacker ball gutter 1600 is omitted.

Although not shown, each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 has one character (for example, Chinese characters, hiragana, katakana, alphabet). ) Is attached.

As shown in FIG. 100, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position, the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3) In the front, the letters attached to each movable body 1330, 1340, 1355, 1357 form one design (for example, a compound word).

Further, as shown in FIG. 101, when the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 operate to the operation limit position, and the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3), one design (for example, a compound word) is formed by the characters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340.

Further, as shown in FIG. 102, when the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position and the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are waiting at the origin position, In front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3), one design (eg, a compound word) is formed by the characters attached to the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357.

In this way, for example, the drive of the motor 1332 (for example, see FIG. 87) and the motor 1354 (for example, see FIG. 96) by the accessory control circuit 207 (both see FIG. 7) of the sub CPU 201 is subjected to the jackpot determination process. By controlling according to the result of the above, all the characters of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are one design (hereinafter referred to as "the first design"). One design (hereinafter referred to as "second design") is formed by forming a part (referred to as) or having a part (two) characters of the upper corner accessory 1320 (first movable body 1330 and second movable body 1340). Or form one design (hereinafter referred to as "third design") with a part (two) characters of the lower corner accessory 1350 (third movable body 1355 and fourth movable body 1357). It becomes possible to do. As a result, it is possible to change the visual impression given to the player by the movable effect by the operation of the accessory with only a limited number of the accessory.

Further, the design formed by two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 is information related to the progress of the game (for example, a big hit). It is also possible to make the player recognize it as execution suggestion information of a specific reach with high expectation. For example, when a specific reach effect that makes a player expect a big hit is executed as a result of a big hit determination by a start winning prize for the first start port 5442 and the second start port 440, the specific case. In front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16, two or more movable bodies (first movable body 1330, second movable body 1340, third movable body 1355, and fourth movable body) are expressed with a compound word indicating (or related to) the reach effect of. It may be represented by a design (for example, a compound word) that can be recognized when any two or more movable bodies of the movable body 1357 are arranged in close proximity to each other.

In the present embodiment, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 move in a direction in which the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 are close to each other from the origin position which is difficult to see from the front view. That is, the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the upper outer side to the lower inner side of the field of view in the front view.

Further, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 move from the origin position, which is difficult to see from the front view, in the direction in which the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are close to each other. That is, the third movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 appear to move so as to be sandwiched from the upper outer side to the lower inner side of the field of view in the front view.

Here, characters are applied to the front surfaces of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, respectively, but the movable bodies 1330, 1340, 1355, respectively. Each single character on each of the 1357s does not make sense, and information about the progress of the game is not shown to the player.

Further, the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are all arranged at positions that are difficult to see at the origin position, and are arranged at positions that are difficult to see at the origin position, and are located at the upper left and front of the front view, respectively. It is located at a location distant from the upper right of the view, the lower left of the front view, and the lower right of the front view. Therefore, two or more of the 1 movable body 1330, the 2nd movable body 1340, the 3rd movable body 1355, and the 4th movable body 1357 are directed from the outside to the inside of the player's view in front view. In the process of the operation, it is difficult for the player to immediately recognize the design (for example, a compound word) formed by the characters attached to the two or more movable bodies, and the liquid crystal display is displayed. It can be recognized only when it is stopped in close proximity in front of the display area of the device 16.

In this way, two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 move from the outside to the inside of the field of view in front view. By doing so, the player's gaze can be moved from the back (the effect image shown in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16) to the front side (the character of the movable body advanced to the front of the liquid crystal display device 16). As a result, conventionally, for example, information related to the progress of the game has been shown to the player by, for example, an effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device, but according to the present embodiment, the information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16. Two or more of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 that advance to the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 without relying on the effect image to be produced. It is possible to show the player information related to the progress of the game only with the movable body. As a result, not only the rhythm of the production can be changed, but also the production that has an impact on the player can be performed, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated to the operation limit position, the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3). In the front, it is preferred, but not limited to, that one design is formed by the letters attached to all the movable bodies 1330, 1340, 1355, 1357, but not necessarily limited to this, attached to two or more partial movable bodies. It does not matter if one design is formed only by letters. For example, among the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, one design is made only by the characters attached to the first movable body 1330 and the third movable body 1355. It corresponds to the case where the second movable body 1340 and the fourth movable body 1357 (characters may not be attached) are formed and exist as mere separate movable bodies without forming a design.

Further, in the present embodiment, one character is attached to each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357, but the present invention is not limited to this. Two or more letters may be attached to all or some of the movable bodies.

Further, in the present embodiment, the characters attached to each of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are not necessarily limited to the characters, but the liquid crystal. In front of the display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3), a design may be formed or a meaningful shape (for example, a device reminiscent of a specific idea) may be formed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are located in front of the liquid crystal display device 16 (see, for example, FIG. 3). , There is a gap between the movable body and other movable bodies, but the present invention is not limited to this, and all or a part of the movable bodies may be combined to form one design.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation of one motor 1332 (see, for example, FIG. 87) causes the first movable body 1330 and the second movable body 1340 to operate in synchronization with each other, and the rotation of one motor 1354 causes the third to operate. The movable body 1355 and the fourth movable body 1357 are configured to operate in synchronization with each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body are not limited to this. Each of the bodies 1357 may be configured to operate independently.

[Composition of side accessory 1400]
The configuration of the side accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 106. FIG. 103 is an example of a front view of the side accessory 1400 in a normal mode (a mode when it is in the origin position). FIG. 104 is an example of a rear view of the side accessory 1400 in a normal embodiment. FIG. 105 is an example of a front view of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 106 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the side accessory 1400 viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view). Although various members such as the link member 1420 are shown in FIG. 104 through the mounting plate 1410 so as to be easily visible, they are actually opaque members.

The side accessory 1400 is for operating the mounting plate 1410 to which various members constituting the side accessory 1400 are attached, the movable decorative body 1450 configured to be operable with respect to the mounting plate 1410, and the movable decorative body 1450. Positions of the side accessory motor 1440 as a drive source, the movable piece 1430 and the L-shaped link member 1420 as a mechanism for transmitting the power of the side accessory motor 1440 to the movable decorative body 1450, and the movable decorative body 1450. It is equipped with a photo sensor 1464 for confirming.

The mounting plate 1410 is a vertically long plate-shaped member that is mounted and fixed to the right side of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above. A link support shaft 1412 that pivotally supports the link member 1420 is formed on the upper portion of the mounting plate 1410 on the front surface side. At the lower part of the mounting plate 1410, a movable decorative body support shaft 1414 that pivotally supports the movable decorative body 1450 is formed.

The movable decorative body 1450 is a single movable body configured to be operable together with a vertically long patterned main body portion 1452 with a decoration on the front surface and the main body portion 1452 and also to be independently operable with respect to the main body portion 1452. It is equipped with 1454. The main body portion 1452 of the movable decorative body 1450 has a movable decorative bearing 1458 that pivotally supports the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 at the lower portion of the main body portion 1452. The movable decorative body 1450 is pivotally supported by the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 in the movable decorative body bearing 1458, and is configured to be rotatable around the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 (movable decorative body bearing 1458) as a rotation center. The movable decorative body 1450 has an origin confirmation movable piece 1456 at the lower end. Further, the movable decorative body 1450 has a movable decorative boss 1455 that projects rearward on the right side of the front view.

The side accessory motor 1440 is mounted and fixed to the mounting plate 1410 via the motor mounting member 1444. Further, the side accessory motor 1440 is a motor with a speed reducer, and the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 is decelerated and power is output from the motor output shaft 1442.

The movable piece 1430 has a gear bearing 1432 connected to the side accessory motor 1440 by pivotally supporting the motor output shaft 1442, and a link member boss 1434 connected to the link member 1420. When the side accessory motor 1440 rotates, the movable piece 1430 rotates about the gear bearing 1432 (motor output shaft 1442) as the center of rotation.

The link member 1420 includes a link bearing 1422 that pivotally supports the link support shaft 1412 of the mounting plate 14, a first link 1421 that is long in the lateral direction, and a second link 1425 that is substantially perpendicular to the first link 1421 and is long in the downward direction. And have. The link member 1420 can rotate about the link support shaft 1412 pivotally supported by the link bearing 1422 as a rotation center. The first link 1421 is formed with a movable piece slot 1424 to which the link member boss 1434 of the movable piece 1430 is slidably connected. The link member boss 1434 is slidable along the slot direction of the movable piece slot 1424 when the link member 1420 rotates about the link bearing 1422 as the center of rotation. The second link 1425 is formed with an elongated hole 1426 for a movable decorative body to which the movable decorative boss 1455 of the movable decorative body 1450 is slidably connected. The movable decorative boss 1455 is slidable along the long hole direction of the long hole 1426 for the movable decorative body when the link member 1420 rotates about the link bearing 1422 as the center of rotation.

The photosensor 1464 is mounted and fixed to the lower part of the mounting plate 1410 via the photosensor mounting member 1460. The photo sensor 1464 detects the position of the movable decorative body 1450. As described above, in the present embodiment, the origin confirmation movable piece 1456 is provided at the lower end of the movable decoration body 1450, and the photo sensor 1464 has the origin confirmation movable piece when the movable decoration body 1450 is in the origin position. The piece 1456 can be detected. That is, the photo sensor 1464 detects whether or not the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position.

[Operation explanation of side accessory 1400]
Next, the operation of the side accessory 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 103, 104 and 107 to 111. FIG. 107 is a front view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 108 is a rear view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 in which the movable decorative body 1450 is moving toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 109 is a front view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 110 is a rear view showing an example of the side accessory 1400 when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. FIG. 111 shows an example of the side accessory 1400 when the side accessory motor 1440 is further rotated in the same direction from the state in which the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16. It is a rear view. Hereinafter, in this specification, the position when the movable decorative body 1450 is most advanced toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 is referred to as a “most advanced position”.

The degree of inclination of the link member 1420 when the movable decorative body 1450 is at the origin position is approximately 1 o'clock (see FIG. 104) when viewed from the rear, and the link member 1420 when the movable decorative body 1450 is at the most advanced position. The degree of inclination is approximately 4:30 in the rear view (see FIG. 110). In the present embodiment, the reduction ratio of the side accessory motor 1440 is such that the motor output shaft 1442 moves from about 1 o'clock to about 4:30 when the side accessory motor 1440 makes one rotation (movable decorative body 1450). Moves from the origin position to the most advanced position), but the reduction ratio is not limited to this.

At the most advanced position shown in FIG. 110, the movable decorative boss 1455 has not moved to the end of the movable decorative body slot 1426. This is because the rotation direction centered on the movable decorative body support shaft 1414 (movable decorative body 1450) and the long direction of the movable decorative body elongated hole 1426 are different from each other. This is because the movement of the movable decorative boss 1455 is restricted by the side surface (longitudinal surface) of the movable decorative boss.

When the movable decorative body 1450 is located at the origin position (the position where the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 1 o'clock in the rear view), the side accessory motor 1440 rotates and the motor output shaft 1442 rotates counterclockwise in the front view. When rotated (counterclockwise in FIGS. 103, 107 and 109, clockwise in FIGS. 104, 108, 110 and 111), the movable piece 1430 is centered on the motor output shaft 1442 (gear bearing 1432). Rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front. When the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise with the gear bearing 1432 as the center of rotation, the link member boss 1434 slides in the movable piece slot 1424, and the link bearing 1422 (with respect to the link member 1420) A force that rotates clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 107, counterclockwise in FIG. 108) with the link support shaft 1412) as the center of rotation acts. Then, when the link member 1420 rotates clockwise with the link bearing 1422 as the center of rotation in front view, a force for pushing the movable decorative body 1450 toward the front of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 16 via the movable decorative boss 1455 is applied. It works. When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 4:30 in the rear view (see FIG. 110) and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 is stopped, the movable decorative body 1450 is stopped at the most advanced position.

From the state where the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 4:30 in the rear view (see FIG. 110), the side accessory motor 1440 further rotates, and the motor output shaft 1442 is counterclockwise in the front view (FIGS. 103 and 107). And when rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 109 and clockwise in FIGS. 104, 108, 110 and 111), the movable piece 1430 is counterclockwise in front view with the motor output shaft 1442 (gear bearing 1432) as the center of rotation. Rotate to. When the movable piece 1430 rotates counterclockwise with the gear bearing 1432 as the center of rotation, the link member boss 1434 slides in the movable piece slot 1424, and the link bearing 1422 (with respect to the link member 1420) A force that rotates clockwise (clockwise in FIG. 107, counterclockwise in FIG. 108) with the link support shaft 1412) as the center of rotation acts. Then, when the link member 1420 rotates clockwise with the link bearing 1422 as the center of rotation in front view, a force for returning the movable decorative body 1450 to the origin position acts on the movable decorative body 1450 via the movable decorative boss 1455. do. When the degree of inclination of the link member 1420 is approximately 1 o'clock (see FIG. 104) in the rear view and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 is stopped, the movable decorative body 1450 is stopped at the origin position.

In this way, the movable decorative body is simply rotated in the same direction (counterclockwise in front view in the present embodiment) without rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in the forward or reverse direction. The 1450 can be reciprocated between the origin position and the most advanced position. When the link member 1420 moves from approximately 1 o'clock in the rear view (see FIG. 104) to approximately 4:30 in the rear view (see FIG. 110), the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position. On the other hand, when the link member 1420 moves from about 4:30 in the rear view to about 1 o'clock in the back view, the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the most advanced position to the origin position. That is, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position can be realized only by moving the link member 1420 from about 1 o'clock in the rear view to about 4:30 in the rear view, but from the most advanced position to the origin. The movement of the movable decorative body 1450 to the position requires that the link member 1420 move from about 4:30 to 1 o'clock in the rear view.

Therefore, not only when the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 (motor output shaft 1442) is constant, but also from the origin position to the most advanced position unless the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440 fluctuates significantly. The movement of the movable decoration body 1450 is performed relatively quickly, and the movement of the movable decoration body 1450 from the most advanced position to the origin position is performed relatively slowly. Here, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position (movable body effect) is a hit determination performed when the game ball wins a prize at the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440. Although performed on the basis of the results, the movement of such movable ornaments 1450 is required to be performed quickly. On the other hand, the movement of the movable decorative body 1450 from the most advanced position to the origin position does not require a quicker movement than the movement from the origin position to the most advanced position. Therefore, the movable decorative body 1450 can be reciprocated between the origin position and the most advanced position simply by rotating the side accessory motor 1440 in one direction (the same direction), but the movable decorative body. The rotation angle of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the 1450 to move from the origin position to the most advanced position, and the rotation of the side accessory motor 1440 required for the movable decorative body 1450 to move from the most advanced position to the origin position. By making it smaller than the angle, the movable decorative body 1450 from the origin position to the most advanced position is compared with the movement from the most advanced position to the origin position without changing the rotation speed of the side accessory motor 1440. It becomes possible to move quickly.

The independent movable body 1454 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position together with the movable decorative body 1450 when the movable decorative body 1450 moves from the origin position to the most advanced position. By making the 1454 operate in accordance with the main body portion 1452, the operation effect of the side accessory 1400 can be made more dynamic. However, instead of or in addition to this, when the movable decorative body 1450 is waiting between the origin position, the most advanced position or the origin position and the re-advanced position, the independent movable body 1454 is attached to the main body portion 1452. It may be activated.

[Structure of the second middle panel 1550]
The configuration of the second middle panel 1550 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114. FIG. 112 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 as viewed from diagonally above the front right. FIG. 113 is an example of an exploded perspective view of the second middle panel 1550 as viewed from diagonally above the rear left (left in front view). FIG. 114 is an example of (A) a front view of the second middle panel 1550, and (B) an example of a sectional view taken along line CC shown in (A).

The second middle panel 1550 includes a panel mounting case 1556 to which various members constituting the second middle panel 1550 are mounted, an LED substrate 1560 in which LEDs 1562 and 1564 are arranged, a light guide lens 1570, a black sheet 1580, and an inner. It comprises a lens 1583, a decorative sheet 1584, a half mirror 1585, a window edge 1586 having the above-mentioned opening window 1552, and a panel cover 1590.

The panel mounting case 1556 is a case-shaped member that is fixedly mounted to the lower right portion of the rear box 1800 of the back unit 176 described above.

The LED substrate 1560 is a plate-shaped member having an annular protrusion 1561 having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552 described above and having a flat region 1563. On the LED substrate 1560, a plurality of (five in this embodiment) LEDs 1562 are arranged in an annular shape inside the annular protrusion 1561 in the radial direction, and a plurality of LEDs 1564 are arranged in the plane region 1563. The LED 1562 is provided so as to emit light toward the outside in the radial direction. The LED 1564 is provided so as to emit light toward the front in a front view.

The light guide lens 1570 is provided so as to accommodate the LED substrate 1560 between the light guide lens 1570 and the panel mounting case 1556. The light guide lens 1570 has a function of dispersing the light emitted forward from the LED 1564 arranged on the LED substrate 1560 and emitting the light in a planar manner. Further, the light guide lens 1570 is formed with a hole having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552.

The black sheet 1580 is attached to the back surface of the panel cover 1590. The front side of the black sheet 1580 is black, and the back side is watermarked with characters or the like. The watermark cannot be visually recognized from the front in the normal state (when the LEDs 1562 and 1564 are not emitting light), but when the predetermined conditions are satisfied and the LEDs 1562 and 1564 emit light, they appear to appear on the panel cover 1590. The black sheet 1580 is formed with holes having a shape corresponding to the opening window 1552.

The half mirror 1585, the decorative sheet 1584, and the inner lens 1583 are stacked in this order from the front and arranged so as to face the opening window 1552. At this time, the inner lens 1583 is arranged so that the LED 1562 fits inside the radial direction (so that it is located outside the radial direction of the LED 1562).

The inner lens 1583 has a flange 15832 (see FIG. 114 (B)) that projects toward the back side in front view along the outer circumference. A part of the light emitted from the LED 1562 toward the outside in the radial direction is absorbed by the inner lens 1583, and the unabsorbed light is transmitted through the inner lens 1583. Further, the inner lens 1583 is divided into five fan-shaped regions 15831,15833,15835,13837,13839 (see FIG. 113). Further, a plurality of notches are formed in each of these five regions 15831,15833,15835,13837,13839 in a direction substantially orthogonal to the radial direction. Further, since the boundaries of each of the five regions 15831,15833,15835,13837,13839 are inclined so that the height decreases from the peripheral edge toward the center of the circle, the light incident on the inner lens 1583 can be obtained. It flows along the notch formed in the inner lens 1583 and gathers toward the center of the inner lens 1583 in the radial direction. When light is incident on the inner lens 1583, the intensity of the light is stronger at the outer peripheral portion than at the center portion in the radial direction, but by collecting the incident light toward the center in the radial direction, the surface of the inner lens 1583 can be gathered. It is possible to make the surface emit light more uniformly.

The decorative sheet 1584 is a light-transmitting sheet on which a picture of a character or the like is drawn on the front surface. The character drawn on the decorative sheet 1584 cannot be visually recognized from the front by the half mirror 1585 under normal conditions (when LED1562 is not emitting light), but when a predetermined condition is satisfied and LED1562 emits light, the area inside the opening window 1552 is displayed. Appears to emerge. As described above, when the LED 1562 emits light, a character appears in the area inside the window frame 1552. Therefore, in this specification, the LED 1562 is also referred to as a character lamp.

The window rim body 1586 is gloss-plated and is configured to reflect light. Further, the opening window 1552 described above is formed on the window edge body 1586, and the outer peripheral portion is decorated so as to maintain the aesthetic appearance.

The panel cover 1590 is a transparent plate-shaped member, and as described above, a black sheet 1580 is attached to the back surface side. Further, the panel cover 1590 is formed with a hole corresponding to the opening window 1552.

The light emitted from the LED 1562 emits light outward in the radial direction. A part of the light is incident on the flange 15832 of the inner lens 1583 (see FIG. 114), a part of the incident light is absorbed in the inner lens 1583, and the other light is transmitted through the inner lens 1583 and has a diameter. It emits light toward the outside of the direction. The light transmitted through the inner lens 1583 and emitted outward in the radial direction is reflected on the radial inner surface 15862 (see FIG. 114) of the outer peripheral edge of the window edge body 1586. The light reflected on the radial inner surface 15862 of the outer peripheral edge of the window edge 1586 changes the traveling direction of the light toward the radial inward direction and is incident on the inner lens 1583. In this way, the light emitted from the LED 1562 is prevented from leaking to the outside as much as possible, and is absorbed by the inner lens 1583 as much as possible. Further, since the light is incident on the inner lens 1583 from the outer peripheral portion of the inner lens 1583 including a part of the above light, the light can be dispersed along the surface of the inner lens 1583 and the surface can be uniformly distributed. It is possible to make it emit light.

Hereinafter, various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 115 to 133.

[Processing when power is turned on]
FIG. 115 shows the power-on processing by the main CPU 101. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, as shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 sets an initial value in the stack pointer (step S11).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection signal is ON (step S12). The power failure detection signal is turned on, for example, when the voltage drops to a predetermined level. When the power failure detection signal is ON, the main CPU 101 determines that it is in the power failure detection state, and repeats the process of S12 until the power failure detection signal is turned OFF. When the power failure detection signal is OFF, the main CPU 101 determines that it is in the power failure detection state, and proceeds to the process of step S13.

In step S13, the main CPU 101 permits access to the RWM (main RAM 103).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sub-control reception reception wait process that waits until the sub-control circuit 200 can receive a signal (step S14).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing for various devices built in the CPU (step S15).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the backup clear signal is ON (step S16). The backup clear signal is a signal for instructing the clearing of the backup contents of the main RAM 103 provided in the main CPU 101 constituting the main control circuit 70 and the RAM (not shown) constituting the payout / emission control circuit 300. .. When the backup clear signal is ON, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S23. When the backup clear signal is OFF, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S17.

In step S17, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection flag is set on. The power failure detection flag is a flag indicating that the power failure process has been executed in response to the occurrence of the power failure. When the power failure detection flag is set on, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S18. When the power failure detection flag is set off, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S23.

In step S18, the main CPU 101 checks the main RAM 103 for work area damage using, for example, a checksum.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the work area is normal (step S19). If the work area is normal, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S20. If the work area is not normal, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S23.

In step S20, the main CPU 101 performs the initial setting of the work area that requires the initial value at the time of restoration of the power failure.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a notification about the high-probability gaming state (probability-changing gaming state) at the time of restoration of the power failure (step S21).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command at the time of power failure recovery (power failure recovery command) to the sub control circuit 200 (step S22). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

In step S23, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the work area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initial setting of a work area that requires an initial value at the time of initializing the RWM (main RAM 103) (step S24).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of transmitting a command (initialization command) at the time of RWM initialization to the sub control circuit 200 (step S25).

[System timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 116 shows a system timer interrupt process by the main CPU 101. The system timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 ms. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 saves the value of each register in the stack area of the main RAM 103 (step S31).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number update process for updating various random number values (step S32).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a switch input detection process for detecting input signals from various switches (step S33). The switch input detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 117.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process for updating the values of various timers (step S34).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a command output process for outputting (transmitting) various commands to the sub control circuit 200 (step S35).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information output process for outputting (transmitting) various game information to the sub control circuit 200 (step S36). The game information is information related to the game processed by the main control circuit 70, the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, etc., and is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, the hall computer, and the like. ..

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restoring the value of each saved register (step S37). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Switch input detection process]
FIG. 117 shows a switch input detection process by the main CPU 101. The switch input detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the system timer interrupt process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 executes a start opening winning detection process (step S41). The starting opening winning detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 118.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a general winning opening passage detection process (step S42). In the general winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the general winning opening 53, 54, 55 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening passage detection process (step S43). In the large winning opening passage detection process, for example, payout information indicating the number of payouts and the like at the time of winning the large winning opening 540 is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a ball passage detector passage detection process (step S44). In the ball passage detector passage detection process, the lottery result (random value value) of the normal symbol game is acquired according to the passage detection of the game ball by the ball passage detector 43. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the system timer interrupt process.

[Starting opening winning detection process]
FIG. 118 shows the start opening winning detection process by the main CPU 101. The start opening winning detection process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the switch input detection process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472 (step S51). When the game ball is detected by the first start port switch 5472, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S52. If the game ball is not detected by the first start port switch 5472, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S59.

In step S52, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting payout information according to the first start opening winning.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of reserved first start opening prizes (the number of reserved first special symbols) is less than four (step S53). If the number of reserved pieces is less than 4, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S54. When the number of reserved pieces is 4, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S59.

In step S54, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the first start opening winnings.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a hit determination random value and a symbol random value, and performs a process of storing these random values in the main RAM 103 (step S55).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the first special stop symbol determination process (step S56). In the first special stop symbol determination process, the hit random number determination table (first start port), the symbol determination table (first start port), and the jackpot type determination table are referred to based on the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value. , Determines the symbol designation command, the hit selection symbol command, etc. related to the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (step S57). In the variation pattern determination process, the variation pattern related to the first special symbol is determined by referring to the game state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designation command, the determination value data, the game state, and the table pattern. The fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces for winning the first start opening (step S58). The command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the first start opening prize is a command indicating that the number of reserved pieces of the first special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S57. Is sent.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441 (step S59). When the game ball is detected by the second start port switch 441, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S60. When the game ball is not detected by the second start opening switch 441, the main CPU 101 ends the start opening winning detection process.

In step S60, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting payout information according to the second start opening winning prize.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of holdings of the second start opening winning (the number of holdings of the second special symbol) is less than four (step S61). If the number of reserved items is less than 4, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S62. When the number of reserved pieces is 4, the main CPU 101 ends the start opening winning detection process.

In step S62, the main CPU 101 performs a process of adding 1 to the reserved number of the second starting opening winnings.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a hit determination random value and a symbol random value, and performs a process of storing these random values in the main RAM 103 (step S63).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a second special stop symbol determination process (step S64). In the second special stop symbol determination process, as in the first special stop symbol determination process, the hit random number determination table (second start port) and the symbol determination table (second) are based on the hit determination random number value and the symbol random number value. With reference to the start port) and the jackpot type determination table, the symbol designation command and the hit selection symbol command related to the second special symbol scheduled to be stopped and displayed are determined.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the fluctuation pattern determination process (step S65). This variation pattern determination process also refers to the game state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the symbol designation command, the determination value data, the game state, and the table pattern, and determines the variation pattern related to the second special symbol. The fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 119.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a command for increasing the number of reserved pieces for winning the second start opening (step S66). The command for increasing the number of reserved pieces of the second start opening prize is a command indicating that the number of reserved pieces of the second special symbol is increased by 1, and is sent to the sub control circuit 200 together with a command indicating a fluctuation pattern determined in the process of step S65. Is sent. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the start opening winning detection process.

[Variation pattern determination process]
FIG. 119 shows the fluctuation pattern determination process by the main CPU 101. The variation pattern determination process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the start opening winning detection process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 refers to the game state transition table and the variation pattern selection table based on the table pattern, the hit determination random value, and the symbol random value, which will be described later, and selects the variation pattern type. (Step S71).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting the first half and the second half fluctuation patterns from the selected fluctuation pattern types based on a predetermined lottery probability (step S72). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern determination process.

Since the variation pattern is stored in association with the variable display time of the identification symbol, the variation pattern determined in the above variation pattern determination process can substantially represent the variation time. It becomes.

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 120 shows the main control main process by the main CPU 101. When the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main CPU 101 performs an initial setting process (step S81), as shown in the figure. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned process such as the power-on process.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initial value random number update process (step S82). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of updating the initial value random number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol control process (step S83). The special symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 121.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol control process (step S84). The normal symbol control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 127.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol display unit control process (step S85). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, depending on the result of the special symbol control process and the result of the normal symbol control process stored in the main RAM 103 in steps S83 and S84. A process of storing a control signal for driving the second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71 in the main RAM 103 is performed. As a result, the main CPU 101 transmits a control signal to the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit 73, second special symbol display unit 74) and the normal symbol display unit 71, and the special symbol display unit (first special symbol display unit). The symbol display unit 73, the second special symbol display unit 74), and the normal symbol display unit 71 perform variable display and stop display of the special symbol and the normal symbol based on the received control signal.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game information data generation process (step S86). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates a game state command related to the game information data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, the payout / launch control circuit 300, and the hall computer, and stores the game state command in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a storage / game state data generation process (step S87). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates storage / game state data to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 based on the value of the probability change flag and the value of the time reduction flag, and stores the storage / game state data in the main RAM 103. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S82.

[Special symbol control processing]
FIG. 121 shows a special symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “08”) written in parentheses on the left side of each process shown in the figure indicate the value of the control state flag. This control state flag is stored in a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 advances the special symbol game by executing the process according to the numerical value of the control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 121, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading the control state flag (step S91). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute each process of steps S92 to S100 described later based on the value of the read control state flag. This control state flag indicates the state of the special symbol game, and enables any process of steps S92 to S100 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S92 to S100. Before reaching this predetermined timing, the processes related to other subroutines are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 116) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage check process (step S92). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the reserved number of variable display of the special symbol when the control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process, and when the reserved number is not “0”. (When there is a reserved ball), the hit determination result, the special symbol determination result, the special symbol variation pattern determination result, etc. obtained in the start opening winning detection process are acquired. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process (step S93) described later, and sets the fluctuation pattern acquired in this process. Set the variable display time of the corresponding special symbol in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol variable display time management process described later is executed after the variable display time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the start opening winning detection process has elapsed. On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is "0" (when there is no reserved ball), the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. This special symbol memory check process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 122.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol variable display time management process (step S93). In this process, in the main CPU 101, the control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process, and when the variable display time of the special symbol has elapsed, the special symbol described later is added to the control state flag. A value (“02”) indicating the symbol display time management process (step S94) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation is set in the waiting time timer. That is, it is set so that the special symbol display time management process described later is executed after the fixed waiting time set in the process of step S93 has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol display time management process (step S94). In this process, in the main CPU 101, the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, and when the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of step S93 has elapsed, the hit determination is made. Determine if the result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". Then, when the result of the hit determination is "big hit" or "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("03") indicating the big hit start interval management process (step S95) described later in the control state flag. , Set the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed, the jackpot start interval management process described later is set to be executed. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not "big hit" or "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("08") indicating the special symbol game end processing (step S100) described later in the control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that the special symbol game end process described later is executed. This special symbol display time management process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a jackpot start interval management process (step S95). In this process, the main CPU 101 has a control state flag having a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process, and is large when the time corresponding to the jackpot start interval set in the process of step S94 has elapsed. In order to open the winning opening 540, the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 is updated based on the data read from the main ROM 102. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flag to a value (“04)” indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening (step S96), which will be described later, and also sets the opening upper limit time of the large winning opening 540 (for example). 30 seconds) is set in the big winning opening opening time timer. That is, by this process, it is set so that the process during opening of the large winning opening, which will be described later, is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process during opening of the large winning opening (step S96). In this process, first, when the control state flag is a value (“04”) indicating the process during opening of the large winning opening, the condition that the large winning opening winning counter is equal to or more than a predetermined number and the opening are performed. It is determined whether or not one of the conditions that the upper limit time has elapsed (the large winning opening opening time timer is "0") is satisfied (the predetermined closing condition is satisfied). When one of the conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the big winning opening 540. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“05”) indicating the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring process (step S97) described later in the control state flag, and sets the large winning mouth residual ball monitoring time in the waiting time timer. do. That is, by this process, after the time for monitoring the residual ball in the large winning opening set in step S97 has elapsed, the residual ball monitoring process in the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. Immediately before the end of the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, a round-to-round display command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a large winning opening residual ball monitoring process (step S97). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“05”) indicating the large winning opening residual ball monitoring process, and when the large winning opening residual ball monitoring time has elapsed, the large winning opening opening count counter It is determined whether or not the condition that the value is equal to or greater than the maximum number of times the large winning opening is opened (the final round) is satisfied. When it is determined that the above conditions are not satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“06”) indicating the large winning opening reopening waiting time management process in the control state flag. Further, the main CPU 101 sets the time corresponding to the interval between rounds in the waiting time timer. That is, by this process, after the time corresponding to the interval between rounds has elapsed, the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, which will be described later, is set to be executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S97 that the above conditions are satisfied, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing in the control state flag, and sets the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval (big hit end interval). Time) is set in the wait time timer. That is, it is set so that the jackpot end interval process described later is executed after the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval set in this process has elapsed.

Next, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening count counter is not equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening count, the main CPU 101 performs a waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening (step S98). In this process, the control state flag of the main CPU 101 is a value (“06”) indicating the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, and when the time corresponding to the interval between rounds elapses, the large winning opening is opened. The memory is updated so that the value of the count counter is incremented by "1". Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the processing during opening of the large winning opening in the control state flag. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the opening upper limit time (for example, 30 seconds) in the large winning opening opening time timer. That is, in this process, the above-mentioned large winning opening opening process (step S96) is set to be executed again. Immediately before the end of the waiting time management process before reopening the large winning opening, a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the large winning opening opening number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value of the large winning opening opening number, the main CPU 101 performs the big hit end interval processing (step S99). In this process, the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval process, and the value indicating the special symbol game end process when the time corresponding to the jackpot end interval has elapsed (“07”). 08 ") is set in the control status flag. That is, by this process, it is set so that the special symbol game end process described later is executed after the process of step S99. When the hit-time selection symbol command described above is any one of "z5", "z6", "z7", "z10", and "z11", the main CPU 101 shifts the gaming state to the probabilistic gaming state. When the hit selection symbol command described is any one of "z0", "z1", "z2", "z3", "z4" and "z9", the gaming state is changed. Controls the non-probability change game state. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit (when the random value for big hit determination is "small hit determination value data"), the main CPU 101 controls to maintain the gaming state.

Next, when the big hit game state or the small hit game state ends, or when the "miss" is won, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol game end process (step S100). In this process, when the control state flag is a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process, the main CPU 101 stores and updates the data indicating the number of pending numbers (start storage information) by “1”. do. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the special symbol storage area in order to perform the next variable display of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process in the control state flag. That is, by this process, after the process of step S100, the above-mentioned special symbol storage check process (step S92) is set to be executed. When the special symbol game end process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol control process.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, various values are sequentially set in the control state flag to advance the special symbol game. Specifically, when the gaming state is neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is "missing", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to "00", "01", and ". Set in the order of "02" and "08". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol storage check process (step S92), special symbol variable display time management process (step S93), special symbol display time management process (step S94), and special symbol game end process (step S100). ) Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order.

Further, when the gaming state is neither the big hit gaming state nor the small hit gaming state and the result of the hit determination is "big hit" or "small hit", the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags to "00" and "01". , "02", "03" in this order. As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned special symbol storage check process (step S92), special symbol variable display time management process (step S93), special symbol display time management process (step S94), and jackpot start interval management process (step S95). ) Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the transition control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", and "06" when the transition control to the big hit game state or the small hit game state is executed. As a result, the main CPU 101 performs the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing (step S96), large winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (step S57), and large winning opening reopening waiting time management processing (step S98) in this order. It is executed at a predetermined timing, and a big hit game or a small hit game is executed.

If the end condition of the big hit game state is satisfied during the big hit game state, the main CPU 101 sets the control state flags in the order of "04", "05", "07", and "08". As a result, the main CPU 101 has the above-mentioned large winning opening opening processing (step S96), large winning opening residual ball monitoring processing (step S97), big hit end interval processing (step S99), and special symbol game end processing (step S100). Is executed at a predetermined timing in this order, and the jackpot game state is ended.

As described above, in the special symbol control process, the process flow is branched according to the status. Further, the normal symbol control process (see FIG. 127 described later) in step S84 during the main control main process shown in FIG. 120 also branches the process flow according to the status, similarly to the special symbol control process.

The processing program of the present embodiment is programmed so that pure return processing from a small module to a parent module can be performed by a call instruction when the processing is branched according to the status. As a result, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the program can be reduced as compared with the case where the jump table is arranged to execute the above processing.

[Special symbol memory check processing]
FIG. 122 shows a special symbol storage check process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol memory check process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, first, the main CPU 101 reads a control state flag from a predetermined storage area in the main RAM 103 by a load process (step S111).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the read control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the special symbol storage check process (step S112). When it is determined that the control state flag is not "00", the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is "00", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S113.

In step S113, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start storage number) of the second start opening winning (variable display of the second special symbol) is "0". When it is determined that the reserved number of the second start opening winnings is not "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S114. When it is determined that the reserved number of the second start opening winnings is "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S119.

In step S114, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the second start storage number corresponding to the reserved number of the second start opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103. It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being variably displayed or pending. In the second special symbol start storage area (0), the data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol during the variable display is stored as the start storage information. Then, in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (reserved ball) of the second special symbol for four times reserved. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each second special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a hit determination random value, a symbol random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. acquired at the time of winning the second start port 440. Is done.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a special symbol storage transfer process based on the second start opening winning (step S115). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the second special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the second special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S116.

In step S116, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“01”) indicating the special symbol variable display time management process in the control state flag. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol effect start command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a big hit / small hit determination process (step S117). In this process, the main CPU 101 is set to the jackpot determination random value that is extracted at the time of winning the start opening and is set earlier in the first special symbol start storage area (0) or the second special symbol start storage area (0). Based on this, the judgment value data is acquired by referring to the hit judgment table (see FIG. 9) corresponding to the type of the winning start opening. Then, the main CPU 101 determines (hit determination) which of the "big hit", "small hit", and "loss" is won based on the acquired determination value data.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the variable display time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer (step S118). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

In step S119, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reserved number (second start storage number) of the first start opening winning (variable display of the first special symbol) is "0". When it is determined that the reserved number of the first start opening winnings is not "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S120. When it is determined that the number of reserved first start opening prizes is "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S122.

In step S120, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of the first start storage number corresponding to the reserved number of the first start opening winnings. In the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not data is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) provided in the main RAM 103, and determines whether or not the data is stored. It is determined whether or not there is a start memory of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during or pending variable display. In the first special symbol start storage area (0), the data (information) of the special symbol game corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol during the variable display is stored as the start storage information. Then, in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), a special symbol game corresponding to the variable display (reserved ball) of the first special symbol for four times reserved. Data (information) is stored as start storage information. The start storage information of each first special symbol start storage area includes, for example, data indicating a hit determination random value, a symbol random value, a determined fluctuation pattern, etc. acquired at the time of winning the first start port 5442. Is done.

Next, the special symbol storage transfer process is performed based on the first start opening winning (step S121). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the data of the first special symbol start storage areas (1) to (4) to the first special symbol start storage areas (0) to (3), respectively. At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a hold subtraction command to the sub control circuit 200. After that, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S116.

In step S122, the main CPU 101 performs a demo display process for displaying the demo screen. In this process, the main CPU 101 transmits a demo display command to the sub control circuit 200. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol storage check process.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 123 shows the special symbol display time management process by the main CPU 101. The special symbol display time management process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process (step S131). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S132.

In step S132, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value (waiting time) of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the waiting time (variable display start waiting time) after the variable display confirmed set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S133.

In step S133, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit". When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S142. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S134.

In step S134, the main CPU 101 further determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "small hit". When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "small hit", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S137. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "small hit", that is, when the special symbol game is "missing", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S135.

In step S135, the main CPU 101 performs a time saving number subtraction process. The time reduction number subtraction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 124.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S136). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S137, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a small hit flag indicating a small hit. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S138.

In step S138, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“03”) indicating the jackpot start interval management process in the control state flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the jackpot start interval time (for example, 5000 ms) corresponding to the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) in the waiting time timer (step S139).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a big hit start command or a small hit start command corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 103 (step S140). As a result, a big hit start command or a small hit start command is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 11), and sets the upper limit of the number of rounds (upper limit of the number of open winning openings) corresponding to the special symbol (type of symbol designation command) in the main RAM 103. Then, the round number display LED pattern flag is set (step S141). The round number display LED pattern flag is a flag indicating whether or not to display the number of remaining rounds in a predetermined pattern. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the special symbol display time management process.

In step S142, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S143.

In step S143, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the time reduction number counter, the time reduction flag, and the probability change flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S138.

[Time reduction number subtraction process]
FIG. 124 shows the time reduction number subtraction process by the main CPU 101. The time reduction number subtraction process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol display time management process described above or the jackpot end interval process described later. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S151). The time reduction counter is a subtraction that counts until the set time reduction (in the present embodiment, determined to be 24, 30, 36, 42, 48, or 100) becomes 0. It is a counter. When the value of the time reduction counter is 0, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S154. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction subtraction process.

In step S152, the main CPU 101 performs a process of subtracting 1 from the value of the time reduction counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 again determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S153). When the value of the time reduction counter is 0, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S154. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction subtraction process.

In step S154, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "0" as a time saving flag. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the time reduction number subtraction process.

[Big hit end interval processing]
FIG. 125 shows the jackpot end interval processing by the main CPU 101. The jackpot end interval process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the special symbol control process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S161). When it is determined that the control state flag is not a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval processing (step S161: NO), the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the control state flag is a value (“07”) indicating the jackpot end interval process, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S162.

In step S162, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer is "0". In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the jackpot end interval time set in the waiting time timer has been exhausted. When it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the waiting time timer is "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S163.

In step S163, the main CPU 101 clears the LED pattern flag indicating the number of times the large winning opening is opened. The large winning opening opening number display LED pattern flag is used as a management flag indicating whether or not to display the number of rounds at the time of a big hit by the LED light emission pattern.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the round number distribution flag (step S164). This round number distribution flag is one of the management flags stored in the main RAM 103, and is used to indicate whether or not the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed a predetermined number of times even during one round. It is a flag of. If the large winning opening 540 is periodically opened and closed even during one round, the round number distribution flag is set to "1". At this time, the main CPU 101 also transmits a special symbol hit end display command to the sub control circuit 200.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a value (“08”) indicating the special symbol game end process in the control state flag (step S165).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special symbol game is a "big hit" (step S166). When it is determined that the special symbol game is a "big hit", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S167. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special symbol game is not a "big hit", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S174.

In step S167, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a jackpot flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 34.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is a probabilistic jackpot (step S168). If it is a probabilistic jackpot, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S169. If it is not a probabilistic jackpot, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S171.

In step S169, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the probability change flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting "1" as the time saving flag (step S171).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting a specified number of time reductions (100 times as an example in this embodiment) in the time reduction counter (step S172).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the variation pattern table setting process (step S173). The variation pattern table setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

In step S174, the main CPU 101 performs a process of clearing the value of the small hit flag.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the above-mentioned time saving number subtraction process (step S175). When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the jackpot end interval process.

[Variation pattern table setting process]
FIG. 126 shows the fluctuation pattern table setting process by the main CPU 101. The variation pattern table setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the power-on time process or the jackpot end interval process described above. As shown in the figure, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power is turned on (step S181). When the power is turned on, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S182. If the power is not turned on, the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S183.

In step S182, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 1 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the probability change flag is "1" (step S183). When the value of the probability change flag is "1", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S184. When the value of the probability change flag is "0", the main CPU 101 moves to the process of step S185.

In step S184, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 2 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

In step S185, the main CPU 101 performs a process of setting the table pattern 3 as a table pattern when referring to the game state transition table. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the variation pattern table setting process.

[Ordinary symbol control processing]
FIG. 127 shows a normal symbol control process by the main CPU 101. The normal symbol control process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the main control main process described above. The numerical values (“00” to “04”) written in parentheses on the left side of each process in the flowchart shown in FIG. 127 indicate the normal symbol control state flag, and the normal symbol control state flag is the main RAM 103. It is stored in a predetermined storage area inside. The main CPU 101 advances the normal symbol game by executing each process corresponding to the numerical value of the normal symbol control state flag.

As shown in FIG. 127, the main CPU 101 performs a process of loading a normal symbol control state flag (step S191). In this process, the main CPU 101 reads out the normal symbol control state flag stored in the main RAM 103. The main CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute various processes of steps S192 to S196 described later based on the value of the read normal symbol control state flag. This normal symbol control state flag indicates the state of the game of the normal symbol game, and enables any process of steps S162 to S166 to be executed. Further, the main CPU 101 executes each process at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time set for each process of steps S162 to S166. Before reaching this predetermined timing, other subroutine processes are executed without executing each process. Of course, the system timer interrupt process (see FIG. 116) described above is also executed at a predetermined cycle.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol memory check process (step S192). In this process, when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process, the main CPU 101 checks the number of pending normal symbols for variable display, and the number of reserved symbols is “0”. If not, processing such as hit determination is performed. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol variable display time monitoring process (step S193) described later in the normal symbol control state flag, and the variable time determined in this process. Is set in the wait time timer. That is, it is set so that the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process described later is executed after the determined normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed by the process of step S192.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol variable display time monitoring process (step S193). In this process, in the main CPU 101, the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“01”) indicating the normal symbol fluctuation time monitoring process, and when the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses, the normal symbol control state flag will be described later. A value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194) is set, and the waiting time after confirmation (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in the waiting time timer. That is, by the process of step S193, it is set so that the normal symbol display time monitoring process described later is executed after the set waiting time after confirmation has elapsed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol display time monitoring process (step S194). In this process, the main CPU 101 is hit when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“02”) indicating the normal symbol display time monitoring process and the waiting time after the confirmation set in the process of step S193 has elapsed. It is determined whether or not the result of the determination is "hit". Then, when the result of the hit determination is "hit", the main CPU 101 performs the normal electric accessory release setting process, and the value indicating the ordinary electric accessory release process (step S195) described later in the normal symbol control state flag (step S195). "03") is set. That is, by this process, it is set so that the ordinary electric accessory opening process described later is executed. On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination is not "hit", the main CPU 101 sets a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end processing (step S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, in this case, it is set so that the normal symbol game end processing described later is executed.

Next, when the result of the hit determination is determined to be "hit" in step S194, the main CPU 101 performs a normal electric accessory opening process (step S195). In this process, the main CPU 101 is said to have received a predetermined number of prizes during the opening of the normal electric accessory 460 when the normal symbol control state flag is a value (“03”) indicating the normal electric accessory release process. It is determined whether or not one of the condition and the condition that the opening upper limit time of the ordinary electric accessory 460 has elapsed (the ordinary electric accessory opening time timer is "0") is satisfied. When one of the above conditions is satisfied, the main CPU 101 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 103 in order to close the blade member 4620 (for example, see FIG. 3) of the ordinary electric accessory 460. Then, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“04”) indicating the normal symbol game end process (step S196) described later in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, this process is set so that the normal symbol game end process described later is executed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a normal symbol game end process (step S196). In this process, the main CPU 101 reduces the data indicating the number of pending variable display of the normal symbol by "1" when the normal symbol control state flag is a value ("04") indicating the normal symbol game end process. To update the memory. Further, the main CPU 101 updates the normal symbol storage area in order to perform the next variable variable display of the normal symbol. Further, the main CPU 101 sets a value (“00”) indicating the normal symbol storage check process in the normal symbol control state flag. That is, after the process of step S196, the above-mentioned normal symbol storage check process (step S192) is set to be executed. When this process is completed, the main CPU 101 ends the normal symbol control process.

[Sub control circuit main processing]
On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 will execute the sub control circuit main process. This sub-control circuit main process will be described with reference to FIG. 128. The main process of this sub control circuit is a process started when the power is turned on.

As shown in FIG. 128, the sub CPU 201 performs initialization processing such as RAM access permission, work area initialization, hardware initialization, device initialization, application initialization, backup restoration initialization, and the like (step S201).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of clearing the counter value of the watchdog timer (step S202). The watchdog timer is set to a reset time (for example, 2000 ms) at the time of starting, and when the service pulse is not written (at the time-out), the power failure process is executed.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the operation means input process (step S203).

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the command analysis process (step S204). The command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. 129.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the effect mode determination process (step S205). The effect mode determination process includes scenario presetting process, effect determination process (confidential A stage 2002), look-ahead effect selection process (high accuracy stage 2004), background change control process (high accuracy stage 2004), and number of possible background changes. Judgment processing (high-accuracy stage 2004), fluctuation scenario determination processing (high-accuracy stage 2004), chance-up control processing (high-accuracy stage 2004), pending change determination processing (high-accuracy stage 2004), character lamp effect control processing, full screen It is composed of subroutines such as effect control process and character lamp effect control process. These processes will be described later with reference to FIGS. 134 to 165.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes a command transmission process (step S206). The command transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 130.

Next, the display control circuit 204 executes the drawing control process (step S207). In this process, the display control circuit 204 performs drawing control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 16 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the voice control circuit 205 executes the voice control process (step S208). In this process, the voice control circuit 205 performs voice control for causing the speaker 24 to output voice based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the lamp control circuit 206 executes the lamp control process (step S209). In this process, the lamp control circuit 206 performs light emission control for turning on or blinking the lamp 25 based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201.

Next, the accessory control circuit 207 executes the accessory control process (step S210). In this process, the accessory control circuit 207 performs drive control for operating the effect drive motor that operates the movable accessory unit based on the message (effect designation information) transmitted from the sub CPU 201. In such a sub-control circuit main process, after the initialization process of step S201 is completed, each process of steps S202 to S210 is repeatedly executed.

[Command analysis processing]
FIG. 129 shows a command analysis process by the sub CPU 201. The command analysis process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of analyzing a command stored in the receive buffer of the work RAM 203 after receiving from the main control circuit 70 (main CPU 101) (step S241).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a consistency check on the received command (step S242). The consistency check is performed to verify that the target data exists when the command is received and that the data has no errors or omissions.

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a sub lottery process (step S243). In this process, when the received command is a variation pattern designation command, the sub CPU 201 selects an effect pattern by lottery based on the variation pattern designation command. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the command analysis process. In the sub-lottery process, all items related to the effect including the effect pattern may be selected by lottery, or only the type of effect (whether or not there is a dialogue notice, whether or not there is a SU notice, etc.) is selected as the effect pattern. The effect content (effect type, cut-in type, etc.) selected by lottery and executed in the effect may be selected as effect information by another process that is separately made into a subroutine. In the present embodiment, an effect pattern indicating the type of effect is selected in the sub-lottery process, and then the effect content to be executed based on the effect pattern is selected as effect information by the effect mode determination process described later. ing.

[Command transmission process]
FIG. 130 shows a command transmission process by the sub CPU 201. The command transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the sub-control circuit main process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 executes a message setting process when transmitting a control command (message) to each of the control circuits 204 to 207 (step S251). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates a message (effect designation information) based on the effect information obtained in the effect mode determination process, and temporarily stores the message in the direct buffer of the work RAM 203. This message setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 131.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the direct table registration process (step S252). In this process, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the corresponding direct table in the predetermined area of the work RAM 203 based on the message stored in the direct buffer and the effect information. This direct table registration process will be described later with reference to FIG. 132.

Next, the sub CPU 201 executes the message transmission process (step S253). In this process, the sub CPU 201 reads the message stored in the direct buffer at a predetermined timing based on the direct table, and performs a process of transmitting the message to the predetermined control circuits 204 to 207. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the command transmission process. This message transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 133.

[Message setting process]
FIG. 131 shows a message setting process by the sub CPU 201. The message setting process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 sets the devices (control circuits 204 to 207) to be transmitted based on the effect information (step S261).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of setting the presence / absence of system operation (step S262).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the stage information and each effect information (step S263).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the notice pattern (step S264). As a result, the direct buffer stores a device (control circuits 204 to 207) as a transmission destination, the presence / absence of system operation, stage information, each effect information, and a message indicating a notice pattern. When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the message setting process.

[Direct table registration process]
FIG. 132 shows the direct table registration process by the sub CPU 201. The directory table registration process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering a single table (step S271).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the master table based on the effect information determined in the effect mode determination process (step S272).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the slave table used in the master table (step S273).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of registering the direct table corresponding to the message set in the direct buffer as a slave table (step S274). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the direct table registration process.

[Message sending process]
FIG. 133 shows a message transmission process by the sub CPU 201. The message transmission process is called as a subroutine during the execution of the command transmission process described above. As shown in the figure, if a message is registered in the direct buffer corresponding to the direct table, the sub CPU 201 sends a message to each device (control circuits 204 to 207) according to the "destination device" set in the message. Is performed (step S281).

Next, the sub CPU 201 performs a process of discarding an unnecessary direct table after the message transmission is completed (step S282). When this process is completed, the sub CPU 201 ends the message transmission process.

[Production mode determination process by sub CPU 201]
Next, the details of the effect mode determination process (step S205) of the sub CPU 201 will be described. The effect mode is formed with features for each of the plurality of effect stages.

[Direction stage]
First, with reference to FIG. 134, state transitions of a plurality of production stages will be described. FIG. 134 is a block diagram showing state transitions of a plurality of gaming state stages as an example.

In the normal stage 2000, the winning probability of the hit determination (hereinafter referred to as "big hit determination") performed as the processing of the main CPU 101 when the game ball wins in the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440 is relatively high. It is a low-probability state with no electric support (that is, a normal gaming state). If the effect state is the normal stage 2000, the player can grasp that the game state is the normal game state (low probability state).

The high-probability stage 2004 is a high-probability gaming state in which the winning probability of the jackpot determination is relatively high, and is a state with electric support. If the production state is the high-probability stage 2004, the player can grasp that the gaming state is the high-probability gaming state.

Both the secret A stage 2002 and the secret B stage 2006 are in a high-probability gaming state in which the winning probability of the big hit judgment is relatively high, and there is an electric support, or the winning probability of the big hit judgment is relatively low. It is a low-probability state and a state with electric support. In the secret A stage 2002 and the secret B stage 2006, the player cannot grasp or grasp whether the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability state even by looking at the display effect performed by the liquid crystal display device 16. Have difficulty. However, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the secret A stage 2002, whether it is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability state is disclosed according to the final result of the battle effect described later. .. Further, since the subtraction effect of the character described later during the battle effect is an intermediate effect toward the final result of the battle effect, it depends on whether it is the subtraction effect of the ally character or the subtraction effect of the enemy character. It can make the player happy and sad.

In the normal stage 2000 (low probability game state, no time reduction), if an 8R big hit (a big hit in which the big winning opening 540 opens and closes for 8 rounds) is drawn, after the big hit game ends, the game state stage is the secret A stage 2002 (high). There is a specified number of electric support in the probability game state, or there is a specified number of electric support in the low probability game state). In addition, "with electric support" is a state in which the time-saving game is executed, and "without electric support" is a state in which the time-saving game is not executed.

In the secret A stage 2002, when the result of the big hit determination is a 5R big hit, or when the predetermined number of time-saving games are digested in the high-probability game state, the production stage shifts to the high-probability stage 2004. On the other hand, in the secret A stage 2002, when the predetermined number of time-saving games are digested in the low-probability game state, the transition to the normal stage 2000 occurs. In the normal stage 2000, if the result of the jackpot determination is a 5R jackpot or a 15R jackpot, the production stage transitions to the high accuracy stage 2004.

In the high-accuracy stage 2004, if the result of the jackpot determination is 8R jackpot, the production stage shifts to the secret A stage 2002. In the secret A stage 2002, if the result of the big hit determination is a 5R big hit, the production stage shifts to the secret B stage 2006. In the secret B stage 2006, if the result of the big hit determination is 8R big hit, the production stage shifts to the secret A stage 2002. In the secret B stage 2006, if the result of the jackpot determination is a 15R jackpot, the production stage shifts to the high accuracy stage 2004. In the high-accuracy stage 2004, if the result of the jackpot determination is a 5R jackpot, the production stage shifts to the secret B stage 2006. In the secret B stage 2006, when the specified number of time reductions are exhausted, the production stage shifts to the normal stage 2000.

The number of jackpot rounds mentioned above is an example. In the above-mentioned explanation, when the result of the big hit determination is 8R big hit, the game state is changed to the secret A stage 2002, but it is not limited to this, and when it is 5R big hit or 15R big hit. , The effect of transitioning to the secret A stage 2002 may be performed, the sub CPU 201 may perform a promotion effect during the jackpot game, and may transition to the high accuracy stage 2004 after the jackpot is completed.

The secret A stage 2002 may have a higher expectation of a high-probability gaming state than the secret B stage 2006, for example. In each of these secret stages, a unique production form is realized. For example, in the secret A stage 2002, a battle production in which a plurality of characters are divided into enemies and allies to win a battle is executed.

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of a battle effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 in the secret A stage 2002. In FIG. 135, the ally character CA1 is displayed on the left side of the screen, and the enemy character CA2 is displayed on the right side of the screen. In addition, the type of ally character currently fighting and the number of ally characters (remaining number of people) are displayed in the upper left part of the screen, and the type of enemy character currently fighting and the number of enemy characters are displayed in the upper part on the right side of the screen. (Remaining number of people) is displayed. Although not shown in FIG. 135, other information such as variable display information of the identification symbol and reserved start storage number information may be appropriately displayed.

The above battle effect is an indicator of whether there is a high probability of being in a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state in the secret A stage 2002, and if certain requirements are met. Whether it is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state is determined. For example, when the enemy group is annihilated, the high-probability gaming state is confirmed, and when the ally group is annihilated, the low-probability gaming state is determined. Therefore, the effect of the process until one of the enemy and ally groups is completely destroyed is an index effect indicating which of the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state is more likely. For example, if a subtraction effect is performed in which the number of enemy groups is reduced, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the player is likely to be in a high-probability gaming state, and a subtraction effect is performed in which the number of ally groups is reduced. It can give the player the impression that it is unlikely to be in a high-probability state (highly likely to be in a low-probability gaming state). In the secret A stage 2002, the rough scenario of such a battle production is decided in advance before the secret A stage 2002 starts, and in the secret A stage 2002, the predetermined scenario is changed, corrected, etc. The production will proceed. Hereinafter, the scenario effect selection process (confidential A stage 2002) will be described.

Further, for example, in the secret B stage 2006, a battle effect is executed in which the main character and the enemy character among the ally characters fight one-on-one. When the result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot, the effect that the main character wins in the battle effect is executed. In the battle production in the secret B stage 2006, for example, a) a production zone where the enemy character can always be defeated if the main character attacks, and b) either the main character or the enemy character makes the first strike. There is a production zone where you do not know, c) a production zone where the enemy character makes a first strike. Further, in the secret B stage 2006, it is notified whether or not the game is in a high-probability gaming state by the operation of the movable decorative body 1040 of the upper front accessory 1000. For example, in the final variable display (the last variable display in the time-saving gaming state (special symbol game) or the final variable display in which it is concealed whether or not the game is in the high-probability gaming state (special symbol game)), the upper front role. If the movable decorative body 1040 of the object 1000 falls (moves) toward the operation limit position, it is in a high-probability gaming state, and if the movable decorative body 1040 does not fall, it is in a low-probability gaming state. However, in the final variable display, a fall precursor effect may be performed in which the movable decorative body 1040 is expected to fall. Further, when the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit, in addition to the fall of the movable decorative body 1040, all of the first movable body 1330, the second movable body 1340, the third movable body 1355, and the fourth movable body 1357 are operated. By operating to the limit position (see, for example, FIG. 100), it is notified that the result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot.

Further, in the secret B stage 2006, the variable display (special symbol game) is changed at any time between the zones of a) to c) described above according to the number of executions of the variable display (special symbol game). For example, after the jackpot game state is completed, the special symbol game is executed 1 to 10 times in the production zone of a) above, and stays in the production zone of b) 11 to 90 times. However, during the 91st to 99th times, the player stays in the production zone of c) above, and in the 100th special symbol game, a production indicating that it is the final game in the secret B stage 2006 is performed. Needless to say, the production on the secret B stage 2006 is not limited to the above.

In this embodiment, the index effect can indicate which of the high-probability gaming state and the low-probability gaming state is more likely in the secret A stage 2002, but the present invention is not limited to this. It can also be used for other productions that show the degree of high degree. For example, the above index effect can be adopted for the following effects, but it goes without saying that the following effects are merely examples and can be adopted for other effects.
-Although it is disclosed that it is a high-probability gaming state, when the duration of the high-probability gaming state is concealed, an effect indicating the length of the duration (expectation that the duration is long). Directing to show the degree).
-Although it is disclosed that it is a time-saving game state, when the duration of the time-saving game state is concealed, a production showing the length of the duration (expectation that the duration is long) Direction to show).
-An effect that indicates the degree of expectation that an effect section is set for one or more start memories and that the start memory included in the effect section includes a reach variation effect or a big hit.

The degree of expectation (reliability) for a predetermined internal state (that is, an advantageous state) such as a big hit or a high-probability gaming state of each advance notice effect is the "big hit" or "high-probability gaming state" when each advance notice effect is executed. The probability of becoming "big hit" or "high probability gaming state" when each advance notice effect is executed, and the probability of becoming "missing" or "low probability gaming state" when each advance notice effect is executed are predetermined. It is a numerical value divided by the sum of the probability of becoming an internal state (that is, a disadvantageous state) of. However, since the "expectation degree" can include the case where the degree of expectation is 100% and the case where the degree of expectation is 0%, there are cases where the above division does not hold strictly (for example, the production is executed). It is not suitable to divide 1 by 0 because it may include the case of deterministically notifying the game state or winning, and in this case, the expectation includes 100%, 0%, or the concept of presence or absence. Will be).

[Scenario production selection process (confidential A stage)]
The sub CPU 201 performs a process of subtracting the defeated character in the battle of the enemy and the ally from the number of participating characters, and erases the defeated character from the screen. The production form related to the secret A stage 2002 will be described more specifically.

The processing for the production form is a step of predetermining the scenario production before the start of the secret A stage 2002 (specifically, during the execution of the big hit game), and a variable pattern when the secret A stage 2002 starts. It consists of steps to change, correct, etc. the scenario according to the effect selected based on. The "scenario" is a development at which point in the progress of the game (number of time reductions) in the secret A stage 2002 the character is subtracted. Since the "scenario" includes the correspondence between the number of time reductions and the character subtraction, it may be paraphrased as a "directing map". When the secret A stage 2002 starts, the sub CPU 201 advances the character subtraction process by executing the determined scenario.

The sub CPU 201 determines the team composition and the scenario in advance due to the nature that the production of the secret A stage 2002 is a team battle. The sub CPU 201 sets the scenario according to the combination of the attributes of the opposing team, the expectation of the high-probability game, and the number of time reductions. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing an example of the scenario presetting process. The sub CPU 201 repeatedly executes this flowchart as a subroutine of the effect mode determination process (step S205) at a predetermined timing. When the sub CPU 201 determines that the result of the jackpot determination process is the 8R jackpot, the sub CPU 201 executes the scenario presetting process of FIG. 136. According to FIG. 134, it can be seen that the transition from the stage other than the secret A stage 2002 to the secret A stage 2002 is triggered by the result of the big hit determination process being an 8R big hit.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 201 executes the scenario presetting process of FIG. 136 when the result of the big hit determination process is 8R big hit, but the result of the big hit determination process is not limited to this. When it is a big hit other than 8R, the scenario preset processing of FIG. 136 may be executed.

The sub CPU 201 draws a parameter suggesting the degree of expectation of a high-probability game in the secret A stage 2002 (step S300). This parameter includes, for example, four stages A to D, where A has the lowest probability of change. B has a medium probability change expectation, and C has a high probability change expectation. D corresponds to the confirmation of a high-probability game. The sub CPU 201 records the determined parameter in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM (not shown in FIG. 7).

Next, the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery for each of the enemies and allies in the order in which the characters appear in the secret A stage 2002, that is, in the order in which they participate in the battle (step S302). The appearance order of the character ROMs selected by lottery is also recorded in the work RAM 203. When the information in the order of appearance is lost from the work RAM due to the power failure, the sub CPU 201 sets a one-to-one battle effect between specific characters. At this time, as the "specific character" that confronts one-on-one, the character that confronts one-on-one finally may be set when the normal effect is executed without the occurrence of power interruption. For example, the mode of the battle production selected by lottery is a battle production between the ally group of "hero character + α" and the enemy group of "hero rival character + β", and finally the hero character and the hero. When the information is lost due to a power failure when the rival character of the hero confronts one-on-one, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the rendition of the confrontation between α and β, and the hero character and the hero's rival. It can be controlled so that the confrontation with the character is set.

Next, the sub CPU 201 draws a combination (2 × 2, 6 × 5, etc.) of the number of ally characters and enemy characters (step S304). Further, the sub CPU 201 selects the above-mentioned effect map 2102 by lottery based on the attributes of the ally team and the enemy team. The attributes of the team may be determined by the probability variation parameter and the combination, or may be determined by the probability variation parameter, the combination, and the number of time reductions. The sub CPU 201 refers to the conversion table based on the attributes, determines the pattern value, and determines the effect map 2102 based on the pattern value.

FIG. 137 shows an example of the correspondence between the battle attribute 2100 and the effect map 2102. The sub CPU 201 determines a pattern value (the pattern value is 4 in the example of FIG. 137) based on the battle attribute 2100, and assigns the effect map 2102 to the battle attribute 2100 using the pattern value as a key. A plurality of pattern values may be assigned to the battle attribute 2100. The sub CPU 201 refers to the table and determines the pattern value corresponding to the battle attribute 2100. The sub CPU 201 increases the pattern value corresponding to the battle attribute 2100 by including the number of time reductions in addition to the expectation parameter and the combination in determining the pattern value, and thus can be assigned to the battle attribute 2100. The 2102 can be diversified.

As shown in FIG. 137, the effect map 2102 is composed of a set of a plurality of small maps 2110, and the small map 2110 has a predetermined number (for example, 6) of time reductions as one unit in the secret A stage 2002, and the range thereof From the number of enemy and ally characters to be subtracted in the variable display (for example, the number of characters in the range of 1 to 3 for each enemy and ally) and the information on which variable display number of the variable display number is to be subtracted. It is composed. "Friend-1" indicates that the ally character is subtracted by "1". "Friend-0" indicates that the ally character is not subtracted. "Enemy-1" indicates that the enemy character is subtracted by "1". "Enemy-0" indicates that the enemy character is not subtracted. The number of small maps 2110 combined with the effect map 2102 varies depending on the specified number of times (time reduction number of times).

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing an example of the effect map 2102 used for the scenario lottery. In the present embodiment, the effect map 2102 is composed of a plurality of parts, for example, two combinations of the first half map and the second half map, and the sub CPU 201 has the same pattern value, for example, by using the pattern value as a key. The first half map and the second half map are selected respectively (step S306, step S308), and these are combined to form the entire effect map 2102. As a result, the sub CPU 201 can form a scenario in which the number of characters according to the combination of the number of players is uniformly subtracted over the entire time-saving gaming state. In this specification, an effect in which the number of characters is subtracted is referred to as a "subtraction effect".

When the sub CPU 201 completes (or selects) the overall effect map, at least one of the small maps 2110 included in the overall effect map is subtracted from the small map 2110. It is determined based on the lottery table whether to perform the subtraction process (subtraction effect) of the ally character or the enemy character (step S310). The sub CPU 201 combines the time reduction number of times for performing this subtraction process and character information with the effect map 2102, and records the effect map 2102 in the work RAM. The sub CPU 201 may switch the lottery table for the small map 2110 according to the contents of the overall effect map. The map is recorded in the work RAM.

The mode in which the probability variation parameter, the number of time reductions, and the number of people combination are combined is as shown in FIG. 138, for example. The range of this aspect is defined as a table for each of the categories in which the degree of expectation for high-probability games in the concealed A stage is low, medium, high, and confirmed. FIG. 138 shows an example in which the first half map and the second half map are applied to this aspect.

When the table does not have a pattern in which the probability variation parameter (step S300) and the combination of the number of people (step S302) are combined in the sub CPU 201, for example, the probability variation parameter is "D" and the combination of the number of people is defined in the definite category. In cases other than the above-mentioned mode (2 × 2, etc.), any one of A to C, which is a probability variation parameter other than D, may be re-lottered and determined. The sub CPU 201 may give priority to the probability variation parameter and change the number combination by re-lottery.

The sub CPU 201 has a specific character A appearing at the end of the ally team and a specific character B appearing at the end of the enemy team. It is possible not to include the subtraction processing information of. For example, if the combination of the number of people is 6x4 (6 allies, 4 enemies), the number can be reduced to 5 allies and 3 enemies. The sub CPU 201 causes characters to appear at the start of the secret A stage 2002 according to the combination of the number of people, but the combination of the number of people and the number of displayed characters may not match. For example, if the enemy team has a number of people including a specific character, the number of ally characters displayed at the time of entering the secret A stage 2002 is one less, assuming that the specific character appears in the final variable display without participating in the battle. However, the specific character can be prevented from being included in the effect map 2102 as the target of the subtraction process.

When the sub CPU 201 finishes the process of selecting the small map 2110 (step S310), the sub CPU 201 determines the BGM in the game of the secret A stage 2002 (step S312). Depending on which BGM is selected, the degree of expectation for the high-probability gaming state in the secret A stage 2002 is suggested. As a result, the scenario preset processing by the sub CPU 201 is completed.

Next, the process for determining the effect in the secret A stage 2002 will be described. In the secret A stage 2002, the subtraction of the enemy and ally characters determined before the start of the secret A stage 2002 (specifically, during the execution of the big hit game) according to the mode of the production determined for each time reduction of the time reduction game. By adjusting and reinforcing the processing scenario, the scenario can be developed in various ways according to the game result in the secret A stage 2002. In the initially determined scenario, the character subtraction process is uniformly executed over the entire time reduction number of times, and the sub CPU 201 is universally executed in the process of determining the production mode in the secret A stage 2002. By adjusting the scenario within the range that does not spoil the story of the subtraction process of the character that is executed without any problems, the player can enjoy the versatility of the scenario development while maintaining the outline of the story decided before the start of the secret A stage 2002. Can be made aware of.

Further, in the secret A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 straddles the display of the reserved information (starting memory information) and the digestion of the plurality of reserved starting storages while preventing the time saving number information from being displayed on the liquid crystal display device. By executing the scenario, the player can pay attention to how a series of scenarios are continuously developed during the period of the secret A stage 2002 without being aware of the pending information and the number of time reductions. can.

In addition, in this specification, a reserved start memory may be simply referred to as a hold. Further, the variable display of the identification symbol for the reserved start memory is referred to as reserved digestion. Further, a maximum of four start memories based on the winning of the first starting port 5442 and the starting memory based on the winning of the second starting port 440 can be held, and each of these four holdings can be held first. It is called hold, second hold, third hold and fourth hold, and hold digestion is performed in this order.

In the secret A stage 2002, in order to develop the scenario production in various ways according to the mode of the production determined for each time reduction, the provisional variation determined for each start memory within the range of the scenario production target (provisional variation ( (Variable display corresponding to one start memory) is converted into one or more blocks, and the effect can be set for each block. It should be noted that this fluctuation is hereinafter referred to as "provisional fluctuation" for convenience in the sense that it is different from the variable display of hold.

FIG. 139 is an example showing the setting of the provisional fluctuation for each hold of the first hold to the fourth hold together with the time sequence, and assuming that four holds are recorded, the sub CPU 201 has a variable display at the time of hold digestion. Set the number of provisional fluctuations according to the time. For example, if the variable display time is 3.5 seconds, the number of temporary fluctuations is 1, if the variable display time is 7.5 seconds, the number of temporary fluctuations is 2, and if the variable display time is 11.5 seconds, the number of temporary fluctuations is 1. : Set to 3. In the present embodiment, the selection ratio between the variable display time of 3.5 seconds, the variable display time of 7.5 seconds, and the variable display time of 11.5 seconds is 1: 1: 1. However, this selection ratio is appropriately changed. You may.

According to FIG. 139, when the variable display time of the first hold is 3.5 seconds, the provisional fluctuation is set to 4.0 seconds, which is the sum of 3.5 seconds and the interval period (0.5 seconds). When the variable display time of the second hold is 7.5 seconds, the first provisional fluctuation is 4.0 seconds, the second provisional fluctuation is 3.5 seconds, and the interval period (0.5 seconds) is totaled. When the variable display time of the third hold is set to 4.0 seconds and the variable display time of the third hold is 11.5 seconds, the provisional fluctuations of the first and second are 4.0 seconds, and the provisional fluctuation of the third is 3.5 seconds. And the interval period (0.5 seconds) are set to 4.0 seconds, and when the variable display time of the 4th hold is 3.5 seconds, the tentative fluctuation is 3.5 seconds and the interval period (0. It is set to 4.0 seconds, which is the sum of 5 seconds). The reason why the interval period is included in the provisional fluctuation is that this period is used for the processing of the production. FIG. 139 shows that the tentative variation number is determined according to the variable display time (variation pattern), but this is an example, and the sub CPU 201 selects an arbitrary tentative variation number for the variation pattern. You can also do it. Further, the sub CPU 201 can set the fluctuation time of one temporary fluctuation to a predetermined value, and can also prevent the fluctuation time of the provisional fluctuation from including the interval period, but in the hold unit (starting storage unit). From the viewpoint of making the player aware that it is not the production of the above, it is preferable to include the interval time in the fluctuation time of the provisional fluctuation.

Next, the process of determining the effect in the secret A stage 2002 will be specifically described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 140. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of an effect determination process (confidential A stage 2002) that is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals as a subroutine of the effect mode determination process (step S205). The sub CPU 201 refers to the effect stage flag and checks whether or not it is the secret A stage 2002 (step S320). Here, if it is not the secret A stage 2002, the effect determination process is terminated, and if it is the secret A stage 2002, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 440 (step S322). When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S322 that there is no game ball entering the second starting port 440, the sub CPU 201 ends the effect determination process, and determines that the game ball has entered the second starting port 440. The number of temporary fluctuations is determined, selected, or set based on the fluctuation pattern as the analysis result of the command of the main control board (step S324). The tentative variation number is uniquely determined by the variation pattern (see, for example, FIG. 141), but is not limited to this, and may be determined to be any tentative variation number as described above. Note that FIG. 141 is an example of a variation pattern table. In this example, this variation pattern table is stored in the program ROM 202 mounted on the sub control circuit 200, and the sub CPU 201 refers to the variation pattern table according to the variable display time in which a command is transmitted from the main CPU 101. The variation pattern is determined, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variation pattern table is stored in the main ROM mounted on the main control circuit 100, and the main CPU determines the variation pattern table and the sub control circuit 200. You may send a command to.

When the temporary variation number is selected, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a scenario effect being executed (step S326). The sub CPU 201 performs a scenario lottery within the range of the number of reservations. The scenario lottery means that the character subtraction process is determined by lottery at which position in the holding number range the holding fluctuation is performed. For example, assuming that there are four reserved start memories, the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery for which hold of the first hold to the fourth hold to perform the character subtraction process. However, in the scenario lottery, in addition to the lottery at which position in the pending number range the character subtraction process is performed, a battle effect between the enemy character and the ally character is performed although the character subtraction process is not performed (battle effect that becomes a draw). It may include a lottery as to which position to perform.

At the time of this lottery, the sub CPU 201 refers to the effect map 2102 and checks whether or not the character subtraction is recorded in the small map 2110 covering the number of time reductions from the first hold to the fourth hold, and the character subtraction is performed. If it is determined that the character subtraction is recorded, the character subtraction process is performed within the range of the reserved number, and if it is determined that the character subtraction is not recorded, the character subtraction process is not performed. The sub CPU 201 determines that there is a scenario effect being executed in step S326 until the variable display of the first hold to the fourth hold, which is the target of the scenario lottery, is completed. When the variable display of the first hold to the fourth hold, which is the target of the scenario effect, is completed, the sub CPU 201 determines in step S326 that there is no scenario effect during scenario execution, and then the first hold to the fourth hold. It is determined whether or not the start memory is reserved in any of the above (step S328).

When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S328 that the start storage is held in any of the first hold to the fourth hold, the sub CPU 201 performs a scenario lottery for the held start memory, but is based on the fluctuation pattern. As one means for adjusting the character subtraction processing position according to the determined effect pattern, it is determined whether or not there is a start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the reserved start memory. (Step S330). When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S330 that there is a start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, the sub CPU 201 determines up to the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded as the scenario lottery target (step S332). For example, even if the start storage is held in all of the first hold to the fourth hold, if the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded is held in the third hold, the sub CPU 201 is set to the first hold. The start memory of the hold to the third hold is determined as the scenario lottery target (step S332), and the start memory held in the fourth hold is not the scenario lottery target. Further, for example, when a plurality of start memories in which the reach variation effect is recorded are held, for example, the second hold and the fourth hold, the hold is released first (variable display is performed first). The start memory up to the hold (start memory of the first hold and the start memory of the second hold) is determined as the scenario lottery target (step S332), and the start memory held in the third hold and the fourth hold is not subject to the scenario lottery. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S330 that there is no start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, the sub CPU 201 determines all of the reserved start memories as the scenario lottery target (step S334). In step S330, when it is determined that there is no start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the reserved start memory, control such as preventing the subtraction effect of the character and the reach variation effect from overlapping is performed. Since it is unnecessary, the control load is smaller than that in the case where it is determined in step S330 that there is a start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the reserved start memory. ,

The sub CPU 201 performs the processing after step S328 as the scenario lottery in the start memory (to enter the second start port 440) which is held in the first hold to the fourth hold when the scenario effect being executed is completed. It is performed for the originally reserved start memory). That is, although the next scenario lottery is not performed when there is a running scenario effect, when the running scenario effect is completed, one or more starts that are held in the first hold to the fourth hold at that time. Since the scenario lottery is performed for the memory, in the secret A stage 2002, as long as the start memory is held in any of the first hold to the fourth hold, the scenario production will be repeatedly executed without interruption. .. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being aware of the production in the starting memory unit and to make the player interested in the scenario production, and it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for a relatively long period of time. Become.

In this example, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the next scenario lottery when there is a scenario effect being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even if there is a scenario effect being executed, the first scenario is produced. As long as at least one start memory is held between the hold and the fourth hold, a scenario lottery may be performed.

The reason why the sub CPU 201 targets the start memory up to the hold including the reach variation effect as the target of the scenario lottery and does not target the start memory of the hold after the reach variation effect by the lottery is that the character is not included in the reach variation effect. This is because even if the subtraction process is performed, the player's interest in the result of the battle between the characters is reduced. In this way, the sub CPU 201 can adjust the subtraction processing position of the character based on the effect of the secret A stage 2002.

In addition, the sub CPU 201 determines in step S322 whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 440, and if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 440, the processing after step S324 is performed. However, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 5442 instead of the second starting port 440, the ball has been suspended based on the entry into the first starting port 5442. A scenario lottery is performed with only one start memory. In this case, a plurality of provisional fluctuations may or may not be set for one start memory reserved based on the entry of the ball into the first start port 5442. Then, if it is determined in the scenario preset processing that the subtraction effect is performed in the variable display of the start memory reserved based on the entry into the first start port 5442, the first start port 5442 is reached. The subtraction effect may be performed in the variable display of the start memory reserved based on the entry of the ball. However, the variable display (or provisional variation set for the one start memory) of one start memory reserved based on the entry into the first start port 5442 and the next of the one start memory. The subtraction effect is not performed over the provisional fluctuation set for the start memory reserved based on the entry into the second start port 440 to be digested. Further, when the start memory is suspended based on the entry into the first start port 5442, the sub CPU 201 performs the scenario lottery only when the result of the big hit determination process is a big hit, and when it is not a big hit, the scenario lottery is performed. It may be controlled so that the identification symbol is only variably displayed at the screen edge of the first special symbol display unit 73 or the liquid crystal display device 16, for example, without selecting the effect.

The sub CPU 201 processes the hold of the scenario lottery range as the effect adjustment target, such as determining the character subtraction processing position for each hold range that is the target of the scenario lottery. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 may check the degree of expectation of the effect in the final hold of the scenario lottery range, for example, the heat of the effect (step S336), and reflect the result in the hold effect belonging to the scenario being executed. good. For example, when the sub CPU 201 determines the heat of the effect for the final hold of the range of the scenario lottery, the look-ahead effect or the continuous advance notice effect according to the heat of the effect may be applied to the hold effect of the scenario lottery target.

After the above processing, the sub CPU 201 performs a process for allocating an effect such as a character subtraction process effect to the provisional variation for the hold effect of the scenario lottery target. Therefore, in order to determine the number of temporary fluctuations required for the character subtraction process, the sub CPU 201 refers to the effect map 2102 and holds the scenario in the start storage (for example, the first hold to the fourth hold) of the lottery target. With respect to the start memory), it is determined whether or not there is a start memory in which the subtraction process is executed (step S338).

When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S338 that there is a start memory in which the subtraction process is executed within the range of the scenario lottery target, the sub CPU 201 divides the characters into enemy and ally and counts the characters to be subtracted (step S340). Next, when the number of subtraction processes combined with the enemy and the ally is 2 or more (step S342: Y), the sub CPU 201 records the order of the subtraction processes of 2 or more characters (step S344). The order between the characters of the enemy and the ally may be determined in the effect map 2102, or may be determined by lottery.

Next, as a result of the determination of the scenario lottery target (step S332, step S334), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a hold that is the scenario lottery target in which the reach variation effect and the subtraction process effect overlap. The determination is made with reference to the effect map 2102 (step S346). Based on this result, the sub CPU 201 can perform effect adjustment processing such as determining the number of temporary fluctuations that can be used for the reach precursor fluctuation, or adjusting the position of the temporary fluctuation in which the subtraction processing is performed.

FIGS. 143 and 144 are diagrams showing an example of start storage held in the first hold to the fourth hold. In FIG. 143, the start storage is held in all of the first hold to the fourth hold, neither the subtraction process nor the reach variation effect is executed in the first hold and the fourth hold, and the subtraction of the enemy character in the second hold. It indicates that the process (process of subtracting 1 from the number of enemy characters) is performed, and that the reach variation effect is performed in the third hold. In FIG. 144, the start memory is held in all of the first hold to the fourth hold, and neither the subtraction process nor the reach effect is executed in the first hold, the second hold, and the fourth hold, and the enemy side in the third hold. It shows that the character subtraction process (the process of subtracting 1 from the number of enemy characters) and the reach variation effect are performed in duplicate. When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S346 that there is a overlap between the reach variation effect and the subtraction process effect, the sub CPU 201 sets the overlap flag of the work RAM area (step S348).

When the sub CPU 201 confirms the set of duplicate flags, if the character to be subtracted is an enemy character, the sub CPU 201 allows the duplicate execution of the reach variation effect and the subtraction process, and for example, reaches the effect of the subtraction process. Perform in a variable production. On the other hand, although the sub CPU 201 has confirmed the set of duplicate flags, if the character to be subtracted is a ally character, it is expected that the ally character will be defeated in the reach variation effect. Since the degree is unnecessarily reduced, the overlap execution of the reach variation effect and the subtraction process is unacceptable, and the effect of the subtraction process is not executed in the reach variation effect. At this time, it does not prevent the subtraction processing effect of the ally character from being executed by the provisional variation immediately before the reach variation effect, but the defeated ally character is revived and the compensation effect such as adding an attack is reached. It may be done by variable production. Alternatively, the sub CPU 201 may allocate the subtraction process of the ally character to the provisional variation that is separated from the reach variation effect by a predetermined number within the holding range of the target of the scenario lottery. When the character to be subtracted is a ally character, instead of not allowing the duplicate execution of the reach variation effect and the subtraction process, the duplicate execution of the reach variation effect and the subtraction process is allowed, but the reach is allowed. If the variation effect and the subtraction process overlap, the subtraction process may be reassigned to another provisional variation.

The sub CPU 201 includes a hold in which the reach change effect and the subtraction process overlap (for example, the third hold in FIG. 144) in order to allocate the reach precursor effect to the provisional variation, and the hold for the previous scenario lottery (for example, the hold (3rd hold in FIG. 144)). For example, the reach precursor effect can be assigned to the provisional fluctuation of FIG. 144 (first hold and second hold) (step S350). This is because the effect of the subtraction process of the enemy character is executed by the reach variation effect. That is, the sub CPU 201 can use [(total number of pending temporary fluctuations subject to scenario lottery)-(number of subtraction processing-1)] as the number of provisional fluctuations that can be applied to the reach precursor effect. When the subtraction process is performed by the ally character, the sub CPU 201 executes step S352, which will be described later, without executing step S350.

When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S346 that the reach variation effect and the subtraction process effect do not overlap, the sub CPU 201 proceeds to step S352 without setting the overlap flag. The sub CPU 201 is a temporary variation number obtained by subtracting the temporary variation number to which the effect of the subtraction process of the character (not limited to the enemy and the ally) is assigned from the total temporary variation number determined for the hold subject to the scenario lottery. (Residual provisional fluctuation) can be used for reach precursor production. Here, the sub CPU 201 determines that the reach precursor effect is performed only when it is determined that the residual tentative variation number is 0 or more, and that the reach precursor effect is not performed when the residual tentative variation number is 0. The control process can be made smooth, and the effect of expecting a reach fluctuation effect can be expected by this reach precursor effect. When the number of residual provisional fluctuations is 1, it may be determined not to perform the reach precursor, or it may be determined whether or not the reach precursor can be executed up to once.

The start memory held within the range of the scenario lottery target does not include the start memory in which the reach fluctuation effect is recorded, and the start memory next to the start memory that is digested last among the scenario lottery targets is In the case of the reach variation effect, the next start memory is not the target of the scenario lottery, but the sub CPU 201 is the reach precursor effect to the provisional variation set for the start memory to be digested last among the scenario lottery targets. May be assigned to perform the reach variation effect in the variable display of the start memory stored in the next hold.

The sub CPU 201 determines the number of executions of the reach precursor effect, and the number of executions of the determined reach precursor effect is provisionally subtracted from the total number of provisional fluctuations determined for the hold subject to the scenario lottery. The variation may be used to produce the subtraction process of the character.

Next, with reference to FIG. 145, the sub CPU 201 selects the effect of the reach precursor depending on whether or not the duplicate flag is set. Specifically, in step S354, the sub CPU 201 checks whether or not there is a set of duplicate flags, and if it determines that there is a set of duplicate flags, the sub CPU 201 determines the reach precursor effect as a specific effect (step S356), and the enemy character. Gives the player a sense of expectation that he will be defeated in the reach fluctuation production. Here, the specific production is a production with a high expectation that can be given to the player. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S354 that there is no duplicate flag set, the reach precursor effect is determined to be an effect in which the expectation that can be given to the player is smaller than the specific effect (step S358). The sub CPU 201 may select the reach precursor effect from a plurality of effects set in the table. When the sub CPU 201 performs the reach precursor effect a plurality of times within the range of the scenario effect target, the sub CPU 201 changes the table so that the same effect does not continue. However, the specific effect may be continuous.

Next, the sub CPU 201 selects the temporary fluctuation number to be used for the reach precursor from the counted temporary fluctuation numbers in step S350 or step S352 (step S360). For example, since the required tentative variation number differs depending on the reach precursor effect content of the sub CPU 201, the tentative variation number may be selected by changing the table. The sub CPU 201 selects the tentative variation used for the reach precursor effect from the tentative variation of the hold of the scenario lottery target, which has a slow digestion order. As a result, the reach precursor effect can be arranged at a position close to the reach variation effect. When "0 fluctuation" is selected, the sub CPU 201 does not assign the reach precursor effect to the provisional variation and does not perform the reach precursor effect. This concept of "0 fluctuation" includes both a 0 provisional fluctuation and a case where the start storage is not held in any of the first hold to the fourth hold. That is, the sub CPU 201 assigns the reach precursor effect to the provisional variation in both the case where 0 temporary variation is selected and the case where the start storage is not reserved in any of the first hold to the fourth hold. No, it will not produce a reach precursor. In addition, if there is no reach fluctuation effect in the start memory of the scenario lottery target, the reach precursor effect becomes the reach precursor effect of Gase. When the start memory is not held in any of the first hold to the fourth hold, the reach precursor effect of Gase is not performed.

By the way, as described above, if the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded is not reserved in any of the first hold to the fourth hold, the sub CPU 201 sets all of the held start memories in the scenario lottery. I try to decide on the target. However, since the secret A stage 2002 is in a time-saving game state, the start memory is often held in all of the first hold to the fourth hold when the target of the scenario lottery is decided. Therefore, if the player understands that the scenario production of this time is intended for four start memories, it is possible that the reach fluctuation production is not included in the range of the scenario production target of this time at that time. It may be difficult for the player to detect the high price and maintain the expectation. Therefore, when deciding the target of the scenario lottery, when there is no start memory in which the reach fluctuation effect is recorded in any of the first hold to the fourth hold, the number of start memories to be the target of the scenario lottery is different each time. For example, by randomly determining by lottery, it becomes difficult to detect that the reach variation effect is not included in the target range of the scenario effect this time. In particular, there is a possibility that it will be extremely unpleasant if the reach precursor effect of Gase is performed even though the player has detected that there is a high possibility that the reach variation effect is not included in the target range of this scenario effect. .. However, by making it difficult to detect that the target range of the scenario production this time does not include the reach fluctuation production, the reach precursor production of Gase will maintain the expectation of the player and perform an effective production. be able to.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the temporary variation number used for the reach precursor effect is larger than 0 (step S362), and determines that the temporary variation number started for the reach precursor effect is larger than 0, the reach precursor effect. The number of tentative fluctuations used for is blocked, and a block pattern to which the reach precursor effect is assigned is selected (step S364). Next, the sub CPU 201 allocates the reach precursor effect to the block to which the reach precursor effect can be assigned among the selected block patterns (step S366). For example, if the number of provisional fluctuations that can be used for the reach precursor is 3, and 2 provisional fluctuations are required for the reach precursor effect, the sub CPU 201 blocks the three provisional fluctuations and (1) 1 block + 1 block. A pattern of +1 block and a pattern of (2) 1 block + 2 blocks are formed. The sub CPU 201 can select the pattern (2) and assign the reach precursor effect to the two blocks. In this way, the mode of blocking the three provisional fluctuations is shown in FIG. 146.

Next, referring to FIG. 147, when the sub CPU 201 determines in step S368 that the effect of the subtraction process is to be performed, it is determined, for example, by random lottery which block of the provisional variation the subtraction process effect is to be performed (step). S370). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines the provisional variation to which the effect of the subtraction process is assigned by lottery or the like from the provisional variation of the hold of the scenario lottery target to which the reach precursor effect is not assigned (step S372). When there is an order of subtraction processing of a plurality of characters (step S342), the provisional variation of the subtraction processing effect is determined so as to follow this order. The following is an explanation using an example.

For example, by determining the scenario lottery target (step S332, step S334), the start memory in which the subtraction process of the ally character is recorded and the start memory in which the subtraction process of the enemy character is recorded within the range of the scenario lottery target. Is held in this order. Then, in step S370, it is assumed that the sub CPU 201 determines the subtraction process of the enemy character to be a medium attack effect for a relatively long time, and the subtraction process of the ally character is determined to be a weak attack effect for a relatively short time. At this time, the sub CPU 201 allocates the medium attack effect to two temporary variations, the weak attack effect to one temporary variation, and these provisional variations are digested before the latter temporary variation. The position of the fluctuation can be determined. As described above, the sub CPU 201 allocates the subtraction effect to, for example, one or a plurality of provisional fluctuations according to the effect content of the subtraction process.

Here, an example of allocating the effect of one subtraction process to the provisional variation will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is an example of a sequence of provisional fluctuations in a state where the first hold to the third hold are subject to the scenario lottery. Since the fluctuation time is 3.5 seconds for the start storage stored in the first hold, the number of provisional fluctuations set is one (# 1). Since the variable display time is 11.5 seconds for the start memory stored in the second hold, the number of provisional fluctuations set is three (# 2 to # 4). As for the start memory stored in the third hold, since the variable display time is the time of "11.5 seconds + reach fluctuation effect", the number of provisional fluctuations set is three (# 5 to # 7). As for the start memory stored in the third hold, since the reach fluctuation effect is performed when the variable display is performed, the target of the scenario lottery is the start memory held in the first hold to the third hold. .. Further, in the example of FIG. 147, the number of subtraction processes in the effect map 2102 determined before the start of the secret A stage 2002 (specifically, during the execution of the jackpot game) is held in the first hold. 1 time (weak attack effect), 0 in the start memory held in the 2nd hold, 2 times in the start memory held in the 3rd hold (medium attack effect, 1 time in the order of weak attack effect, total 2) An example of times) is shown.

In the example shown in FIG. 148, since the start memory held in the first hold to the third hold is the target of the scenario lottery, the sub CPU 201 has a weak attack effect, a medium attack effect, and a weak attack effect in this order. Redetermine the timing to execute the production. In the example shown in FIG. 148, the weak attack effect recorded in the start memory held in the first hold is assigned to the provisional fluctuation # 2, and the medium attack effect recorded in the start memory held in the second hold is assigned. Is assigned to the blocked # 4 provisional fluctuation and # 5 provisional fluctuation, and the weak attack effect recorded in the start memory held in the third hold is assigned to the # 6 provisional fluctuation. In this way, the subtraction effect of the character is applied to the temporary fluctuation set for one start memory and the start memory to be digested next to the one start memory, regardless of the reserved start memory unit. It may straddle the set temporary fluctuation. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game (lottery result). In addition, since it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of times of digestion in a short time. Moreover, in the secret A stage 2002, as an indicator of the degree of expectation of being in a high-probability gaming state, an effect mode to be performed during execution of the provisional fluctuation divided into predetermined units (blocked) is determined. Therefore, the player's consciousness can be directed toward the subtraction effect rather than the remaining number of times of shortening the time, and it is possible to further suppress the deterioration of the interest.

In the example shown in FIG. 148, all three subtraction effects recorded in the start memory held in the first hold to the third hold are executed by any of the provisional fluctuations (# 1 to # 7). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub CPU 201 may control the subtraction effect to be executed last so as to be executed in the reach variation.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines the effect for the provisional variation to which the effect is not assigned (step S374). FIG. 149 is an example of a sequence of provisional fluctuations in a state where the first hold to the fourth hold (see, for example, FIG. 139) are subject to the scenario lottery. Subtraction processing effects are assigned to provisional fluctuations # 2 and # 4, reach precursor effects are assigned to provisional fluctuations # 7, and provisional fluctuations # 1, # 3, # 5, and # 6 to which effects are not assigned, for example. , It is possible to arrange a one-shot effect that gives a weaker impression to the player than the subtraction process effect or the reach precursor effect. Temporary fluctuations The contents of the effects arranged in # 1, # 3, # 5, and # 6, and the provisional changes to which the effects are assigned may be determined by lottery. The one-shot production is placed on the temporary fluctuation side of the younger number than the reach precursor production. By assigning the effect to all the provisional variations in the sequence, the execution position of the subtraction process is determined. The number of provisional fluctuations to be assigned changes depending on the content of the production. The sub CPU 201 generates the effect designation information including the information of the sequence to which the effect is assigned to all the temporary fluctuations.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the reach variation effect exists in the hold of the scenario lottery target (step S376), and determines the reach effect when the reach variation effect exists in the hold of the scenario lottery target (step S378). Then, the production determination process is completed. The sub CPU 201 can select the reach effect by referring to the result of the subtraction process, for example. You can select a reach effect in which the characters remaining in the battle appear.

Further, the sub CPU 201 calculates the combination of the number of allies and the remaining number of allies of the allies with reference to the counter for the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded, and the combination of the number of people and / or the number of times shortened (or the number of times of digestion) are exhausted. Based on the remaining number of time reductions), it is possible to set whether or not the reach effect is executed and the mode of the reach variation effect. For example, when the number of remaining players is less than 2 × 2 and the hold is other than the final rotation of the specified short-time rotation speed, even if the jackpot determination result is a jackpot, a special mode of reach (SP reach) is executed. Instead of doing so, for example, in the battle production, the boss of the enemy group may be defeated to execute the jackpot game state. On the other hand, when the combination of the remaining number of people is 1 × 1 and the hold is the final variable display of the specified time and short number, the sub CPU 201 may execute the effect of the dedicated SP reach.

Further, when the target range of the scenario effect includes the start memory in which the final variable display is performed in the secret A stage 2002 (for example, when the number of time reductions is 48 times, the 48th variable display in the time reduction game state). If the start memory in which is performed is included), if the reach fluctuation effect or the jackpot effect is not performed in the final variable display of the time-saving game state, the character's victory or defeat will be settled in the final variable display. A subtraction effect may be performed. In this case, it is not the impression that the secret A stage 2002 has ended because the time-saving game state has reached the specified number of times (whether or not it is a high-probability game state has been disclosed), but the victory or defeat of the battle production has been settled, so the secret A It is possible to give the player the impression that the stage 2002 has ended.

The sub CPU 201 is a production map determined before the start of the secret A stage 2002 (specifically, during the execution of the jackpot game) by the process of determining the holding range of the target of the scenario lottery (FIG. 140: S332, S334). The number of times that the subtraction process in 2102 is executed can be moved within a range of ± 3 according to the fluctuation pattern of the secret A stage 2002. For example, when it is determined in the calculation map that the subtraction process is to be executed when the time reduction rotation is 8, the subtraction process can move within the range of 5 to 11 time reduction times. More specifically, when the start memory having a time reduction number of 8 is held in the 4th hold, it can be moved within the range of the time reduction number 5 to 8, and the start memory having a time reduction number of 8 is held in the 1st hold. At times, it is possible to move within the range of 8 to 11 time reductions. Therefore, the sub CPU 201 fluidly changes the execution timing of the subtraction process according to the development of the game of the secret A stage 2002, thereby increasing the variation of the production and performing the subtraction process of the character accompanying the battle between the teams of the characters. It can be surely executed.

In the above-described embodiment, if the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a scenario effect being executed in step S326, the sub CPU 201 does not draw a new scenario effect until the scenario effect created by the lottery is completed. Therefore, in order to diversify the scenario effect during execution, the sub CPU 201, for example, pre-reads the hold within the range of the scenario effect being executed, and sets this as the effect executed during the variable display of the hold digestion. May be applied. For example, if the reach variation effect is recorded in the start memory of the scenario effect target being executed, the sub CPU 201 performs a look-ahead lottery for the start memory up to the reach variation effect. If there is no reach variation effect, a suggestion effect suggesting the existence of a specific variation pattern (reach variation effect) is applied to the effect being executed. The sub CPU 201 does not perform the suggestion effect when the hold does not exist.

Further, the sub CPU 201 does not pre-read the start memory held at the time of the start winning and applies it to the look-ahead effect at the time of winning, but may apply this to the effect executed during the fluctuation of the hold digestion. good. For example, when the sub CPU 201 is executing the scenario effect for the first hold to the third hold and the start memory is held in the fourth hold due to the start winning, the sub CPU 201 pre-reads the effect of the fourth hold, for example, the first. 2 The look-ahead effect of the 4th hold can be superimposed on the effect of the 2 hold and / and the 3rd hold.

Further, in the secret A stage 2002, since the hold is not shown on the LCD screen, the look-ahead effect is not performed at the time of the start prize, but the hold look-ahead effect set at the start prize is from the start prize to the display of the effect. Since it does not take much time, the production with few processing branches has to be a simple processing such as changing the reserved color, for example. On the other hand, the sub CPU 201 uses a part or all of the pre-reading effect data (for example, scenario effect data) of the first hold to the third hold to perform the look-ahead effect of the start memory held in the fourth hold. If this is possible, the control load can be reduced, and as a result, the mode of the look-ahead effect of the start memory held in the fourth hold is more diverse than the monotonous one that only changes the hold color. Can be realized as.

Note that FIG. 150 is a flowchart of a modified example when it is determined in step S326 (see FIG. 140) that there is a scenario effect being executed. As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 150, when the sub CPU 201 determines that there is a scenario effect being executed in step S326, it determines whether or not the game ball has won the second starting port 440 (step S400), and the game is played. When it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 440, it is determined whether or not there is a reach variation effect in the starting memory of the scenario target being executed (step S402). When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S402 that there is a start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the target range of the scenario effect being executed, the sub CPU 201 pre-reads the start memory in which the winning is later than the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded. The look-ahead effect is selected as the target of (step S404). When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S402 that there is no start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded in the target range of the scenario effect being executed, it is determined whether or not the look-ahead effect is already being executed (step S406). If the look-ahead effect is already being executed, the already-executed look-ahead effect is continued (step S408), and if the look-ahead effect is not being executed, it is held within the target range of the executed scenario effect. A look-ahead effect is selected for all start-up memories (step S410).

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, unlike the conventional pachinko machine in which the effect is performed for each start memory, the number of executions of the provisional change once or a plurality of times for each reserved start memory. Is determined, so that although it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed in appearance. Moreover, the tentative variation determined for each start memory is blocked into a predetermined unit using a plurality of tentative variations regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the provisional fluctuation blocked in this predetermined unit is determined. Further, as described above, a part of the plurality of provisional fluctuations determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the provisional fluctuation is determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. In this way, since the effect mode is determined regardless of the unit of the start memory, it is possible to determine the effect mode so as to span a plurality of start memory. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the start memory unit, and it is possible to provide a novel game in which it is difficult to make the player aware of the game result for each start memory.

In addition, for a gaming machine that is controlled to a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state or high-probability gaming state) that is advantageous to the player separately from the jackpot gaming state, a jackpot determination is made if the period controlled to the specific gaming state is lengthened. There is no choice but to lower the winning probability in the processing, and there is a risk that the interest will decline. On the other hand, if the period controlled by the specific gaming state is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, the interest may be reduced. In this regard, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since one or a plurality of temporary fluctuations are set for each start memory, it is difficult for the player to grasp such suppression while suppressing the number of time reductions. At the same time, since the winning probability in the jackpot determination can be made appropriate, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling given to the player and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, by setting one or a plurality of temporary fluctuations for each starting memory, the player can grasp the period of the secret A stage 2002, that is, the end timing of the time-saving gaming state. It can be difficult to do. That is, for example, the number of time reductions is predetermined at the time of winning, and in the conventional pachinko machine, even if it is concealed whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is completed is a high-probability gaming state, the winning is not performed. When a certain number of time reductions were digested, it was disclosed whether or not the game was in a high-probability gaming state. However, by making it difficult for the player to grasp the period of the secret A stage 2002 as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it becomes difficult to grasp the number of time reductions that have been digested, and it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation. Become. Moreover, during the secret A stage 2002, the subtraction effect of the character is performed as an index showing the degree of expectation that the game is in a high-probability game state. Rather, it can be directed to the subtraction effect of the character, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to making it difficult to grasp the end timing of the secret A stage 2002 by setting one or a plurality of temporary fluctuations for each start memory, the secret A stage 2002 In the above, the subtraction effect of the character which can be an index as to whether or not the game is in a high probability gaming state is performed. In this subtraction effect scenario, the high-probability gaming state is determined when the enemy group is wiped out, and the low-probability gaming state is determined when the ally group is wiped out in the scenario production including the final round of the time reduction. The outline has been decided before. Therefore, unlike the conventional pachinko gaming machine 1, it is not a production that discloses whether or not it is in a high-probability gaming state when a certain number of time reductions are exhausted, but a high probability when the victory or defeat of the battle production is settled. It is possible to perform an effect such as disclosing whether or not the game is in a gaming state.

Next, the change effect of BGM will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot gaming state ends and then the secret A stage 2002 is entered, the time reduction of the timing (for example, a predetermined number of times (for example, 48 times)) at which the secret A stage 2002 ends is shortened. At the digested timing), the final result of the above-mentioned battle effect is disclosed as to whether it is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability state. When the disclosed result is in the high-probability gaming state, it then shifts to the high-probability stage 2004 (when the disclosed result is in the low-probability gaming state, it then shifts to the normal stage 2000).

The sub CPU 201 performs a BGM change lottery during the jackpot game state in which the probability change flag is turned on and during the secret A stage 2002 when the hidden game state is the high probability game state. That is, when the jackpot with the probability change flag turned on is won, the BGM change lottery is performed twice between the start of the jackpot gaming state and the transition to the high probability stage 2004 via the secret A stage 2002. Become. However, when the BGM change lottery performed in the big hit game state is won, the sub CPU 201 does not perform the BGM change lottery in the subsequent secret A stage 2002.

When the BGM change lottery is won, the sub CPU 201 outputs a high-probability confirmed BGM that is determined to be in a high-probability gaming state from the speaker 24 through the voice control circuit 205. Therefore, the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is not always output when transitioning from the secret A stage 2002 to the high-accuracy stage 2004, and even when transitioning from the secret A stage 2002 to the high-accuracy stage 2004, it was a part. Highly confirmed BGM is not output.

Although the sub CPU 201 controls to output the highly accurate BGM according to the winning of the BGM change lottery, the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 according to the winning of the BGM change lottery. Does not change. Therefore, even if the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is output, the flow of the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 does not change and remains as it is.

When the sub CPU 201 wins the BGM change lottery, it also determines the timing of outputting the high-accuracy confirmed BGM (that is, the timing of changing from the normal BGM to the high-accuracy confirmed BGM). The timing for outputting the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is, for example, during the jackpot game state or during the secret A stage 2002.

As a result of winning the BGM change lottery performed in the big hit game state, when outputting the highly accurate confirmed BGM during the big hit game state, the sub CPU 201 also shifts to the secret A stage 2002 after the big hit game state ends. , Continue to control so that the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is output. However, with respect to the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, the sub CPU 201 controls to display the effect image normally displayed in the secret A stage 2002.

When a high-accuracy confirmed BGM is output during the secret A stage 2002 as a result of winning the BGM change lottery performed in the big hit game state, the sub CPU 201 determines at which timing of the secret A stage 2002 the big hit game state is to be output. Pre-determined during. The output timing of the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is first determined in increments of a fixed number of time reductions, and then a random lottery is performed within the range of the determined number of time reductions. More specifically, for example, when the number of time reductions is 48, 1 to 6 times, 7 to 12 times, 13 to 18 times, 19 to 24 times, 25 to 30 times, 31 to 36 times, 37 to 42 times, 43 times. Predetermine to one of each group of ~ 48 times. Next, it is determined in advance at which timing in the determined group the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is to be output. For example, when the group is determined to be in the group of 13 to 18 times, the sub CPU 201 predetermines the timing of outputting the high-accuracy confirmed BGM within the range of the 13 to 18 times. For example, if it is determined to be 16 times, the sub CPU 201 outputs a highly accurate confirmation BGM in the variable display of the 16th time reduction.

When the start memory is reserved in the secret A stage 2002, the sub CPU 201 sets a temporary variation for each start memory as described above. The sub CPU 201 also determines in which provisional variation the output of the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is output, as in the case of the subtraction effect of the character. For example, when the timing for outputting the high-accuracy confirmed BGM is predetermined at the 16th time reduction, the sub CPU 201 may use all or part of the provisional fluctuation set for the start storage held at the 16th time. Is used to output a highly accurate BGM. At this time, the high-accuracy confirmed BGM has the provisional fluctuation set for one start memory and the start memory to be digested next to the one start memory, as in the medium attack effect as the subtraction effect of the character. It may be executed over the provisional fluctuation set for it. In this way, the high-accuracy confirmed BGM can be executed regardless of the variable display in the start storage unit, and the variable display in the start storage unit can be further prevented from being conscious of the player. ..

[Look-ahead effect selection process (high accuracy stage)]
Next, the look-ahead effect selection process in the high-accuracy stage 2004 will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 154. FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing an example of the look-ahead effect selection process (high accuracy stage 2004).

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the current effect state is the high-accuracy stage 2004 (step S500 in FIG. 151). When it is determined that the current production state is the high-accuracy stage 2004 (YES in step S500), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not there is a start winning (winning to the first starting port 5442 or the second starting port 440). Discrimination (step S502). When it is determined that there is a start winning prize (YES in step S502), the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery for which system of effect is to be performed for the reserved start memory (step S504). The effect includes, for example, a reach effect displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16, a lamp effect, a so-called movable effect of a character, a pseudo lotus effect, a change of a reserved image, and a look-ahead effect described later.

In step S506, it is determined whether or not the effect selected by the lottery in step S504 is a look-ahead effect (step S506 in FIG. 151). The look-ahead effect in the present embodiment is an embodiment in which an effect related to the start memory held during the high-accuracy stage 2004 and the start memory (including a plurality of start memories) won before the start memory is performed. Is. The details of the look-ahead effect will be described later. When it is determined that the look-ahead effect is to be performed (YES in step S506), the look-ahead effect section determination process is performed (step S508). Here, "determined to perform the look-ahead effect" means that the lottery for the look-ahead effect has been won.

Here, the look-ahead effect section determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 152. FIG. 152 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern for determining a section for performing a look-ahead effect. Here, the upper frame of FIG. 152 (A) indicates a holding frame, and the numbers 1 to 4 in the holding frame indicate the first holding to the fourth holding. The lower frame located below the hold frame indicates the effect type frame, and what kind of effect is planned to be performed in each hold is described. In the present embodiment, the fourth hold wins during the high-accuracy stage 2004 (YES in step S502 of FIG. 151), and the hold is determined to perform the look-ahead effect (YES in step S506 of FIG. 151). be. Then, in the first hold, it is decided to perform the sumi effect (FIG. 152 (A)). The sumi effect is, for example, an effect that instantly darkens the entire screen as if the ink was spilled on the screen on the liquid crystal display device 16, or an "opportunity" or "chance" by overlaying the spilled ink. The effect is that characters such as "" are written with a brush.

Since the look-ahead effect section determination process is performed by lottery for all the stored start memories, all of these starts as long as the start memories are held in the first hold to the fourth hold in this embodiment as well. It can be done in memory. However, in the present embodiment, since it has already been decided that the black ink effect is performed in the first hold, in this case, the corresponding section should not be included in the target section determined in the look-ahead effect section determination process. May be. In addition, the target section determined in the look-ahead effect section determination process also for the start memory held next to the start memory for which the sumi effect is determined (corresponding to the second hold in FIG. 152 (B)). Not included in. This is stored as the first hold because the sumi effect performed by the variable display of the start memory stored as the first hold may be expected by the player by the effect alone. It is preferable to clearly separate the black ink effect performed by the variable display of the start memory and the look-ahead effect related to the start memory of the 4th hold (the look-ahead effect performed by the 3rd hold and the 4th hold). Because. That is, the ink effect is performed in the first hold, and the effect is not particularly performed in the second hold, so that the look-ahead effect related to the fourth hold (the effect performed in the third hold and the fourth hold) is performed. It can have the effect of increasing expectations and fun.

It should be noted that, assuming that the look-ahead effect related to the fourth hold including the sumi effect performed in the first hold is performed, that is, the look-ahead effect is performed in the section from the first hold to the fourth hold, there are a plurality of pre-reading effects for the player. While you can have a sense of anticipation by performing the productions of There is a demerit that it is difficult to determine whether it is damaged, and on the contrary, it may result in less fun as a look-ahead effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152 (C), when it is determined that the section in which the look-ahead effect is performed is the third hold and the fourth hold (step S508 in FIG. 151), the effect scenario to be performed in these holds is set. (Step S510 in FIG. 152). As for the production scenario, a large lottery is performed for each hold, and the production scenario is set only for the hold that wins the lottery. In the present embodiment, for example, when the third hold is won by a large lottery (see the third hold in FIG. 152 (D)), the production scenario is set for the third hold, and the fourth hold is the first. 3 The production will be performed based on the scenario decided by the hold.

The effect scenario includes an effect that affects the development of the hold (corresponding to the fourth hold in the present embodiment) by the development of the look-ahead, and an effect that does not affect the development of the hold by the development of the look-ahead. The fact that the development of the look-ahead affects the development of the hold means that the same effect as the look-ahead effect is also performed in the hold, and for example, the above-mentioned ink effect is equivalent. An effect that does not affect the development by the look-ahead development corresponds to an effect that is performed only on hold, such as a movable effect of a character. For the effect of pre-reading development that affects the development, a scenario lottery is performed for the hold before the hold (corresponding to the third hold in the present embodiment). On the other hand, for the effect that does not affect the development by the pre-reading development, the scenario lottery is performed including the holding (corresponding to the fourth holding in the present embodiment).

When the effect scenario is set for the hold won in the large category lottery (step S510 in FIG. 151), the details of the look-ahead effect are selected (step S512). An example of selecting the details of the look-ahead effect will be described with reference to FIG. 153. FIG. 153 is a diagram showing an example of selecting the details of the look-ahead effect. FIG. 153 (A) is determined to perform a look-ahead effect by winning a start prize in the fourth hold in the high accuracy stage 2004 (YES in step S500 and YES in S502 in FIG. 151) (YES in step S506 in FIG. 151). , An example of the state in which the look-ahead effect section and the effect scenario are determined is shown.

To elaborate on the determination of the look-ahead effect section and the effect scenario, since the section in which the look-ahead effect is performed is drawn for all the stored start memories, the section in which the look-ahead effect is performed is first reserved in the present embodiment. It has been determined to be the fourth hold (step S508 in FIG. 151). There are at least two types of look-ahead effects, the first is a production that affects the development of the hold (corresponding to the fourth hold in this embodiment) by the development of the look-ahead, and the second is the look-ahead. There is a production that does not affect the development depending on the development. As an effect that affects the development of the hold by the development of the look-ahead, a lottery is performed for the hold other than the hold (first hold to third hold). Here, the hold is drawn as a variable effect. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the sumi effect is performed in the second hold and the third hold. For the effects that do not affect the development due to the pre-reading development, lottery is performed for the first hold to the fourth hold including the hold. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the accessory is moved from the first hold to the fourth hold.

In this case, when the start memory held in the first hold to the fourth hold is exhausted, the ink effect is performed while the accessory is continuously moving, and the ink effect is completed, but the accessory is finished. The player will encounter a situation where the player can move. Then, it is difficult for the player to judge whether these series of productions were individual productions or related productions. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 153 (B), if it is determined that the ink effect such as the third hold is not performed in the hold (corresponding to the fourth hold in the present embodiment), the fourth hold is performed. In, the effect that does not affect the development (in the present embodiment, the accessory is movable) is canceled (rewritten to "none") by the development of the look-ahead.

<Countdown production>
It is determined whether or not the details of the look-ahead effect selected in step S512 of FIG. 151 are countdown effects (step S514). The countdown effect in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154. FIG. 154 is a diagram showing an example when the details of the look-ahead effect are the countdown effect. FIG. 154 (A) wins the fourth hold during the high accuracy stage 2004 (YES in step S500 and YES in step S502 in FIG. 151), and it is determined that the look-ahead effect is performed (YES in step S506 in FIG. 151). ), An example of the state in which the look-ahead effect section and the effect scenario are determined is shown.

To elaborate on the determination of the look-ahead effect section and the effect scenario, since the section in which the look-ahead effect is performed is drawn for all the stored start memories, the section in which the look-ahead effect is performed is first reserved in the present embodiment. It has been determined to be the fourth hold (step S508 in FIG. 151). There are at least two types of look-ahead production scenarios, the first is a production that affects the development of the relevant (corresponding to the fourth hold in this embodiment) by the development of the look-ahead, and the second is the pre-reading. There is a production that does not affect the development depending on the development. It has been decided that a countdown effect will be performed in the first hold to the third hold as an effect that affects the development of the hold due to the development of the look-ahead. Here, the hold is drawn as a variable effect. For the effects that do not affect the development due to the pre-reading development, a lottery will be drawn for (first hold to fourth hold) including the hold. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the accessory is moved from the first hold to the fourth hold.

In this case, when the 1st hold to the 4th hold are exhausted, the countdown effect is performed while the accessory is continuously moving, and the countdown effect is not performed in the 4th hold, but the accessory is The player will encounter the situation of being movable. When it is set that the big hit is confirmed (winning in the main CPU 101) when the countdown becomes 0 (zero), the pattern in which the countdown does not become 0 is the loss confirmation. In the case of the 4th hold, when the character is movable), it is not only difficult for the player to judge whether these series of productions were individual productions or related productions, but also other productions. There is a possibility that (movable characters in this embodiment) will be perceived as meaningless to the player.

Therefore, when it is determined that the effect selected in step S514 of FIG. 151 is a countdown effect (YES in step S514), it is determined whether or not the result of the selected countdown effect is a false effect (step S516). .. When it is determined that the result of the selected countdown effect is disappointing (YES in step S516), it is determined whether or not another effect scenario has been determined until the hold (step S518). When it is determined that the other effect scenario has been determined up to the hold (YES in step S518), the other effect scenario in the hold is canceled (step S520).

That is, as shown in FIG. 154 (B), when it is determined that the countdown effect performed over the first hold to the third hold is not performed in the change (corresponding to the fourth hold in the present embodiment). In the fourth hold, the effect (movable of the accessory in the present embodiment) that does not affect the development by the pre-reading development is canceled (rewritten to "none").

<Background change control processing>
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a look-ahead effect of the reserved start memory is performed with a change in the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 during the game in the normal stage 2000. The look-ahead effect of the reserved start memory accompanied by the background change is the background change as an effect for the start memory (the hold) held by the start prize (winning to the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440). When it is decided by lottery to perform, the effect is based on the background change scenario of the hold, straddling the start memory held before the hold, and the background change of the hold is made continuous. Is. Variations of the look-ahead effect include not only an image notice, but also a lamp notice, a character notice, and the like. The background change control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158.

FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of the background change control process. FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of the background change continuous possible number of times determination process. FIG. 157 is an example of a table relating to background change control and background change scenario. FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a specific example for explaining the flow of the background change control process according to the present embodiment.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the start memory (the hold) held by the start prize (winning to the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440) has won the background change lottery (FIG. FIG. Step S530 of 155). When it is determined that the hold has won the background change lottery (YES in step S530), the background change continuous possible number of times determination process is based on the start memory held before the hold before the background change of the hold. It is determined how many fluctuations the effect can be performed (step S532). The background change continuous possible number of times determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

When the sub CPU 201 determines the number of times the background can be continuously changed in the background change continuous possible number of times determination process, the sub CPU 201 performs a background change scenario lottery for the hold (step S534). The background change scenario lottery is selected from the background change scenario table of FIG. 157 (A). When a predetermined background change scenario is selected from the background change scenario table of FIG. 157 (A) (step S534 of FIG. 155), the sub CPU 201 is set to the effect information set in each start memory related to the background change scenario, for example. , Information related to fluctuation effects such as "normal loss" and "reach loss" is rewritten into a background transition table based on a background change scenario (step S536 in FIG. 155). An example of a background change scenario will be described later.

The background change continuous possible number of times determination process in the background change control process of FIG. 155 will be described with reference to FIG. 156. When the sub CPU 201 determines in step S530 in the background change control process that the start memory (the hold) held by the start winning prize has won the background change lottery (YES in step S530 of FIG. 155), the background change of FIG. 156. In the continuous possible number of times determination process, the number of times that can be continuously produced before the background change of the hold is determined (step S540 in FIG. 6). The number of consecutive possible times is the number of start memories of the section that goes back from the hold (the hold) that is the target of the background change and is not normally won in the background change lottery due to the deviation change.

A case where the winning start memory (the hold) is 4 (the fourth hold) will be described with reference to FIG. 158. In FIG. 158 (A), when the hold is won, the start memory is held from the first hold to the third hold, and the effect content of "normal loss" is set for each of the first hold to the third hold. It is in a state of being done. That is, the number of reserved items is "4". In the background change continuous possible number of times determination process of FIG. 156, the sub CPU 201 is capable of continuously producing the background change of the hold for three start memories excluding the start memory of the hold. Is determined.

When the reserved number is decremented (subtracted) in step S542 of FIG. 156, the sub CPU 201 becomes 4-1 = 3. That is, it is determined whether or not the third hold can be continuously performed among the first hold to the third hold. In step S544, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the number of reserved items is 0 (step S544 in FIG. 156). As described above, since the number of holds 3 is not zero (YES in step S544), the sub CPU 201 then determines whether or not the third hold clears the continuous possibility condition (step S546). The continuous possibility condition is a condition described in the continuous possible condition table of FIG. 157 (B).

The continuous possibility condition of FIG. 7 (B) is "2" in the background change scenario of FIG. 7 (A), in which the referenced hold (starting memory) is "1" and the variation display of the identification symbol is normal variation. (None) or "normal system", "3" The hold change lottery has not been won, that is, the hold display displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed in a mode different from the default display mode by the hold change lottery. It is not that the "4" look-ahead effect lottery has been won, that is, it is not the target of another look-ahead effect. The sub CPU 201 determines that continuity is possible only when all of the above conditions "1" to "4" are satisfied.

Here, since the third hold in FIG. 158 (A) is a "normal loss", all of the continuously possible conditions (1) to (4) are satisfied. Therefore, the third hold is a start hold that allows a look-ahead effect. Then, the number of continuous possible times is incremented (added) in step S548 of FIG. 156 (step S548 of FIG. 156). That is, the number of continuous possible times is 0 + 1 = 1. The process of incrementing the number of continuous possibilities is repeated until the number of pending items becomes zero or the continuous possible condition cannot be cleared.

In the present embodiment, when the number of holdings is decremented, 3-1 = 2 (step S542 in FIG. 156), and it is determined whether or not the second holding can be continued. Since the number of holds 2 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is then determined whether or not the second hold clears the continuous possibility condition (step S546). Since the second hold in FIG. 158 (A) is a "normal loss", all of the continuously possible conditions (1) to (4) are satisfied. That is, since the second hold can also be pre-reading effect, the number of continuously possible times is incremented in step S548 of FIG. 156 (step S548 of FIG. 156), so that the number of continuously possible times is 1 + 1 = 2.

Further, when the number of reserved pieces is decremented, 2-1 = 1 (step S542 in FIG. 156), and it is determined whether or not the first hold can be continued. Since the hold quantity 1 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is then determined whether or not the first hold clears the continuous possibility condition (step S546). Since the first hold in FIG. 158 (A) is a "normal loss", all of the continuously possible conditions (1) to (4) are satisfied. That is, since the first hold can also be pre-reading effect, the number of continuously possible times is incremented in step S548 of FIG. 156 (step S548 of FIG. 156), so that the number of continuously possible times is 2 + 1 = 3. Next, when the reserved number is decremented, 1-1 = 0 (step S544 in FIG. 156) and the reserved number = 0 (NO in step S544). Therefore, in the background change continuous possible number determination process, the continuous possible number is 3. It is determined that there is.

When it is determined in the background change continuous possible number of times determination process that the continuous possible number of times is 3 (step S532 in FIG. 155), the background change scenario is drawn based on the background change scenario table in FIG. 157 (A). Since the number of continuously possible times indicates the number of times that can be read ahead, in the present embodiment, the number of times that can be read ahead is 3 in FIG. 157 (A). 3, No. 7-No. 9, No. 13-No. 15, No. 19-No. It is selected from 21.

For example, the background change scenario No. When 3 is selected, the background change scenario type is "normal", and the background change scenarios before 3 fluctuations, 2 fluctuations, and 1 fluctuation are all "normal". Further, for example, the background change scenario No. When 20 is selected, the background change scenario type is "normal", and the background change scenarios before 3 fluctuations, 2 fluctuations, and 1 fluctuation are "normal", "evening", and "evening" in that order. It has become. It is expected that the background will change from the normal system to the evening background by the time of the change of the hold (fourth hold), and some kind of story production will be continuously performed.

In addition, for example, the background change scenario No. When 9 is selected, the background change scenario type is "Japanese style", and the background change scenarios before 3 fluctuations, 2 fluctuations, and 1 fluctuation are all "Japanese style mansions". This can be used as an effect with a feeling of expectation rather than "normal" in the background change scenario type. Further, for example, the background change scenario No. 13-No. When 15 is selected, the background change scenario type is "attack", and it can be used as an effect with a higher expectation than the above-mentioned "Japanese style" state. In particular, regarding the background change scenario type "invasion", since the effect of "enemy invasion" is made in the background change scenario, it may indicate the subsequent transition to some special mode (zone).

An example of FIG. 158 (B) will be described. In FIG. 158 (B), when the hold is won, the start memory is held from the first hold to the third hold, and the effect content of "normal loss" is set for each of the second hold to the third hold. However, it can be seen that the "background change", that is, the background change scenario is set in the first hold. In this case, the number of holds is "4", and in the background change continuous possible number of times determination process of FIG. Is possible or not.

In step S542 of FIG. 156, when the number of holds is decremented, 4-1 = 3, and it is determined whether or not the third hold can be continuously performed. As described above, since the number of holds 3 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is determined whether or not the third hold clears the continuous possibility condition (step S546). Since the third hold in FIG. 158 (B) is a "normal loss", all of the continuously possible conditions (1) to (4) are satisfied. Therefore, since the third hold can be read ahead, the number of consecutive possible times is incremented in step S548 of FIG. 156 (step S548 of FIG. 156). That is, the number of continuous possible times is 0 + 1 = 1. Since the same applies to the second hold, the number of consecutive possible times is 1 + 1 = 2.

Then, when the number of holds is decremented in step S542 of FIG. 156, 2-1 = 1, and it is determined whether or not the first hold can be continuously performed. As described above, since the number of holds 1 is not zero (YES in step S544), it is determined whether or not the first hold clears the continuous possibility condition (step S546). Since the first hold of FIG. 158 (B) is "background change", "(none) in the background change scenario of FIG. 7 (A) of (2) among the continuous possible conditions (1) to (4). ) Or a normal system "does not meet the condition.

Then, since it is determined that the continuous possibility condition is not cleared in step S546 of FIG. 156 (NO in step S546 of FIG. 156), it is determined that the continuous possible number of times is 2 in the background change continuous possible number of times determination process. Will be done.

<Variation scenario determination process>
The fluctuation scenario determination process performed at the start of the fluctuation of the reserved start memory (for example, the first hold to the fourth hold) will be described with reference to FIG. 159. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the start memory held by the start prize (winning to the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440) is a background performance change effect related to the start memory held after the hold. Or, by the look-ahead effect, it can be rewritten with the effect information different from the one at the beginning of the prize. Therefore, a predetermined effect is selected according to the conditions given at the start of the fluctuation.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation scenario determination process. In the fluctuation scenario determination process, it is determined whether or not the start winning or the reserved start memory is at the start of the change when the change is digested by the change (step S550 in FIG. 159). When it is determined that the fluctuation has started (YES in step S550), it is determined whether or not the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a normal system (step S552). The normal system is different from the production that affects the player in some way, such as the invasion and the assault described later.

When it is determined that the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is a normal system (YES in step S552), it is determined whether or not the background is an exception target among the normal systems (step S554). The exception target is, for example, "1" among the effects determined by the background change scenario lottery in the above-mentioned background change control process, when it is determined that the effect is to enter the Japanese-style mansion, "2". If it is determined that the change is a production that rushes into the enemy invasion effect, "3" The change may correspond to the final next change in the evening background.

When it is determined that the exception target is determined (YES in step S554), the effect according to the exception condition is executed in the normal background exception handling (step S556). For example, if it is determined that "1" is a production that rushes into a Japanese-style mansion due to the fluctuation, a scenario lottery for a Japanese-style background is executed, and "2" is a production that rushes into an enemy invasion production with the fluctuation. If it is decided, in the normal background scenario lottery, the effect related to the enemy invasion is set, and "3" If the change corresponds to the final next change in the evening background, nothing is done. Be done. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not an exception target (NO in step S554), a normal background scenario lottery is performed (step S558).

When it is determined that the background displayed on the liquid crystal display device 16 is not a normal system (NO in step S552), it is determined whether or not the background is in the evening (step S560). If it is determined that the background is evening (YES in step S560), an evening background scenario lottery is performed (step S562). On the other hand, when it is determined that the background is not evening (NO in step S560), it is determined whether or not the background is Japanese style (step S564). If it is determined that the background is Japanese (YES in step S564), a Japanese-style background scenario lottery is performed (step S566).

On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is not Japanese (NO in step S564), it is determined whether or not the background is invading (step S568). When it is determined that the background is an invasion (YES in step S568), a scenario lottery for the invasion background is performed (step S570). On the other hand, if it is determined that the background is not an invasion (NO in step S570), a scenario lottery for the assault background is performed (step S572). Expectations in the production performed as a result of these scenario lottery are higher in the order of normal background time, evening background time, normal background time exception, Japanese style, invasion, and assault.

<Chance up control process>
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, regardless of whether the normal stage 2000 or the high-accuracy stage 2004 is used, the chance of generating a production related to the first production is increased as a variable production that develops into super reach. Control processing is possible. The chance-up control process will be described with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing an example of the chance-up control process.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect displayed during the current change is the effect during change (step S580 in FIG. 160). When it is determined that the effect displayed during the current change is the effect being changed (YES in step S580), it is determined whether or not to execute the chance up (step S582). When it is determined that the chance up is executed (YES in step S582), it is determined whether or not the chance up has already been performed in the fluctuation. That is, it is determined whether or not the chance-up flag is 1 (step S584).

When it is determined in step S584 that the chance-up flag is not 1 (YES in step S584), the chance-up introduction effect is set (step S586). This means that the chance-up flag is not 1, which means that the chance-up effect has not yet been performed in the fluctuation. Therefore, select a normal production that can be an introduction to the chance-up production. When the chance-up introduction effect is set in step S586 (step S586), the chance-up flag is set to 1 (step S588).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S584 that the chance-up flag is 1 (NO in step S584), a chance-up effect related to the previously executed effect is set (step S600). For example, if the effect executed last time, that is, the effect executed based on the chance-up introduction effect is a conversation effect in which the character instep appears, the character instep appears again as a chance-up effect, and the previous conversation. There is a production that makes the conversation develop while being related to the character, and a production that develops into a super reach with the appearance of character B related to the character instep. In this way, by controlling the effect to be generated later to be related to or developed from the effect to be generated first, it is possible to raise the expectation for the super reach effect.

When the chance-up flag is set to 1 in step S588 (step S588) or the chance-up effect related to the previously executed effect is set in step S600 (step S600), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation ends (step S590). .. When it is determined that the fluctuation has ended (YES in step S590), the character lamp flag is set to 0 (step S592). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the end of fluctuation (NO in step S590), the chance-up control process ends.

<Pending change determination process>
In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when the starting memory is held by the starting winning prize (winning to the first starting opening 5442 or the second starting opening 440), the player can visually recognize that the holding has been made. Display (or notify) in a mode. As a display mode, for example, a part of the liquid crystal display device 16 displays the number thereof. Further, the display (design) of the reserved start memory can be changed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Hold change is to change the hold image. The pending change determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 161. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing an example of the pending change determination process.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the winning is on hold (step S610 in FIG. 161). Whether or not there is a hold prize is not whether or not there is a start prize (a prize for the first start port 5442 or the second start port 440), but as described above, the start memory is held and the hold is made. It indicates that the state can be displayed in a manner that can be visually recognized by a person. If it is determined that the prize is on hold (YES in step S610), a hold change scenario lottery is performed (step S612).

In the hold change scenario lottery in step S612, a scenario related to the hold change is drawn. What is the scenario related to the hold change? Specifically, how many times will the confrontation be held under the condition that the display of the hold is changed only when the instep wins due to the confrontation between the instep power and the second power (number of battles n). Decide), decide whether to make a pending change, etc. Examples of the confrontation mode include a ninjutsu confrontation. In this embodiment, the maximum number of battles is eight. When a predetermined scenario is determined by the pending change scenario lottery in step S612 (step S612), then it is determined which character is selected from the instep forces (step S614). Depending on the character selected here, there may be a character that always wins the instep (holding change confirmed).

Next, in step S616, the B character and the scenario that confront the instep are drawn. Here, in the present embodiment, there is only one character of the instep power selected in the instep character lottery in step S614, but a maximum of eight confrontation characters are selected as the B power to confront. Then, the story, cut-in, and other scenarios when they appear will also be decided by the confrontation B character scenario lottery. Depending on the character selected here, there may be a character that always wins the instep (holding change confirmed).

Next, the confrontation process is performed in step S618 (step S618). When the instep wins (YES in step S6620), the hold image is changed by the hold change process. Changes in the hold image include, for example, changing the image of the start memory displayed in the red shuriken image to a yellow shuriken image, or changing what was displayed in the shuriken image to a ninja book (roll). The display may be different from the current display. When one battle is completed, 1 is subtracted from the number of battles n in step S624 (step S624). If it is determined that the number of confrontations after the subtraction in step S624 is not 0 (NO in step S626), the confrontation is performed again. This process is repeated until the number of confrontations becomes zero.

When the number of confrontations subtracted in step S626 becomes 0 (YES in step S626), the development effect processing is performed in step S628 (step S628). In the development production process, there is a production that develops into super reach after the confrontation between the instep power and the second power.

On the other hand, in step S620, if A is not a winner in the confrontation between A and B (NO in step S620), it is determined whether or not it is a draw (step S630). If it is determined that the game is a draw (YES in step S630), 1 is subtracted from the number of confrontations n in step S624 (step S624). If it is determined that the number of confrontations subtracted in step S626 is not 0 (NO in step S626), the confrontation is performed again. This process is repeated until the number of confrontations becomes zero.

When it is determined in step S628 that the development effect process ends or in step S630 it is not a draw (NO in step S630), the hold change determination process ends. It should be noted that the pseudo-ren may be used in the production related to the confrontation between the instep power and the second power in the pending change.

[Character lamp]
In the present embodiment, when the character lamp (LED1562) emits light, a picture of a character or the like appears inside the opening window 1552. In the following, the character lamp (LED1562) is simply referred to as a character lamp.

While the sub CPU 201 selects an effect in which the character lamp lights up at the start of variable display of the identification symbol, the sub CPU 201 may draw a lottery to determine whether or not the character lamp lights up in the effect lottery when the effect button 62 shown in FIG. 1 is pressed. ..

Then, since the timing at which the character lamp selected at the start of the variable display of the identification symbol lights up and the timing at which the character lamp selected by the lottery when the effect button 62 is pressed exist, the variable display is performed once. It is possible that there is a timing in which the character lamp lights up multiple times. Therefore, regarding the lighting of the character lamp, the earliest timing is adopted, and the sub CPU 201 is controlled so that once it is lit, it is not lit thereafter.

FIGS. 162 (A) to 162 (C) are sequence charts showing an example of lighting control of the character lamp, respectively. In FIGS. 162 (A) to 162 (C), the first effect lottery is executed at the start of the variable display as an effect between the start of the variable display of the identification symbol and the end of the variable display, and as a result, the conversation notice is given in the first half. Is executed, and a second production lottery is executed in the middle, and as a result, a special reach (hereinafter referred to as "SP reach") is executed in the latter half.

The example shown in FIG. 162 (A) shows a case where the timing of lighting the lamp twice is selected during one variable display as a premise. In the illustrated example, in the first half of the conversation notice, there is an executable period of the character lamp effect, and in the latter half of the SP reach, there is also an executable period of the character lamp effect.

The example shown in FIG. 162 (B) shows the case where the effect button 62 is pressed. In the illustrated example, the sub CPU 201 executes the character lamp effect when the effect button 62 is pressed in the conversation notice in the first half, and does not execute the character lamp effect in the SP reach in the latter half.

In the example shown in FIG. 162 (C), the case where the effect button 62 is not pressed is shown. In the illustrated example, in the first half of the conversation notice, the effect button 62 is not pressed, while in the second half of the SP reach, the sub CPU 201 indicates that the character lamp effect is executed.

If it is determined that the character lamp is turned on when the effect button 62 is pressed at the start of variable display, if the effect button 62 is not pressed at the time of button effect, the character lamp is identified without the lighting timing. It is conceivable that the variable display of the symbol will end, but the lottery for the effect that the character lamp drawn at the start of the variable display lights up and the lottery for lighting the character lamp when the effect button 62 is pressed can be executed separately. Since it is controlled in this way, various lighting timings of the character lamp can be prepared.

FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing an example of the control process of the character lamp effect. First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the effect is during variable display (step S801), and if the effect is not during variable display, determines whether or not the variable display is finished (step S807), while the variable display is displayed. In the case of the middle effect, it is determined whether or not it is within the execution period of the character lamp effect (step S802).

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display has ended when it is not the execution period of the character lamp effect (step S807), while the character lamp flag is 1 when it is the execution period of the character lamp effect. It is determined whether or not there is (step S803).

When the character lamp flag is 1 (character lamp effect has been executed), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display has ended (step S807), while when the character lamp flag is not 1 (character lamp effect has not been executed). In (execution), it is determined whether or not the execution condition of the character lamp effect is satisfied (step S804). The execution condition of the character lamp effect means, for example, that the effect button 62 is pressed or a predetermined variable display time elapses.

The sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display is terminated when the execution condition of the character lamp effect is not satisfied (step S807), while the sub CPU 201 executes the character lamp effect when the execution condition of the character lamp effect is satisfied. (Step S805).

Next, the sub CPU 201 sets the character lamp flag to 1 (step S806). Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the variable display has ended (step S807). The sub CPU 201 ends the process when it is determined that the variable display has not ended, while the character lamp flag is set to 0 when it is determined that the variable display has ended (step S808).

The above content has been described as an embodiment during variable display as an example, but is not limited to this, and the execution of the character lamp effect is controlled by setting the effect during the look-ahead effect or the effect during the look-ahead effect + variable display as one period. You may try to do it.

As described above, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 162 (B), when the effect button 62 is operated, as a specific notification mode, for example, a conversation notice (first effect execution) capable of executing a character lamp effect is performed. Means) and SP reach (second effect executing means) capable of executing the character lamp effect when the variable display of the identification symbol reaches a predetermined time during the same variable display. Further, as shown in FIG. 162 (C), in the conversation notice, the character lamp effect is not executed when the effect button 62 is not operated, while in the SP reach, as shown in FIG. 162 (C). , When the character lamp effect is executed in the conversation notice, the character lamp effect is not executed, and as shown in FIG. 162 (C), when the character lamp effect is not executed in the conversation notice, the character lamp is not executed. Perform the production.

In addition, it can be paraphrased as follows. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute the character lamp effect as a predetermined effect, and draws a lottery to execute the character lamp effect under the first condition (for example, when the effect button 62 is pressed). Each can be executed by a first lottery that can be performed and a second lottery that can perform a lottery that is executed under a second condition (for example, the passage of time) different from the first lottery. When each of the above becomes feasible, the first condition may be unsatisfied depending on the game situation. If the first condition is satisfied, the character lamp effect can be executed under the condition that the first condition is satisfied, and the establishment under the second condition is invalidated. If the first condition is not satisfied or invalid. Only occasionally, when the second condition is satisfied, for example, a predetermined effect can be executed at an execution timing different from that of the first condition.

In addition, it can be paraphrased as follows. That is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can execute the character lamp effect as a predetermined effect, and executes the character lamp effect as the first condition, for example, by pressing the button in FIG. 162 (A). Each can be executed by the first lottery in which the lottery can be performed and the second lottery in which the lottery can be executed at the time shown in FIG. 162 (A) as a second condition different from the first lottery. sell. When each of the above becomes feasible, the character lamp effect is executed when the second condition is satisfied, while the first condition is a condition that is unsatisfied or invalid depending on the game situation. For example, as shown in FIG. 162 (B), when the first condition is satisfied, the character lamp effect can be executed under the condition of the first condition and is satisfied under the second condition. Is invalid (or discarded).

[Full screen notice]
FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of control of full screen effect, and FIGS. 165 (A) to 165 (C) are screen views showing an example of screen display. In the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 201 receives a command to execute the full-screen effect in the state of the normal effect shown in FIG. 165 (A), the sub CPU 201 outputs a message (effect designation information) to the voice control circuit 205. By doing so, the voice control circuit 205 is controlled, and the volume of the specific channel (the channel on which the sound of the symbol is reproduced) is set to 0.

The voice control circuit 205 is controlled so as not to output the symbol sound during the full-screen effect, but the error screen after the power failure is restored (that is, the full-screen error screen indicating that the variable display is in progress). ) Is displayed while the design sound is output.

However, in this example, the full-screen error screen is the error screen after the power is restored, but the full-screen error screen does not necessarily have to be the error screen after the power is restored. For example, when an error occurs. The purpose is to include a full-screen display of information screens related to gaming machines that are not related to the jackpot judgment, such as the message screen of the above and the warning screen when fraud is performed, in a manner in which the variable display of the identification symbol cannot be visually recognized. ..

The voice control circuit 205 has a 4-channel (execution system) sound source for performing voice control such as a notification sound, a design sound, a sound effect, and a BGM, and is based on a message (effect designation information) from the sub CPU 201. For example, each of these can be reproduced on four channels (execution systems). In the present embodiment, a channel number is assigned to each channel, for example, channel number 1 is a notification sound, channel number 2 is a symbol sound, channel number 3 is a sound effect, and channel number 4 is a BGM. be.

Explaining according to the flowchart shown in FIG. 164, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the full-screen effect is being executed (step S901), and ends the process if it is not the full-screen effect. On the other hand, in the case of full-screen effect, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the power failure is restored as shown in FIG. 165 (C) (step S902).

If it is not a power recovery, the sub CPU 201 sets a full screen effect (step S903). Next, the sub CPU 201 transmits a message specifying channel number 2, which is a symbol sound channel, to the voice control circuit 205, and sets the volume of the symbol sound channel to 0 to the voice control circuit 205 that receives the message. (Step S904).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165 (C), in the case of power failure recovery, the sub CPU 201 sets the screen during power failure recovery (step S905). This is because the effect is not memorized at the time of recovery from power failure, so that the screen during recovery from power failure is simply displayed.

Next, the sub CPU 201 transmits a message to the voice control circuit 205, and causes the voice control circuit 205 to output the volume of the symbol channel for the symbol sound channel number 2 (step S906). This may be changed to a sound louder than the stop sound of the symbol at the time of normal production.

In the above processing, the sound of the symbol is not emitted during the full-screen effect as an effect, but after that, if a power failure occurs, the full-screen effect command is transmitted again when the power is restored. In such a case, by controlling the volume of the symbol sound channel (channel number: 2) to be output, the screen for recovering from power failure is covered and the liquid crystal display device 16 is displayed. Even when the displayed identification symbol cannot be seen, it is possible to grasp that the identification symbol has stopped by the symbol stop sound.

In other words, in the case of the display effect, the effect sound can be output by a plurality of channels according to the system, and the channel (for example, channel number 2) can be output according to the change in the mode of the display effect. While changing the production tone output from the 3rd and 4th symbol sound channels, effect sound channels, and BGM channels), the symbol system channels (for example, the symbol channel of channel number 2) are fixed and fixed. , The output sound from the channel of the symbol system is muted according to the mode of the symbol display.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to reduce the processing that is not necessary for the production while enhancing the interest of the player in the production, so that the processing can be smoothly performed.

Further, from a different point of view of the embodiment as described above, it is produced by a plurality of channels, for example, a notification sound channel of channel numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4, a symbol sound channel, a sound effect channel, and a BGM channel. A shared channel that can output the sound color according to the system and can change the effect sound output from the channel according to the change of the display effect mode, for example, the channel with the symbol of channel numbers 2, 3 and 4, the effect. It has a sound channel, a BGM channel, and each channel of the warning system and the symbol system, for example, the notification sound and the symbol sound channel of channel numbers 1 and 2, and the effect sound is produced through the shared channel according to the mode of the display effect. On the other hand, when a specific display effect, for example, the full screen display shown in FIG. 165 (B) is executed, the state of the warning system channel is maintained and the output sound from the symbol system channel is muted. It can also be said that.

In the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the channel number of the symbol sound channel is fixed to 2 is exemplified (hereinafter, also referred to as “fixed channel method”), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the voice control circuit 206 is a sub. Based on the message (effect designation information) from the CPU 201, for example, an vacant unused channel among the four channels (execution system) may be dynamically assigned to reproduce each sound.

In this case, the sub CPU 201 stores a specific channel number representing a specific channel playing the symbol sound, and for example, when executing a full-screen effect, the specific channel with respect to the voice control circuit 206. A message with a specified number is transmitted, and the voice control circuit 206 that receives the message is made to set the volume of the symbol sound channel to 0. Even in this way, the same effect as that of the fixed channel method can be obtained.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following gaming machines can be provided.

[Appendix 1]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention relates to a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of certain conditions, and the variable display which has not yet been performed. A holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start storage, and the holding. When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the means, the variable display and stop of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. A symbol effect (for example, a symbol effect) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the display control means (for example, step S205 or the like) for controlling the effect and the start memory stored by the hold means. , Temporary variation) execution number determination means (for example, step S324, etc.) and one or more start storages stored by the holding means, specific start memory (reach or jackpot). ) Is included, the effect mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed is provided. The effect mode determining means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units with respect to the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed. , A specific effect determining means (for example, a character subtraction effect) for determining an effect mode (for example, a character subtraction effect) performed during execution of a symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. , Step S372, etc.).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, when a specific start memory is included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed. Since the effect mode for the start memory (that is, the start memory for which the variable display has not yet been performed) can be determined before the variable display is started, even if the data capacity is large, it is smooth. It becomes possible to perform processing. Moreover, since the number of executions of the symbol effect once or a plurality of times is determined for each start memory stored by the holding means, a plurality of starts are apparently displayed even though the display is variable for one start memory. It looks as if variable display is performed for memory, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production. Further, since the number of executions of the determined symbol effect is divided into predetermined units, and the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined, the effect of the effect is further enhanced. Smooth processing can be performed.

When the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the variable display is performed in the specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning determination is wrong, even if an effect mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is subsequently performed (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), the effect mode is supported. The interest of the player is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the first of the plurality of specific start memories is the first. The effect mode is determined for the start memory up to the earliest specific start memory that is variably displayed, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory that is variably displayed after the earliest specific start memory. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, a hold effect control means (for example, step S205 or the like) that controls the display of the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is further added. The hold effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed. And.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode regardless of the result of one game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determining means includes the specific starting memory in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means. When not, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the effect mode for the last start memory stored by the hold means is determined. Has a suggestion effect determining means (for example, step S358 or the like) that determines an effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode even though the memory is not the specific start memory. The suggestion effect determining means is configured so as not to determine the effect mode suggesting that the variable effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode when the start memory is not stored by the hold means. It is characterized by.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when a specific start memory is not included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is not necessary to redetermine the effect mode, so that the control is performed. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last memorized start memory among the start memory stored by the holding means is the variation effect of the identification symbol in the specific mode even though it is not a specific start memory. By deciding on the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Moreover, when the start memory is not stored by the holding means, the effect mode suggesting that the identification symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode is not determined, so that the control load does not increase.

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing deterioration of interest.

[Appendix 2]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention relates to a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the variable display which has not yet been performed. A holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start storage, and the holding. When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the means, the variable display and stop of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. A symbol effect (for example, a symbol effect) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the display control means (for example, the sub CPU 201) that controls the effect and the start memory stored by the hold means. An effect mode capable of determining an effect mode for a symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number of executions of the provisional variation) and one or more start storages stored by the holding means. The effect mode determining means includes a determining means (for example, step S372, etc.), and the effect mode determining means has the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. Is divided into predetermined units, and a specific effect determining means (for example, a character subtraction effect) is determined during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. For example, in step S370, etc.), and when the specific start memory is not included in one or more start memories stored by the hold means, for all start memories stored by the hold means. In addition to determining the effect mode, the effect mode for the last stored start memory among the start memories stored by the holding means is set in the specific mode even though the start memory is not the specific start memory. The suggestion effect determination means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining the effect mode (for example, the reach precursor effect of Gase) suggesting that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed, and the suggestion effect determination means. When the start memory is not stored by the holding means, it is characterized in that it is configured so as not to determine the effect mode suggesting that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means can be determined before the variable display is started, so that the data capacity is large. Even so, smooth processing can be performed. Moreover, since the number of executions of the symbol effect once or a plurality of times is determined for each start memory stored by the holding means, a plurality of starts are apparently displayed even though the display is variable for one start memory. It looks as if variable display is performed for memory, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production. Further, since the number of executions of the determined symbol effect is divided into predetermined units, and the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined, the effect of the effect is further enhanced. Smooth processing can be performed.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. Can be difficult. Therefore, in this case, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the effect mode for the last start memory stored by the hold means is set as the start mode. By deciding on an effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode even though the memory is not a specific start memory, the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. ing.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the game machine according to (1) above, the identification symbol is based on the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) where the game ball can win a prize and the winning of the game ball to the starting port. Further provided with a variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining the variation pattern when the variable display is performed, the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) means that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port. Based on this, the start storage can be held, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, the sub CPU201) is stored in the holding means when the game ball wins a prize in the starting opening. The number of executions of the symbol effect is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the start memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively long fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is large, and if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively short fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is small. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are executed for one start memory. Further, since the number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the start memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern, the symbol effect for each start memory is performed without increasing the load on the government. The number of executions can be easily determined.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the display means to display the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means. Etc.), and the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. It is characterized by doing.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode regardless of the result of one game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing deterioration of interest.

[Appendix 3]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while enhancing a directing effect.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a start port (for example, a second start port 440) provided in the game area, and a display in which the identification symbol is variably displayed based on the acceptance of the game ball into the start port. A predetermined number (for example, four) of means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for design determination, etc.) as start-up storage. ) And the start storage stored by the holding means when the identification symbol is variablely displayed (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.), the first effect mode is determined. Then, the target is the first effect mode determining means for setting the effect data related to the determined first effect mode, and the start memory stored by the hold means when the game ball is received at the start port. The second effect mode determining means includes a second effect mode determining means for determining a second effect mode and setting effect data related to the determined second effect mode, and the second effect mode determining means is the first effect mode determining means. It is characterized in that the second effect mode is determined by using the effect data related to the first effect mode determined by.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the second effect mode in which the effect mode is determined for the start memory stored by the hold means when the game ball is received at the start port is stored by the hold means. Although there is not enough time to display it immediately when it is displayed, it depends on the first effect mode determined for the start memory stored by the holding means when the variable display of the identification symbol is performed. Since it is determined using the effect data, smooth processing can be performed even if the data capacity is large.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, execution of a symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. Further comprising a symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number, the first effect mode determining means is the symbol effect execution number determining means with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The symbol effect of the number of executions determined by is divided into predetermined units, and the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory is determined. It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the number of executions of the symbol effect once or a plurality of times is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means, the variable display for one start memory is achieved. On the outside, it seems as if variable display is performed for a plurality of start-up memories, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, since the number of executions of the determined symbol effect is divided into predetermined units and the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined, it is possible to further enhance the effect. Will be.

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while enhancing the effect of production.

[Appendix 4]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) on which variable display is performed and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for design determination, etc.) are predetermined as start-up memory. When the variable display is performed on the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to a number (for example, 4) and the one starting memory stored by the holding means, the one starting memory is performed. A display control means (for example, step S205) that controls the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol by using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory is performed, and the winning determination. The special game state executing means (for example, step S96 or the like) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) based on the result of the above is a specific result, and the special game are executed. An advantageous state control means capable of controlling a later gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state or a high-probability gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than a normal gaming state for a different period each time, and the above-mentioned display. The effect control means includes an effect control means (for example, step S205, etc.) for controlling the display effect displayed on the means, and the effect control means executes an index effect (character subtraction effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation for the gaming state. The number of times and the execution timing of which variable display in the advantageous gaming state to execute the index effect are at least information related to the gaming state of the advantageous gaming state (for example, information on whether or not the game is in a high probability gaming state). ) And the effect predetermining means (for example, scenario presetting process (for example, FIG. 136)) that is determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state according to the period controlled to the advantageous gaming state (for example, the number of time reductions). And a specific effect determining means (for example, step S370, etc.) for determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state, and the specific effect. When the index start memory in which the index effect is executed is included in one or more start memories stored by the hold means, the determination means determines the index effect by the effect predetermining means. Of the above-mentioned one or more start memories, instead of the execution timing It is characterized by having an effect redetermining means (for example, step S358 or the like) for determining the execution in the variable display related to the start storage of the deviation.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the gaming state is executed in the variable display in the advantageous gaming state, but the execution timing of the index effect is set to the advantageous gaming state. Determined before being controlled. Therefore, even if the data capacity is large, there is a time margin before the index production is performed, so that smooth processing can be performed. However, before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state, it is a time when the start memory related to the index effect is not yet held, so it is determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state depending on the situation when the variable display is performed. It is not always possible to produce an index at the executed timing. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when the index start memory is included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the index effect is set among the one or more start memories. I am trying to re-determine to execute in the variable display related to one of the start memories. As a result, even if the data capacity is large, the index effect can be smoothly processed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the M-th variable display indicates the execution timing of the index effect determined by the effect predetermining means in the game state after the special game is executed. When the predetermined number that can be stored as the start memory by the holding means is N, the effect redetermining means replaces the execution timing of the index effect determined by the effect predetermining means. In the game state after the special game is executed, the variable display at any timing in the range of [M- (predetermined number N-1)] to [M + (predetermined number N-1)] is described. It decides to perform index production.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the execution timing of the index effect determined by the effect redetermining means is determined without significantly deviating from the execution timing of the index effect determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, among the one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific embodiment is included. The specific start determination means (for example, step S330, etc.) for determining whether or not the above is specified is further provided, and the effect redetermination means is the specific start memory in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the hold means. When it is determined that the specific start memory is included, it is characterized in that it is determined to perform the variable display in any one of the start memories until the variable display related to the specific start memory is performed.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), even if the start memory stored by the holding means includes the specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the control is controlled. The index can be produced by smooth processing without excessively increasing the burden on the machine. That is, if the specific start memory is included in the start memory stored by the holding means, it becomes necessary to redetermine the effect mode, which may increase the burden on control. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (3) above, when the specific start memory is included in the start memory stored by the holding means, the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed. Since the mode of effect is determined, the burden on control can be reduced as much as possible.

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing deterioration of interest.

[Appendix 5]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to suppress a decrease in interest. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine capable of smooth processing.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) on which variable display is performed and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for design determination, etc.) are predetermined as start-up memory. When the variable display is performed on the holding means that can store up to the number (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the one starting memory stored by the holding means, the next starting memory of the one starting memory A display control means (for example, step S205 or the like) that controls the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol by using the effect time until the variable display of the above is performed, and the result of the winning determination is a specific result. A special game state executing means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) based on the above, and a game state after the special game is executed are set to be higher than the normal game state. An advantageous state control means that can control an advantageous game state (for example, a time-saving game state or a high-probability game state) that is advantageous to the player over a different period each time, and an index effect (character subtraction) that has a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state. Whether the number of executions of the effect) and the execution timing of which variable display in the advantageous game state the index effect is executed is at least information related to the game state of the advantageous game state (for example, a high probability game state). An effect predetermining means (for example, a scenario presetting process) that is determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state according to the information on whether or not the advantageous gaming state is controlled and the period controlled to the advantageous gaming state (for example, the number of time reductions). FIG. 136)) and the symbol effect execution that can determine the number of symbol effects (for example, provisional fluctuations) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. A number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining an effect mode for one or more start memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state. Etc.), and the effect mode determining means determines whether or not the index start memory in which the index effect is executed is included in one or more start memories stored by the hold means. Indicator effect execution determination means (for example, step S338, etc.) and the holding hand When it is determined by the index effect execution determination means that the index start memory is included in one or more start memories stored by the stage, the execution timing determined by the effect predetermining means is set. Instead, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and it is determined in which symbol effect the index effect is executed. It is characterized by having an effect redetermining means (for example, step S358 or the like).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the gaming state is executed in the gaming state after the special gaming state is executed, but the execution timing of the index effect is , Determined before being controlled to an advantageous gaming state. Therefore, even if the data capacity is large, there is a time margin before the index production is performed, so that smooth processing can be performed. However, before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state, it is a time when the start memory related to the index effect is not yet held, so it is determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state depending on the situation when the variable display is performed. It is not always possible to produce an index at the executed timing. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when the index start memory is included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the index effect is set among the one or more start memories. I am trying to re-determine to execute in the variable display related to one of the start memories. As a result, even if the data capacity is large, the index effect can be smoothly processed.

Moreover, since the number of executions of the symbol effect once or a plurality of times is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means, a plurality of start memories are apparently displayed even though the display is variable for one start memory. It looks as if a variable display is being performed for, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, since the number of executions of the determined symbol effect is divided into predetermined units and the index effect is executed in any of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined units, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the effect.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, in the index effect execution determination means, the index start memory in which the index effect is executed is stored in one or more start memories stored by the hold means. Although it is determined whether or not it is included, when there are a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is determined which of the plurality of start memories the index effect is executed. It is characterized by being configured not to.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when there are a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is determined whether or not the index start memory is included, but any of the plurality of start memories is determined. Since it is not determined whether the index effect is executed by the start memory, the effect on the control can be enhanced without increasing the control load. It was determined by the effect predetermining means that, even if the index start memory is included in the plurality of start memories, it is not determined which of the multiple start memories the index effect is executed. This is because the execution timing is redetermined.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2) above, the effect mode determining means is a specific start in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means. When a memory (reach or jackpot) is included, it is characterized in that it is configured to determine an effect mode for the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed. ..

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), it is interesting. Can be suppressed. That is, when the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the variable display is performed in the specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning determination is wrong, even if an effect mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is subsequently performed (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), the effect mode is supported. The interest of the player is reduced. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a specific start memory (reach or jackpot) is included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the specific start memory. The effect mode for the start memory until the variable display is performed is determined, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory that is variablely displayed after the specific start memory. Can be suppressed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing deterioration of interest.

[Appendix 6]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) on which variable display is performed and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for design determination, etc.) are predetermined as start-up memory. When the variable display is performed on the holding means that can store up to the number (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the one starting memory stored by the holding means, the next starting memory of the one starting memory A display control means (for example, step S205 or the like) that controls the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol by using the effect time until the variable display of the above is performed, and the result of the winning determination is a specific result. A special game state executing means (for example, step S96 or the like) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) based on the above, and a game state after the special game is executed. , An advantageous state control means that can control an advantageous gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state or a high-probability gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than a normal gaming state over a different period each time, and a predetermined degree of expectation for the gaming state. The number of times the index effect (character subtraction effect) is executed and the execution timing of which variable display in the advantageous gaming state the index effect is executed are determined by at least information related to the gaming state of the advantageous gaming state (for example,). An effect predetermining means (for example, an effect predetermining means) that is determined before being controlled to the advantageous gaming state according to the information on whether or not the advantageous gaming state is controlled) and the period controlled to the advantageous gaming state (for example, the number of time reductions). For example, the number of executions of the scenario presetting process (FIG. 136)) and the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed on the start memory stored by the holding means. An effect mode capable of determining an effect mode for one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state and a symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining. A determination means (for example, step S372, etc.) is provided, and the index effect includes a first index effect (for example, a subtraction effect of an enemy character) having a relatively high expectation, and the first index effect. Second index production with relatively low expectations (for example, reduction of ally characters) The effect predetermining means determines the execution timing for each of the first index effect and the second index effect, and the effect mode determining means is reserved. The one or more start memories stored by the means include a first index start memory in which the first index effect is executed and / and a second index start memory in which the second index effect is executed. The first index start memory and / or the second index start in the index effect execution determination means (for example, step S338 or the like) for determining whether or not the presence is present, and one or more start memories stored by the hold means. When it is determined by the index effect execution determination means that the memory is included, the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means is replaced with the execution timing determined by the effect predetermining means. The effect redetermining means (for example,) for dividing the symbol effect into a predetermined unit and determining in which of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined unit the first index effect and / or the second index effect is executed. Step S358 and the like).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, as the index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the gaming state, the first index effect having a relatively high expectation and the expectation relatively lower than the first index effect. A second index effect with a degree is prepared. Although both the first index effect and the second index effect are executed in the variable display in the advantageous gaming state, the execution timing of the first index effect and / or the second index effect is the advantageous gaming state. Determined before being controlled by. Therefore, even if the data capacity is large, there is a time margin before the first index effect and / or the second index effect is performed, so that smooth processing can be performed. However, before it is controlled to the advantageous gaming state, it is a time when the start memory related to the first index effect and / and the second index effect is not yet reserved, so it is advantageous depending on the situation when the variable display is performed. It is not always possible to perform the first index effect and / or the second index effect at the execution timing determined before being controlled by the gaming state. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, when the index start memory is included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the first index effect and / or the second index effect is set. , One or more start-up memories are re-determined to run in the variable display for any start-up memory. As a result, even if the data capacity is large, the index effect can be smoothly processed. For the redetermination of the execution timing of the first index effect and / and the second index effect, it is preferable that the execution order of the first index effect and / and the second index effect determined by the effect predetermining means is maintained. ..

Moreover, since the number of executions of the symbol effect once or a plurality of times is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means, a plurality of start memories are apparently displayed even though the display is variable for one start memory. It looks as if a variable display is being performed for, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, since the determined number of symbol effects to be executed is divided into predetermined units and the first index effect and / or the second index effect is executed in any of the symbol effects divided into the predetermined units, further effects are further produced. It is possible to enhance the effect.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the index effect execution determination means is the first index start memory and / and the first index start memory in one or more start memories stored by the hold means. Although it is determined whether or not the two index start memories are included, when there are a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, which of the plurality of start memories is used as the first index effect or / And the first index start memory and the second index start are included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, while not determining whether the second index effect is executed. When both of the memories are included, it is characterized in that the execution order of the first index effect and the second index effect is determined.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when there are a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is determined whether or not the first index start memory and / and the second index start memory are included. However, since it is not determined which of the plurality of start-up memories the first index effect and / or the second index effect is executed, the control load is not increased and the effect of the effect is enhanced. be able to. It is the first index memory and / and the second index in the plurality of start memories that does not determine which of the multiple start memories the first index effect and / and the second index effect is executed. This is because the execution timing determined by the effect predetermining means is redetermined even if the memory is included. However, when both the first index start memory and the second index start memory are included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution order of the first index effect and the second index effect. I try to judge about. This is because when the execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect are redetermined, the execution order of the first index effect and the second index effect determined by the effect predetermining means is maintained. Is.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the effect mode determining means is a specific start memory (reach or jackpot) among one or more start memories stored by the hold means. When is included, it is characterized in that it is configured to determine an effect mode for the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, even if the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), it is interesting. Can be suppressed. That is, when the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the variable display is performed in the specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning determination is wrong, even if an effect mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is subsequently performed (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), the effect mode is supported. The interest of the player is reduced. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (3) above, when a specific start memory (reach or jackpot) is included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the specific start memory. The effect mode for the start memory until the variable display is performed is determined, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory that is variablely displayed after the specific start memory. Can be suppressed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing deterioration of interest.

[Appendix 7]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) on which variable display is performed and information on the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for design determination, etc.) are predetermined as start-up memory. When the variable display is performed on the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to a number (for example, 4) and the one starting memory stored by the holding means, the one starting memory is performed. A display control means (for example, step S205) that controls the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol by using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory is performed, and the winning determination. The special game state executing means (for example, step S96 or the like) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) based on the result of the above is a specific result, and the special game are executed. An advantageous state control means (for example, step S171, etc.) capable of controlling the later gaming state to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a time-saving gaming state or a high-probability gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example,) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. Step S324 and the like), and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 and the like) capable of determining an effect mode for one or more start memories stored by the holding means in the advantageous gaming state. , The effect mode determining means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means into predetermined units, and is divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start storage. Specific effect determining means (for example, sub CPU201) for determining the effect mode performed during the execution of the effect, timing determining means for determining the execution timing of the index effect (subtracted effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation for the gaming state (for example). The scenario preset processing (FIG. 136), step S370, etc.), and one or more start memories stored by the holding means include a specific start memory in which a specific effect (for example, reach variation) is executed. Execution timing of the specific effect and execution timing of the index effect The specific effect is out of the total number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) determined for each of the one or a plurality of start storages stored by the holding means when the above is not duplicated. The number of executions of the symbol effect in which the index effect is performed is subtracted from the number of executions of the symbol effect until the execution, and the suggestion effect (reach precursor) suggesting that the specific effect is performed is executed prior to the specific effect. It is characterized by having a suggestion effect execution determination means (for example, step S358 or the like) for determining a possible number of symbol effects.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means can be determined before the variable display is started, so that the data capacity is large. Even so, smooth processing can be performed. Moreover, since the number of executions of the symbol effect once or a plurality of times is determined for each start memory stored by the holding means, a plurality of starts are apparently displayed even though the display is variable for one start memory. It looks as if variable display is performed for memory, and it is possible to enhance the effect of production. Further, since the number of executions of the determined symbol effect is divided into predetermined units, and the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined, the effect of the effect is further enhanced. Smooth processing can be performed.

Further, although the specific start memory is included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the execution timing of the specific effect and the execution timing of the index effect related to the specific start memory do not overlap. In this case, the number of symbol effects that can execute the suggestion effect (reach precursor) is determined by subtracting the number of executions of the index effect from the total number of executions of the symbol effects until the specific effect is executed. Therefore, for any of the specific effect, the index effect, and the suggestion effect, the execution timing can be determined before the variable display is started, so that smooth processing can be performed. Moreover, since the index effect and the suggestion effect can be executed at an appropriate timing, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the suggestion effect execution determining means includes the specific start memory in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the hold means, and the specific effect of the specific effect. When the execution timing and the execution timing of the index effect overlap, the execution of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) determined for each of the one or more start storages stored by the holding means. The number obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of executions of the symbol effect on which the index effect is performed is subtracted from the total number of numbers to determine the number of symbol effects that can execute the suggestion effect (reach precursor) performed prior to the specific effect. It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when the execution timing of the specific effect and the execution timing of the index effect overlap, the index effect is executed when the specific effect is executed. Since the specific effect and the index effect are overlapped from the flow of the suggestion effect, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the holding effect control means for controlling the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means is further provided. The hold effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the image related to the start storage stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode regardless of the result of one game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing deterioration of interest.

[Appendix 8]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention relates to a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the variable display which has not yet been performed. Information (for example, a random value for determining a jackpot, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) can be stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start storage, and a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the display. A special game execution means (for example, step S96 or the like) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player when a specific result is displayed on the means, and an effect executed in the game state after the special game is executed. As a result, a first index effect having a relatively high expectation (for example, a subtraction effect of an enemy character) and a second index effect having a relatively lower expectation than the first index effect (for example, a ally character's subtraction effect). At least the subtraction effect) is prepared, and the index effect timing determining means for determining the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect (for example, scenario preset processing (FIG. 136), step S370, etc.). And, it is determined whether or not the specific effect (for example, reach effect) in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode and the first index effect and / or the second index effect are performed in the same variable display. The overlap determination means (for example, step S346 or the like) and the effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means are provided. When it is determined that the specific effect and the first index effect are performed in the same variable display, the effect mode determining means performs the first index effect in the variable display in which the specific effect is performed. When it is determined that the first effect mode determining means to be determined (for example, step S350 or the like) and the specific effect and the second index effect are performed in the same variable display, the variable display in which the specific effect is performed is performed. The present invention is characterized by having a second effect mode determining means for determining that the second index effect is not performed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, as the index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the gaming state, the first index effect having a relatively high expectation and the expectation relatively lower than the first index effect. A second index effect with a degree is prepared. Further, it is determined whether or not the first index effect and / or the second index effect is executed when the specific effect (for example, reach effect) is performed. Here, when the index effect executed when the specific effect is performed is the first index effect, the specific effect and the first index effect are performed in the same variable display. On the other hand, when the index effect executed when the specific effect is performed is the second index effect, the specific effect and the second index effect are not performed in the same variable display. That is, if the first index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in a specific mode, both effects can give the player a relatively high expectation. Therefore, the specific effect and the first effect are performed in the same variable display. The index production is performed. On the other hand, even if the second index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in a specific mode, it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. Therefore, the specific effect and the second index effect are not performed in the same variable display. In this way, the effect of production is suitably enhanced.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one. The "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, execution of a symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed on the start memory stored by the holding means. The symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number and the symbol effect of the execution number determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means are divided into predetermined units, and the unit of the start storage is Regardless of the above, the specific effect determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) for determining the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is further provided, and the effect mode determining means is the specific. Prior to the effect, it is characterized by having a suggestion effect execution determining means (for example, step S358 or the like) for determining the number of symbol effects that can execute the suggestion effect (reach precursor) suggesting that the specific effect is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the suggestion effect (reach precursor) suggesting that the specific effect is performed is executed prior to the specific effect, the effect of the effect can be further enhanced.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the holding effect control means for controlling the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means is further provided. The hold effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the image related to the start storage stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode regardless of the result of one game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing deterioration of interest.

[Appendix 9]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect can be enhanced by increasing the types of effect, for example, since the data capacity of video and the like is large, if the effect is not performed effectively, not only the interest will be reduced, but also the control load will increase. Not preferred.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively performing an effect.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is identified based on a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that makes a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the result of the winning determination. A display means for variable display of a symbol (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) are stored in a start memory. With respect to the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) and the starting memory stored by the holding means prior to the specific starting memory. It is determined whether or not to execute the first effect (for example, the sumi effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the winning determination for the start memory of the above, and the first effect is also applied to the specific start memory. Of the first effect execution determining means (for example, step S205 and the like) for determining whether or not to execute the effect, and the start memory which is different from the first effect and is stored by the hold means. , The second effect (for example, the movable accessory effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the winning determination for the specific start memory stored at the end is stored in all the start memories stored by the holding means. It is determined that the second effect execution determining means (for example, step S205 or the like) for determining whether or not to execute the first effect and the first effect are not executed for the specific start memory, and the second effect is not executed. The effect is provided with a second effect non-execution determination means that changes the effect so that the second effect is not executed for the specific start memory when it is determined to execute the effect for the specific start memory. It is a feature.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, even if it is decided to execute the second effect for a specific start memory, it is determined not to execute the first effect for the specific start memory. When it is, it is changed so that the second effect is not executed for a specific start memory, so that it is not necessary to perform a meaningless effect, and not only the deterioration of the interest is suppressed, but also the effect is effectively performed. It becomes possible. That is, even if it is decided to execute the second effect for a specific start memory, if it is decided not to execute the first effect for the specific start memory, it is determined for the specific start memory. Expectations are not so high. Therefore, even if it is decided to execute the second effect for a specific start memory, the execution of the meaningless effect is omitted by changing so that the second effect is not executed. It is intended to be effective.

In addition, "execution of the first effect (second effect) for the start memory" means the first effect (second effect) that changes the hold effect image itself indicating that the start memory is stored. Execution, execution of the first effect (second effect) on the hold effect image indicating that the start memory is stored, and the first effect (the first effect) when the variable display of the start memory is performed. The purpose is to include both of the second production).

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the start memory stored by the holding means prior to the specific start memory is different from the start memory of the specific start memory. The first effect execution is further provided with a third effect confirmation means (for example, step S205 or the like) for confirming whether or not it is determined to execute the third effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the determination. When it is determined that the third effect is to be executed for the prior start memory stored by the holding means prior to the specific start memory, the determination means has the specific start memory and the prior start. It is characterized in that it is determined whether or not to execute the first effect with respect to the start memory between the memory and the memory.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, for the start memory for which it is determined to execute the third effect, the specific start memory and the destination are not determined whether or not to execute the first effect. Since the first effect is executed for the start memory between the start memory and the start memory, an effective effect can be performed without unnecessarily increasing the control load.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively performing an effect.

[Appendix 10]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect can be enhanced by increasing the types of effect, for example, since the data capacity of video and the like is large, if the effect is not performed effectively, not only the interest will be reduced, but also the control load will increase. Not preferred.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively performing an effect.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, main CPU 101) that makes a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. The display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 16) in which the variable display is performed and the information about the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for design determination, etc.) are used as start-up memory. Winning of a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) and a specific starting memory held last among the starting memories held by the holding means. The first effect (for example, countdown effect) that may suggest the result of the determination is continuously performed from the variable display of the start memory stored prior to the specific start memory to the variable display of the specific start memory. The result of the winning determination for the specific start memory when the first effect execution determination means (for example, step S205 or the like) for determining whether or not to execute and the variable display for at least the specific start memory are performed. A second effect execution determining means (for example, step S205, etc.) that determines whether or not to execute a second effect (for example, a movable accessory effect) that can suggest the above, separately from whether or not to execute the first effect. The first effect executed from the variable display of the start memory stored prior to the specific start memory is continued until the variable display of the specific start memory. When it is executed, it is highly likely that the result of the winning judgment for the specific start memory is a hit or it is likely to be a hit, and the variable display for the specific start memory is continuously executed. If not, it is configured so that the result of the winning judgment for the specific start memory is determined to be out of order or highly likely to be out of order, up to the variable display of the specific start-up memory. When it is determined not to continuously execute the first effect and it is determined to execute the second effect in the variable display for the specific start memory, the variable display for the specific start memory is determined. A second effect non-execution determining means (for example, step S205 or the like) for changing the second effect so as not to be executed is further provided.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, it is determined that the first effect is not continuously executed until the variable display of the fixed start memory, and the second effect is executed in the variable display of the specific start memory. When it is decided to do so, it is changed so that the second effect is not executed in the variable display for a specific start memory, so that it is not necessary to perform a meaningless effect, and not only the deterioration of the interest is suppressed, but also the deterioration of the interest is suppressed. It is possible to effectively perform the production. That is, if the first effect is not continuously executed until the variable display of the specific start memory, it is highly likely that the result of the winning determination for the specific start memory is determined to be wrong or is wrong. .. Even in such a case, if the second effect is performed in the variable display for a specific start memory, not only the meaningless effect is performed, but also the interest may be lowered. Therefore, even if it is decided to execute the second effect in the variable display for a specific start memory, by changing so as not to execute the second effect, the execution of the meaningless effect can be omitted, and the effect is achieved. It is intended to produce a typical effect.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively performing an effect.

[Appendix 11]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117) for determining a winning based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying a predetermined effect image. A display control means (for example, display control circuit 204) capable of executing control related to the variation effect of the identification symbol and controlling the expected effect image based on the result of the winning determination, and a predetermined effect. A gaming machine including a sound output control means (for example, a voice control circuit 205) that controls sound to be output, and the display control means has a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the winning determination. As the effect, the specific effect control means (for example, step S903) that controls the expected effect image to be displayed without displaying the variation effect of the identification symbol, and the game without displaying the variation effect of the identification symbol. The sound output control means has an information image display control means (for example, step S905) that controls the information image related to the machine to be displayed on the display means, and the sound output control means has a variation effect of the identification symbol by the specific effect control means. When is not displayed, the muffling means (for example, step S904) that does not output the fluctuating sound related to the fluctuating effect of the identification symbol, and when the information image display control means does not display the fluctuating effect of the identification symbol, the identification symbol is displayed. It is characterized by having a fluctuating sound control means (for example, step S906) for outputting a fluctuating sound related to a fluctuating effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, unnecessary processing can be omitted without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and processing can be smoothly performed while suppressing deterioration of interest. As the information image related to the gaming machine, for example, information to be transmitted to the player or the hall staff regardless of the result of the winning determination is applicable. Specific examples thereof include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when an error is performed, a recovery screen after a power failure, and the like.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the information image display control means is turned off when the variation effect of the identification symbol is displayed as the information image related to the gaming machine, and then restored. It is controlled so that the restoration image (for example, FIG. 165 (C)) at the time of this is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the restored image is displayed and the variation effect of the identification symbol cannot be visually recognized in the restoration image after the power failure, it can be grasped that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed. ..

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing deterioration of interest.

[Appendix 12]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention displays a variable display of an identification symbol when a predetermined start condition is satisfied, and displays a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display) in which the result of a winning determination is displayed when the identification symbol stops. Based on the device 16), the operation means that can be operated by the player (effect button 62), and the operation of the operation means within a predetermined period, a lottery for executing a specific effect based on the result of the winning determination is performed. , The first effect executing means (FIG. 162 (B)) for executing the specific effect based on the execution lottery, and the execution lottery for the specific effect based on the elapse of a predetermined time, based on the execution lottery. The second effect executing means (FIG. 162 (C)) for executing the specific effect is provided, and the first effect executing means executes the specific effect when the operation means is not operated within the predetermined period. Instead, the second effect executing means does not execute the specific effect when the specific effect is executed by the first effect executing means within the same variable display, while the operating means does not execute the specific effect within the predetermined period. It is characterized in that the specific effect is executed when the specific effect is not executed by the first effect executing means because it is not operated.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), the specific notification mode is not executed when the operation means is not operated, and the specific notification mode is further executed when the specific notification mode is executed. It won't be done. On the other hand, if the specific notification mode has not been executed yet, the specific notification mode may be executed. As a result, unnecessary processing can be omitted without discomfort, and processing can be smoothly performed while suppressing deterioration of interest.

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing deterioration of interest.

[Appendix 13]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a variable display of a symbol is performed and the result of the game is shown when the symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is performed. Up to four variable displays of symbols are reserved as start-up memories, and variable display is performed for each start-up memory.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the game is displayed, a display effect is performed to expect that a special game may be performed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced (for example, special). See Kai 2006-246964).

However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 performs a display effect on the starting storage unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the display effect is changing. There is a risk that the expectation for the variable display of the design will be lost, and at that point the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent the player from being aware of the display effect in the starting memory unit, and preferably to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention relates to a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the variable display which has not yet been performed. A holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start storage, and the holding. When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the means, the variable display and stop of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the display control means for controlling the effect and the start memory stored by the hold means. A specific start memory (for example, a start in which a reach variation effect is recorded) in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) and the hold means can be determined. When the memory) is included, the effect mode determining means (for example, step S332 or the like) capable of determining the effect mode for the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed is provided. When a plurality of the specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the hold means, the effect mode determining means displays the variable display first among the plurality of specific start memories. The effect mode for the start memory until the variable display of the earliest specific start memory is performed is determined, and the start memory until the variable display of the earliest specific start memory is performed. On the other hand, the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and is divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start storage. It is characterized by having a specific effect determining means (for example, step S372) for determining an effect mode (for example, a character subtraction effect) performed during execution of a symbol effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. .. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

When the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the variable display is performed in the specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning determination is wrong, even if an effect mode that can give a high expectation to the player is performed (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), such an effect is performed. The player's interest in the aspect is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the first of the plurality of specific start memories is the first. The effect mode is determined for the start memory up to the earliest specific start memory that is variably displayed, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory that is variably displayed after the earliest specific start memory. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, a hold effect control means (for example, step S205 or the like) that controls the display of the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is further added. The hold effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed. Is to be.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player should not be further aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. Can be done.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determining means includes the specific starting memory in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means. When not, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the effect mode for the last start memory stored by the hold means is determined. Is not the specific start memory, but is determined to be an effect mode (for example, a reach precursor effect of Gase) that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect). It has a suggestion effect determination means (for example, step S366, etc.), and when the start memory is not stored by the hold means, the suggestion effect determination means performs a variation effect of the identification symbol in the specific embodiment. It is characterized in that it is configured so as not to be determined in the production mode suggesting.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when a specific start memory is not included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is not necessary to redetermine the effect mode, so that the control is performed. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last memorized start memory among the start memory stored by the holding means is the variation effect of the identification symbol in the specific mode even though it is not a specific start memory. By deciding on the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Moreover, when the start memory is not stored by the holding means, it is not determined to the effect mode suggesting that the identification symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode, so that the increase in the control load is also suppressed. ..

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the display effect in the starting memory unit, and preferably suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 14]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a variable display of a symbol is performed and the result of the game is shown when the symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is performed. Up to four variable displays of symbols are reserved as start-up memories, and variable display is performed for each start-up memory.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the game is displayed, a display effect is performed to expect that a special game may be performed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced (for example, special). See Kai 2006-246964).

However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 performs a display effect on the starting storage unit, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the display effect is changing. There is a risk that the expectation for the variable display of the design will be lost, and at that point the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent the player from being aware of the display effect in the starting memory unit, and preferably to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and information about the variable display that has not yet been performed (for example, a random value for jackpot determination or a symbol). The holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of the determination random value) as the starting storage, and one starting memory stored by the holding means are described above. When the variable display is performed, the display control means for controlling the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol by using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. (For example, the sub CPU 201) and the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means can determine the number of executions. An effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining an effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means, and an effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like). The effect mode determining means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means, and the start storage. Specific effect determination means for determining the effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit, and one or more start storages stored by the hold means. When the start memory (for example, the start memory in which the reach variation effect is recorded) is not included, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the effect is stored by the hold means. An effect suggesting that the effect mode for the last memorized start memory in the start memory is that the identification symbol variation effect is performed in the specific mode even though the start memory is not the specific start memory. It is characterized by having a suggestion effect determining means (for example, step S356 or the like) that determines an aspect (for example, a reach precursor effect of Gase).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. .. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. It may be difficult to make it. Therefore, in this case, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the start memory stored by the hold means is stored last (variable display is performed at the end). By determining the effect mode for the start memory to be an effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode even though the start memory is not a specific start memory, the player for the display effect. I am trying to maintain my expectation.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the game machine according to (1) above, the identification symbol is based on the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) where the game ball can win a prize and the winning of the game ball to the starting port. Further provided with a variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining the variation pattern when the variable display is performed, the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) means that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port. Based on this, the start storage can be held, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, the sub CPU201) is stored in the holding means when the game ball wins a prize in the starting opening. The number of executions of the symbol effect is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the start memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively long fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is large, and if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively short fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is small. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are executed for one start memory.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the holding effect control means for controlling the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means is further provided. The hold effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the image related to the start storage stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed. Is.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player should not be further aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. Can be done.

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the effect of the movable body and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 15]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a game advantageous to the player is executed according to the result of the winning determination.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning judgment is displayed, the moving body is operated to operate the movable body in order to expect the result of the winning judgment to be advantageous to the player, and the effect is produced. There is something that can be enhanced.

As such a movable body effect, for example, a technique is known in which the movable body is moved by the expansion / contraction operation of the pantograph and the movable body is tilted at the same time as the expansion / contraction operation of the pantograph starts (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-229582). reference).

However, for example, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, when the operation of the movable body is started, it is possible to grasp a plurality of operations by the movable body such as movement and inclination of the movable body, and there is a limit in enhancing the effect of the effect. There was a risk that the interest would decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to enhance the effect of producing a movable body and suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention relates to a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the variable display which has not yet been performed. A holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start storage, and the holding. When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the means, the variable display and stop of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the display control means for controlling the effect and the start memory stored by the hold means. A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining an effect mode, and an effect mode determining means (for example, a step) capable of determining an effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means. (S372, etc.), and the effect mode determining means includes a specific start memory (for example, a start memory in which a reach variation effect is recorded) in one or more start memories stored by the hold means. When not, the effect mode is determined with respect to the effect target number determining means for determining the number of start memories to be determined for the effect mode to be different each time, and the start memory to be determined for the effect mode. In determining, the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and is divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start storage. The specific effect determining means for determining the effect mode (for example, the subtraction effect of the character) performed during the execution of the symbol effect, and the effect mode for the last start memory stored by the hold means. , A suggestion effect that is determined in an effect mode (for example, a reach precursor effect of Gase) that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific aspect even though the start memory is not the specific start memory. It is characterized by having a determination means (for example, step S356).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. .. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. Can be difficult. Therefore, in this case, the number of start memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined to be a different number each time, and the start memory stored by the holding means is stored last (variable display at the end). Is displayed by determining the effect mode for the start memory (which is performed) to be an effect mode suggesting that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode even though the start memory is not a specific start memory. The player's expectation for the production is maintained.

In addition, the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined to be different each time, because the identification symbol is determined in a specific mode from the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode. It should not be easily grasped that the variation display is not performed (even if the effect mode suggesting that the identification symbol is variable display is displayed in a specific mode, the suggestion mode is disappointing). To make it.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the game machine according to (1) above, the identification symbol is based on the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) where the game ball can win a prize and the winning of the game ball to the starting port. The holding means further includes a variation pattern determining means (for example, step S57, etc.) for determining the variation pattern when the variable display is performed, and the holding means has the starting memory based on the winning of the game ball in the starting opening. The symbol effect execution number determination means determines the number of executions of the symbol effect for the start memory stored in the hold means when the game ball wins a prize in the start opening. It is characterized in that it is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the start memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively long fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is large, and if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively short fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is small. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are executed for one start memory.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the holding effect control means for controlling the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means is further provided. The hold effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the image related to the start storage stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed. Is.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player should not be further aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. Can be done.

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the effect of the movable body and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 16]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention relates to a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the variable display which has not yet been performed. Information (for example, a random value for determining a jackpot, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) can be stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start storage, and a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the display. A special game execution means (for example, step S96) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) when a specific result is displayed on the means, and a special game after the special game is executed. As an effect executed in the game state, an index effect timing determining means (for example, a scenario presetting process (FIG. 136), etc.) that determines in advance the execution timing of an index effect (subtraction effect) having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state). And the effect mode determining means (for example, step S374, etc.) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the hold means, and one or more start memories stored by the hold means. An effect information determination means for determining whether or not a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, a reach variation effect) and an index start memory in which the index effect is performed are included in the effect information determination means (for example). For example, step S346 and the like), and the effect mode determining means displays the index effect when the index start memory is included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the hold means. The effect redetermining means (for example, step S372) that determines to execute in the variable display related to the start memory of any one of the one or a plurality of start memories instead of the execution timing determined by the index effect timing determination means. Etc.), and the effect information that the effect redetermining means includes the specific start memory and the index start memory in one or more start memories stored by the hold means. When it is determined by the determination means, it may be determined that the index effect for the index start memory is performed prior to the variable display for the specific start memory, regardless of the execution timing determined by the index effect timing determination means. It is characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution timing of the index effect is determined in advance, so even if the data capacity of the index effect is large, there is time to perform the index effect, so that it is smooth. Processing can be performed. Further, when a specific start memory and an index start memory are included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the specific start memory is specified regardless of the execution timing determined by the index effect timing determination means. Since it is determined that the index effect for the index start memory is performed prior to the variable display of the start memory, the effect of the index can be enhanced. That is, when the index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in a specific mode, and the index effect has a relatively low degree of expectation for the index effect, the player can display the variable display. Is difficult to have a sense of expectation. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. Therefore, when a specific start memory and an index start memory are included in one or more start memories stored by the holding means, the index effect is performed prior to the variable display of the specific start memory. By doing so, the effect of production can be enhanced.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the effect mode determining means includes the specific starting memory (reach or jackpot) in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means. At that time, it is characterized in that it is configured to determine the effect mode for the start memory until the variable display for the specific start memory is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, even if the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect). It is possible to suppress the decline in interest. That is, when the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the variable display is performed in the specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning determination is wrong, even if an effect mode that can give a high expectation to the player is performed (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), such an effect is performed. The player's interest in the aspect is reduced. In this regard, according to the gaming machine of (2) above, when a specific start memory (reach or jackpot) is included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the specific start memory. Since the effect mode for the start memory until the variable display of the above is performed is determined, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing deterioration of interest.

[Appendix 17]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention relates to a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the variable display which has not yet been performed. Information (for example, a random value for determining a jackpot, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) can be stored as a start storage up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the display. A special game executing means (for example, step S96) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) when a specific result is displayed on the means, and a start storage stored by the holding means. On the other hand, a symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed, and the special game. As an effect to be executed in the gaming state after the execution of, a first index effect having a relatively high expectation (for example, a subtraction effect of an enemy character) and a relatively lower expectation than the first index effect. A second index effect having a degree (for example, a subtraction effect of a ally character) is prepared at least, and an index effect timing determining means (for example, an index effect timing determining means for determining the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect in advance). For example, when the scenario presetting process (FIG. 136)) and the specific effect (for example, reach variation effect) in which the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode, the first index effect and / or the said. Overlapping determination means (for example, step S346) for determining whether or not the second index effect is performed, and effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining the effect mode for the start storage stored by the holding means. Etc.), and the effect mode determining means is determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means in determining the effect mode for the one or more start memories to be determined by the effect mode. A specific effect determining means for dividing the symbol effect of the number of executions into predetermined units and determining an effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start storage, and the above-mentioned When it is determined by the duplication determination means that the second index effect is performed when the specific effect is performed, it is determined that the second index effect is performed in the symbol effect prior to the specific effect. By doing so, the second index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed. It is characterized by having an index effect timing redetermining means (for example, step S358 or the like).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect are determined in advance, it is assumed that the data capacity of the first index effect and / or the second index effect is large. However, since there is time to allow the first index effect and / or the second index effect to be performed, smooth processing can be performed. Further, when it is determined that the second index effect is performed when the specific effect (for example, the reach variation effect) is performed, the second index effect is performed in the symbol effect before the specific effect is performed. By being determined, the second index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. That is, when the second index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in a specific mode, it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. Therefore, the effect of the second index can be enhanced by performing the second index effect in the symbol effect before the specific effect is performed.

It should be noted that the first index effect is in an advantageous state if it is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, when the enemy character is annihilated) before the second index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the ally character is annihilated). (For example, it has a function of notifying that it is a high-probability gaming state). Further, the second index effect is relatively performed when the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times before the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the enemy character is completely destroyed) (for example, when the ally character is completely destroyed). It has a function of notifying that it is a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, a low-probability gaming state).

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the index effect timing determining means determines the execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect during the execution of the special game. The effect mode determining means is characterized in that, in the game state after the special game is executed, the effect mode for the start memory stored by the hold means when the variable display is performed is determined.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect are determined during the execution of the special game, smoother processing can be performed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the holding effect control means for controlling the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means is further provided. The hold effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the image related to the start storage stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode regardless of the result of one game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing deterioration of interest.

[Appendix 18]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention relates to a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the variable display which has not yet been performed. Information (for example, a random value for determining a jackpot, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) can be stored as a start storage up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the display. The identification symbol for the special game execution means capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) when a specific result is displayed on the means and the start memory stored by the holding means. A means for determining the number of symbol effect executions (for example, step S324, etc.) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the change effect and the stop effect are performed, and the game after the special game is executed. As the effect executed in the state (for example, the time-saving game state), the first index effect having a relatively high expectation (for example, the subtraction effect of the enemy character) and the expectation relatively lower than the first index effect. At least a second index effect having a degree (for example, a subtraction effect of a ally character) is prepared, and as an index effect timing determining means for predetermining the execution timing of each of the first index effect and the second index effect. , It is determined whether or not the first index effect and / or the second index effect is performed when the specific effect (for example, reach variation effect) in which the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode is performed. The overlap determination means (for example, step S346 or the like) and the effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining the effect mode for the start memory stored by the holding means are provided to determine the effect mode. In determining the effect mode for the one or more start memories to be determined by the effect mode, the means uses the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means as a predetermined unit. A specific effect determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory, and the specific effect are performed. When it is determined by the duplication determination means that the second index effect is to be performed, the second index effect is determined to be performed in the symbol effect prior to the specific effect. An index performance that prevents the second index effect from being performed when the specific effect is performed. When the output timing redetermining means (for example, step S358 or the like) is provided and it is determined by the duplication determination means that the first index effect is to be performed when the specific effect is performed, the specific effect is performed. It is characterized in that the first index effect is sometimes configured to be performed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, since the execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect are determined in advance, it is assumed that the data capacity of the first index effect and / or the second index effect is large. However, since there is time to allow the first index effect and / or the second index effect to be performed, smooth processing can be performed. Further, when it is determined that the second index effect is performed when the specific effect (for example, the reach variation effect) is performed, the second index effect is performed in the symbol effect before the specific effect is performed. By being determined, the second index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced. That is, when the second index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in a specific mode, it is difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation for the variable display. In particular, even if the variable display develops into a variable display with a higher degree of expectation, it is still difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation. Therefore, the effect of the second index can be enhanced by performing the second index effect in the symbol effect before the specific effect is performed.

It should be noted that the first index effect is in an advantageous state if it is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, when the enemy character is annihilated) before the second index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the ally character is annihilated). (For example, it has a function of notifying that it is a high-probability gaming state). Further, the second index effect is relatively performed when the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times before the first index effect is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, before the enemy character is completely destroyed) (for example, when the ally character is completely destroyed). It has a function of notifying that it is a disadvantageous gaming state (for example, a low-probability gaming state).

Further, when it is determined that the first index effect is performed when the specific effect is performed, the first index effect is performed when the specific effect is performed. This is because when the first index effect is performed during the execution of the variable display performed in a specific mode, there is a high possibility that the player has a sense of expectation for the variable display, and the first index effect and This is because the effect of the effect is enhanced by any of the variable displays.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the index effect timing determining means determines the execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect during the execution of the special game. The effect mode determining means is characterized in that, in the game state after the special game is executed, the effect mode for the start memory stored by the hold means when the variable display is performed is determined.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the execution timings of the first index effect and the second index effect are determined during the execution of the special game, smoother processing can be performed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the display means to display the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means. Etc.), and the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. It is characterized by doing.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode regardless of the result of one game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing deterioration of interest.

[Appendix 19]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention relates to a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the variable display which has not yet been performed. Information (for example, a random value for determining a jackpot, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) can be stored as a start storage up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and the display. A special game executing means (for example, step S96) capable of executing a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit game state) when a specific result is displayed on the means, and a start storage stored by the holding means. On the other hand, a symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed, and the special game. As an effect to be executed in the game state after the execution of the above, the index effect determination means for predetermining the execution timing of the index effect having a predetermined degree of expectation for the game state (for example, scenario preset processing (FIG. 136)). And, when a specific effect (for example, reach variation effect) in which the identification symbol is variably displayed in a specific aspect is performed, a duplicate determination means (for example, step S346) for determining whether or not the index effect is performed is performed. Etc.) and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining an effect mode for the start memory stored by the holding means, and the effect mode determining means is a determination target of the effect mode. In determining the effect mode for the one or more start memories, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units and used as the start memory unit. Regardless of the above-mentioned overlap determination means, the specific effect determining means for determining the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units, and the fact that the index effect is not performed when the specific effect is performed. When determined by, the number of executions of the symbol effect obtained by subtracting the number of executions of the index effect from the total number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the one or more start memories to be determined for the effect mode. Is present, it is characterized by having a suggestion effect execution determining means for determining that the suggestion effect suggesting that the specific effect is to be performed is executed prior to the specific effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the execution timing of the index effect is determined in advance, so even if the data capacity of the index effect is large, there is time to perform the index effect, so that it is smooth. Processing can be performed. Further, when it is determined that the index effect is not performed when the specific effect (for example, the reach variation effect) is performed, the symbol effect determined for one or more start memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined. Only when the number of executions of the symbol effect obtained by subtracting the number of executions of the index effect from the total number of executions of the symbol effect exists (that is, only when it is larger than 0), the suggestion effect suggesting that the specific effect is performed is specified. Since it is executed prior to the production, it is possible to perform an effective production such as expecting a specific production by the suggestion production while performing smooth processing.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the suggestion effect execution determining means executes the specific effect (for example, reach variation) in one or more start storages stored by the holding means. When the overlap determination means determines that the index effect is to be performed when the specific start memory is included and the specific effect is performed, each of the one or more start memories stored by the hold means. The number obtained by subtracting 1 from the number of executions of the symbol effect on which the index effect is performed is subtracted from the total number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) determined for the specific effect, and the specific effect is performed prior to the specific effect. It is characterized in that the number of symbol effects that can execute the suggestion effect (reach precursor) is determined.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, when it is determined by the duplication determination means that the index effect is to be performed when the specific effect is performed, the suggestion effect is performed at an appropriate timing prior to the specific effect. Therefore, more effective production can be performed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the holding effect control means for controlling the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means to be displayed on the display means is further provided. The hold effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the image related to the start storage stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. As a result, it is possible to determine the effect mode regardless of the result of one game, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing deterioration of interest.

[Appendix 20]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machines described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a display means for displaying a predetermined effect image (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) and a display control means for controlling at least a variation effect of an identification symbol (for example). The display control circuit 204) and the sound output control means (for example, the voice control circuit 205) for controlling the output of a predetermined effect sound are provided, and the sound output control means systematizes the effect tone color by a plurality of channels. It is possible to output according to the above, and the effect tone output from the channel is changed according to the change in the mode of the effect image displayed on the display means, while the channel of the system of the identification symbol is fixed. At the same time, it is characterized in that the output sound from the channel of the system of the identification symbol is muted according to the mode of the variation effect of the identification symbol.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, unnecessary processing can be omitted without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and processing can be smoothly performed while suppressing deterioration of interest. As the information image related to the gaming machine, for example, information to be transmitted to the player or the hall staff regardless of the result of the winning determination is applicable. Specific examples thereof include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when an error is performed, a recovery screen after a power failure, and the like.

In the present invention, for example, the following configuration can be adopted as an effect that can give the player a sense of expectation for the result of the winning determination. That is, it is a gaming machine configured to be able to proceed with a game by receiving a power supply, and is a lottery means for determining a win based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a display means for displaying a predetermined effect image, and a display means for displaying a predetermined effect image. It is displayed by the display control means that can execute the control related to the variation effect of the identification symbol as the main effect and the control related to the other effect as the sub effect, the speaker that outputs the effect sound, and the display means. The display control means includes a sound output control means for controlling the production sound according to the effect image to be output from the speaker, and the display control means has a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the winning determination. The control related to the character effect is executed as the main effect, the specific effect control means for executing the control related to the variation effect of the identification symbol as the sub effect, and the control related to the variation effect of the identification symbol are executed as the main effect. As an effect when the power supply is stopped while the power supply is stopped and then the power supply is restored, the control related to the variation effect of the identification symbol is executed as a sub-effect, but the power source is restored. The sound output control means has a return effect control means for controlling so that the effect image is mainly displayed, and the sound output control means is engaged in the variation effect of the identification symbol when the variation effect of the identification symbol is not displayed by the specific effect control means. It is a gaming machine having a fluctuating sound output control means that outputs a fluctuating sound related to the fluctuating effect of the identification symbol when the fluctuating effect of the identification symbol is not displayed by the return effect controlling means, although the fluctuating sound is not output. Even in such a gaming machine, unnecessary processing can be omitted without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and processing can be smoothly performed while suppressing deterioration of interest. The main effect is the effect on the side that is the main body of the effect and the player's gaze is directed, and the sub-effect is the effect that is displayed on the display means together with the main effect, but the player's gaze is It is a production on the side that is difficult to face.

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing deterioration of interest.

[Appendix 21]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball is accepted at the start port, the execution of the symbol variation game is suspended, and the reserved symbol variation game is executed and a symbol combination indicating a big hit is displayed. , A gaming machine in which a jackpot game is executed is known.

In this type of gaming machine, when a symbol variation game is being played, the first button effect as a jackpot notice suggesting the possibility of a jackpot and the reserved symbol variation game may be a jackpot. (For example, see paragraphs 0067 and 0075 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817).

In recent years, for example, as in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-192817, there is a tendency to increase the types of effects to enhance the effects.

However, although the effect of the effect is enhanced by increasing the types of the effect, it is required to process the effect in a short time due to the progress of the game. In particular, although it takes a predetermined time or longer to process data having a large data capacity such as data such as video, it is required that the processing can be smoothly executed even in such a case. Has been done.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of smoothly performing processing while suppressing a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that outputs a warning sound when a predetermined error occurs, and is a lottery means (for example, step S117) for determining a winning based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It is possible to execute a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for displaying a predetermined effect image and control for a variation effect of the identification symbol, and control for an expected effect image based on the result of the winning determination. In the effect image displayed by the display means, including the display control means (for example, the display control circuit 204) capable of executing the above, the speaker (for example, the speaker 24) from which the effect sound is output, and the warning sound. The sound output control means (for example, a sound control circuit 205) for controlling the combined effect sound to be output from the speaker is provided, and the sound output control means has a predetermined degree of expectation for the result of the winning determination. It has a specific output control means (for example, step S904) in which the output for the warning sound is maintained while the output for the variation effect of the identification symbol is muted when the specific effect having the above is executed. It is characterized by.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, unnecessary processing can be omitted without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and processing can be smoothly performed while suppressing deterioration of interest. As the information image related to the gaming machine, for example, information to be transmitted to the player or the hall staff regardless of the result of the winning determination is applicable. Specific examples thereof include an error message screen when an error occurs, a warning image when an error is performed, a recovery screen after a power failure, and the like.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above, the effect tone can be output from a plurality of channels according to the system, and the effect tone output from the channel can be output according to the effect image displayed on the display means. The specific output control means includes a changeable shared channel, a warning system channel, and a channel of the identification symbol system, and the specific output control means changes the effect tone through the shared channel according to the effect image displayed on the display means. When the specific effect is executed, the state of the channel of the warning system is maintained, and the output from the channel of the system of the identification symbol is muted.

The gaming machine of (2) above is a more specific representation of (1) above, omitting unnecessary processing without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and smoothly processing while suppressing deterioration of interest. Can be done.

According to the present invention, it is possible to smoothly perform processing while suppressing deterioration of interest.

[Appendix 22]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable displayed symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to expect that a special game may be performed so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced (for example,). See JP-A-2006-2469664).

However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is displayed for the winning determination unit to the last, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the display effect is changing. There is a risk that the sense of anticipation for the variable display of the design will be lost, and at that point the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to prevent the player from being aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) after one variable display is performed. A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) that controls the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol until the variable display of the identification symbol is performed, and the identification symbol for each variable display. A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number of symbol effect executions in which the variable effect and the stop effect are performed, and an effect mode determination capable of determining the effect mode for a plurality of variable displays. A means (for example, step S372, etc.) is provided, and the effect mode determining means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means into a predetermined unit, and divides the symbol effect into a predetermined unit. It is characterized by having a specific effect determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) for determining an effect mode performed during execution of the divided symbol effect.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed is determined for each variable display. That is, although the symbol effect is normally performed once for each variable display, the number of executions of the symbol effect once or multiple times is determined for each start memory, so that one variable display ( Although it is a single game), it looks as if a plurality of variable displays (multiple games) are being performed on the appearance. Moreover, each symbol effect is divided into predetermined units regardless of the game unit. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in each game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one game, and is used for one game. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the effect mode determining means determines one or a plurality of variable displays as an effect section, and is included in the effect section as a section effect performed in the effect section. The effect mode for the variable display is determined, and the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means for the variable display included in the effect section is divided into predetermined units. It is characterized by having a section effect mode determining means for determining an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the variable display unit.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined for a plurality of variable displays included in the effect section, so that the player is not even more aware of the variable display in each game. Can be.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2) above, the effect mode determining means includes a part of the number of symbol effects determined for one variable display included in the effect section and the effect section. It is characterized in that a part of the symbol effect of the number of executions determined for other variable displays included in the above can be divided as a predetermined unit across a plurality of variable displays. ..

According to the gaming machine of (3) above,
An effect mode that spans a part of the symbol effect determined for one variable display included in the effect section and a part of a plurality of symbol effects determined for another variable display included in the effect section. It can be decided. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in each game, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by making the player not aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit.

[Appendix 23]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable displayed symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to expect that a special game may be performed so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced (for example,). See JP-A-2006-2469664).

However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is displayed for the winning determination unit to the last, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the display effect is changing. There is a risk that the sense of anticipation for the variable display of the design will be lost, and at that point the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to preferably suppress a decrease in interest while making the player not aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit. ..

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention relates to a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the variable display which has not yet been performed. A holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start storage, and the holding. When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.), the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. The display control means (for example, step S205 or the like) for controlling the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the above, and the start memory stored by the hold means, the variation effect of the identification symbol. A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the stop effect is performed, and one or a plurality of start storages stored by the hold means. When a specific start memory (reach or jackpot) is included in the effect mode determination means (which can determine the effect mode for the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed). For example, step S372, etc.), and the effect mode determining means determines the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means for the start memory until the variable display of the specific start memory is performed. The above-mentioned symbol effect is divided into predetermined units, and has a specific effect determining means for determining an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. The specific effect determining means includes a start memory stored prior to the specific start memory and the specific start memory in determining an effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units. Although it is possible to determine the effect mode straddling the specific start memory, it is characterized in that it is configured not to determine the effect mode straddling the specific start memory and the start memory stored after the specific start memory.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. .. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

When the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the variable display is performed in the specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning determination is wrong, even if an effect mode that can give a high expectation to the player is performed (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), it is applied. The player's interest in the production mode is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the first of the plurality of specific start memories is the first. The effect mode is determined for the start memory up to the earliest specific start memory that is variably displayed, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory that is variably displayed after the earliest specific start memory. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, in determining the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units, the effect mode straddling the start memory stored before the specific start memory and the specific start memory is determined. Can be done. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. On the other hand, the effect mode straddling the specific start memory and the start memory stored after the specific start memory is not determined. As a result, the player's gaze can be directed to the variable effect of the identification symbol performed in a specific mode rather than the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect, and the variable effect can be expected. Can be done.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above is further provided with a hold effect control means for controlling the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means to be displayed in a predetermined display area, and the hold effect control. The means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player should not be further aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. Can be done.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determining means includes the specific starting memory in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means. When not, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the effect mode for the last start memory stored by the hold means is determined. Is not the specific start memory, but has a suggestion effect determining means (for example, step S358 or the like) that determines the effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode. Is to be.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when a specific start memory is not included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is not necessary to redetermine the effect mode, so that the control is performed. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last memorized start memory among the start memory stored by the holding means is the variation effect of the identification symbol in the specific mode even though it is not a specific start memory. By deciding on the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by not making the player aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit.

[Appendix 24]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable displayed symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to expect that a special game may be performed so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced (for example,). See JP-A-2006-2469664).

However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is displayed for the winning determination unit to the last, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the display effect is changing. There is a risk that the sense of anticipation for the variable display of the design will be lost, and at that point the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to prevent the player from being aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit, and preferably to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention relates to a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the variable display which has not yet been performed. A holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) up to a predetermined number as start storage, and one stored by the holding means. When the variable display of the start memory of the above is performed, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. A symbol effect capable of determining the number of symbol effects (for example, provisional fluctuations) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed with respect to the display control means to be controlled and the start memory stored by the hold means. An execution number determining means stage (for example, step S324 or the like) and an effect mode determining means stage (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining an effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means. , The effect mode determining means, when the specific start memory is not included in one or more start memories stored by the hold means, all start memories stored by the hold means. In determining the effect mode for all the start memories stored by the holding means, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is predetermined. It is characterized by having a specific effect determining means for determining an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units (regardless of the unit of the start memory).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. .. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

By the way, when the start memory stored by the hold means does not include the specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the start memory stored by the hold means is included. Since the burden on control is less than when a specific start memory is included and the effect mode can be determined for more start memories, all start memories stored by the holding means can be used. On the other hand, the production mode is determined.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
A variation pattern that determines a variation pattern when a variable display of the identification symbol is performed based on a start port (for example, a second start port 440) in which a game ball can win a prize and a prize of the game ball to the start port. Further including a determination means (for example, step S173, etc.), the holding means is configured to be able to hold the starting memory based on the winning of the game ball at the starting opening, and the number of executions of the symbol effect. The determining means (for example, the sub CPU 201) determines the number of executions of the symbol effect for the starting memory stored in the holding means when the game ball wins in the starting opening by the variation pattern determining means. It is characterized in that it is determined based on a fluctuation pattern.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the start memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively long fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is large, and if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively short fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is small. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are executed for one start memory.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the display means to display the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means. Etc.), and the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. It is characterized by doing.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player should not be further aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. Can be done.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by not making the player aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit.

[Appendix 25]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable displayed symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to expect that a special game may be performed so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced (for example,). See JP-A-2006-2469664).

However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is displayed for the winning determination unit to the last, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the display effect is changing. There is a risk that the sense of anticipation for the variable display of the design will be lost, and at that point the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to prevent the player from being aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit, and preferably to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention relates to a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the variable display which has not yet been performed. A holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) up to a predetermined number as start storage, and one stored by the holding means. When the variable display of the start memory of the above is performed, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. Execution of a symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed on the display control means to be controlled (for example, step S205 or the like) and the start memory stored by the hold means. A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) capable of determining the number, and an effect mode determining means (for example,) capable of determining an effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means. Step S372, etc.), and the effect mode determining means has a specific start memory (for example, a start memory in which a reach variation effect is recorded) among one or more start memories stored by the hold means. When it is not included, the effect mode (for example, the subtraction effect of the character) is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the effect is applied to all the start memories stored by the hold means. In determining the aspect, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is defined. The specific mode for determining the specific effect determining means and the start memory stored by the holding means for the last stored start memory, even though the start memory is not the specific start memory. It is characterized by having a suggestion effect determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining an effect mode (for example, a reach precursor effect of Gase) that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. .. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. Can be difficult. Therefore, in this case, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the effect mode for the last start memory stored by the hold means is set as the start mode. By deciding on an effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode even though the memory is not a specific start memory, the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. ing.

When the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the variable display is performed in the specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning determination is wrong, even if an effect mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is subsequently performed (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), the effect mode is supported. The interest of the player is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the first of the plurality of specific start memories is the first. The effect mode is determined for the start memory up to the earliest specific start memory that is variably displayed, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory that is variably displayed after the earliest specific start memory. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the game machine according to (1) above, the identification symbol is based on the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) where the game ball can win a prize and the winning of the game ball to the starting port. Further provided with a variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining the variation pattern when the variable display is performed, the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) means that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port. Based on this, the start storage can be held, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, the sub CPU201) is stored in the holding means when the game ball wins a prize in the starting opening. The number of executions of the symbol effect is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the start memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively long fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is large, and if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively short fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is small. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are executed for one start memory.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the display means to display the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means. Etc.), and the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. It is something to do.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player should not be further aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. Can be done.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by not making the player aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit.

[Appendix 26]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable displayed symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to expect that a special game may be performed so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced (for example,). See JP-A-2006-2469664).

However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is displayed for the winning determination unit to the last, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the display effect is changing. There is a risk that the sense of anticipation for the variable display of the design will be lost, and at that point the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object thereof is to prevent the player from being aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit, and preferably to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention relates to a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the variable display which has not yet been performed. A holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) up to a predetermined number as start storage, and one stored by the holding means. When the variable display of the start memory of the above is performed, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. A symbol effect capable of determining the number of symbol effects (for example, provisional fluctuations) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed with respect to the display control means to be controlled and the start memory stored by the hold means. An effect number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining an effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means. The effect mode determining means determines the number of start memory to be determined in the effect mode when the specific start memory is not included in one or more start memory stored by the hold means. , The effect number determination means for determining the number to be different each time, and the execution number determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means in determining the effect mode for the start memory to be determined for the effect mode. The last of the specific effect determining means for dividing the symbol effect into predetermined units and determining the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units, and the start memory stored by the hold means. Suggestion to determine the effect mode for the start memory stored in the above as an effect mode suggesting that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode even though the start memory is not the specific start memory. It is characterized by having a production determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. .. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. Can be difficult. Therefore, in this case, the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined to be different each time, and the effect mode for the last start-up memory stored by the holding means is determined. By determining the effect mode that suggests that the identification symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode even though the start memory is not a specific start memory, the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. I am trying to be done.

The reason why the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined to be different each time is that the identification symbol is varied and displayed in a specific mode from the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode. (Even if an effect mode suggesting that the identification symbol is variablely displayed in a specific mode is displayed, the suggestion effect mode is not good) cannot be easily grasped. Because.

When the start memory stored by the holding means includes a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the variable display is performed in the specific mode. Nevertheless, when the result of the winning determination is wrong, even if an effect mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is subsequently performed (for example, a character subtraction process is performed), the effect mode is supported. The interest of the player is reduced. Therefore, according to the gaming machine of the above (1), when a plurality of specific start memories are included in the plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, the first of the plurality of specific start memories is the first. The effect mode is determined for the start memory up to the earliest specific start memory that is variably displayed, and the effect mode is not determined for the start memory that is variably displayed after the earliest specific start memory. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the effect target number determining means is characterized in that the number of start memories to be determined in the effect mode is determined by lottery.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined by lottery, so that the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode is easily and randomly determined. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the holding effect control means (for example, the sub CPU 201) for controlling the display means to display the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means. ), And the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. It is a thing.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player should not be further aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. Can be done.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by not making the player aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit.

[Appendix 27]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after the special gaming is completed to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-). See No. 122447).

However, in the case of a gaming machine controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled to the specific gaming state is lengthened, the winning probability in the winning determination must be lowered. There is a risk that the interest will decline. On the other hand, if the period controlled by the specific gaming state is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, the interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to preferably perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing variable display is provided, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. A lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control (for example, a time-saving gaming state) that promotes the winning determination as compared with a normal gaming state, and a winning probability in the winning determination, which is a possible gaming machine, is a normal game. A probability changing means that can be set to a higher probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) than the state, and a concealment effect that makes it unclear whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability (for example). , Concealment A stage 2002) can be executed (for example, step S205) and information about the variable display that has not been performed yet can be stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start memory. When the variable display is performed on the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and one start memory stored by the holding means, the variable display on the next start memory of the one start memory is displayed. A display control means (for example, a display control circuit 204) that controls the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol by using the effect time until the effect is performed, and at least a control that promotes the winning determination are executed. In the gaming state, the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324) for determining the number of executions of the symbol effect in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. Etc.) and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining an effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means, and the effect mode determining means is provided. The effect performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory by dividing the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units. It has a specific effect determining means for determining an aspect, and the specific effect determining means determines the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability when the secret effect is executed. As an example, an effect mode (eg,) performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units. For example, it is characterized in that it determines the subtraction effect of the character).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional fluctuation) to be performed is determined. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination can be made appropriate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling that can be given to the player, and by extension, to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. Further, since the player can execute the display effect without being aware of the variable display in the start storage unit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed. Moreover, when the concealment effect is being executed, the effect is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units to indicate the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning determination is suppressed, the player's gaze can be directed to the above-mentioned production mode, and it is possible to further suppress the deterioration of the interest. Will be.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, a hold effect control means (for example, step S205 or the like) that controls the display of the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is further added. The hold effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed. Is to be.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined for the start memory stored by the hold means. In combination with this, the degree of progress since the control that promotes the winning judgment is started (that is, the number of times the starting memory is digested while the control that promotes the winning judgment is executed (the game executed). It becomes difficult to grasp the number)). As a result, the player can be made to pay close attention to the production mode performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability is high in the winning judgment, and the execution period of the control for promoting the winning judgment can be further reduced. It is possible to make the player even less aware.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the effect mode determining means has the variable display in a specific mode in one or more start storages stored by the holding means. When the specific start-up memory to be performed is not included, the effect mode is determined for all the start-up memories stored by the hold means, and the start-up memory stored by the hold means is the last stored. Suggested effect determining means (for example,) that determines the effect mode for the start memory to be an effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific mode even though the start memory is not the specific start memory. , Step S358, etc.).

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when a specific start memory is not included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is not necessary to redetermine the effect mode, so that the control is performed. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last memorized start memory among the start memory stored by the holding means is the variation effect of the identification symbol in the specific mode even though it is not a specific start memory. By deciding on the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect.

According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the effect of the movable body and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 28]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after the special gaming is completed to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-). See No. 122447).

However, in the case of a gaming machine controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled to the specific gaming state is lengthened, the winning probability in the winning determination must be lowered. There is a risk that the interest will decline. On the other hand, if the period controlled by the specific gaming state is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, the interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to preferably perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing variable display is provided, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. A lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control (for example, a time-saving gaming state) that promotes the winning determination as compared with a normal gaming state, and a winning probability in the winning determination, which is a possible gaming machine, is a normal game. A probability changing means that can be set to a higher probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) than the state, and a concealment effect that makes it unclear whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability (for example). , Concealment A stage 2002) and concealment effect execution means (for example, step S205) and holding means (for example, hold means) that can store up to a predetermined number of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed as start storage. Step S54, step S55, etc.) and the variable display of one start memory stored by the holding means, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. A display control means (for example, step S205 or the like) for controlling the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the above, and a gaming state (for example, time saving) in which at least the control for promoting the winning determination is executed. In the game state), the number of symbol effect executions is determined to determine the number of symbol effects (for example, provisional fluctuations) in which the identification symbol variation effect and stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The means (for example, step S324 or the like) and the effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means are provided. The effect mode determining means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determination means into predetermined units, and divides the symbol effect into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start storage. The specific effect determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining an effect mode to be performed during execution is provided, and the specific effect determining means is said to be specific when a specific start memory is stored by the holding means. An effect that straddles the start memory stored before the start memory and the specific start memory. When the mode can be determined, but the effect mode that straddles the specific start memory and the start memory stored after the specific start memory is not determined, and the concealment effect is executed. As an indicator of the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. .. ..

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional fluctuation) to be performed is determined. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination can be made appropriate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling that can be given to the player, and by extension, to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. Further, since the player can execute the display effect without being aware of the variable display in the start storage unit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed. Moreover, when the concealment effect is being executed, the effect is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units to indicate the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning determination is suppressed, the player's gaze can be directed to the above-mentioned production mode, and it is possible to further suppress the deterioration of the interest. Will be.

In addition, in determining the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units, it is stored (variably displayed first) before a specific start memory (for example, reach variation effect). It is possible to determine an effect mode that straddles the start memory and the specific start memory. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest. On the other hand, the effect mode straddling the specific start memory and the start memory stored (variably displayed later) after the specific start memory is not determined. As a result, the player's gaze can be directed to the variable effect of the identification symbol performed in a specific mode rather than the effect mode performed during the execution of the symbol effect, and the variable effect can be expected. Can be done. Here, the "specific start memory" corresponds to a start memory in which a variable display is performed that can give the player a feeling of expectation that the result of the winning determination is a specific result, for example, a reach fluctuation or the like. do.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above further includes a hold effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) that controls the display means to display an image related to the start memory stored in the hold means. The holding effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed, the image related to the start storage stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed. It is something to do.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined for the start memory stored by the hold means. In combination with this, the degree of progress since the control that promotes the winning judgment is started (that is, the number of times the starting memory is digested while the control that promotes the winning judgment is executed (the game executed). It becomes difficult to grasp the number)). As a result, the player can be made to pay close attention to the production mode performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability is high in the winning judgment, and the execution period of the control for promoting the winning judgment can be further reduced. It is possible to make the player even less aware.

(3) In the gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2), the effect mode determining means includes the specific starting memory in one or a plurality of starting memories stored by the holding means. When not, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the effect mode for the last start memory stored by the hold means is determined. Is not the specific start memory, but has a suggestion effect determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining an effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode. It is a thing.

According to the gaming machine of the above (3), when a specific start memory is not included in one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, it is not necessary to redetermine the effect mode, so that the control is performed. Although it is unlikely that the above burden will increase, it is considered difficult to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect. Therefore, it is suggested that the effect mode for the last memorized start memory among the start memory stored by the holding means is the variation effect of the identification symbol in the specific mode even though it is not a specific start memory. By deciding on the effect mode, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation for the display effect.

According to the present invention, since it is possible to preferably perform a specific game state that is performed separately from the special game, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 29]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after the special gaming is completed to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-). See No. 122447).

However, in the case of a gaming machine controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled to the specific gaming state is lengthened, the winning probability in the winning determination must be lowered. There is a risk that the interest will decline. On the other hand, if the period controlled by the specific gaming state is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, the interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to preferably perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing variable display is provided, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. A lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control (for example, a time-saving gaming state) that promotes the winning determination as compared with a normal gaming state, and a winning probability in the winning determination, which is a possible gaming machine, is a normal game. A probability changing means that can be set to a higher probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) than the state, and a concealment effect that makes it unclear whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability (for example). , Concealment A stage 2002) can be executed (for example, step S205) and information about the variable display that has not been performed yet can be stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start memory. When the variable display is performed on the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and one start memory stored by the holding means, the variable display on the next start memory of the one start memory is displayed. A display control means (for example, step S205) that controls the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol by using the effect time until the effect is performed, and at least a control that promotes the winning determination are executed. In the game state, the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) for determining the number of executions of the symbol effect in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. ), And an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining an effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means, and the effect mode determining means is said. When a specific start memory is not included in the start memory stored by the hold means, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the start memory is stored by the hold means. In determining the effect mode for all the start memories, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units, and the symbol effect is divided into the predetermined units. A feature that determines the effect mode (for example, character subtraction effect) performed during execution. A gaming machine characterized by having a constant effect determining means (for example, step S372 or the like).

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional fluctuation) to be performed is determined. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination can be made appropriate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling that can be given to the player, and by extension, to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. Further, since the player can execute the display effect without being aware of the variable display in the start storage unit, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed. Moreover, when the concealment effect is being executed, the effect is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units to indicate the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning determination is suppressed, the player's gaze can be directed to the above-mentioned production mode, and it is possible to further suppress the deterioration of the interest. Will be.

By the way, when the start memory stored by the hold means does not include the specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation), the start memory stored by the hold means is included. Since the burden on control is less than when a specific start memory is included and the effect mode can be determined for more start memories, all start memories stored by the holding means can be used. On the other hand, the production mode is determined.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the game machine according to (1) above, the identification symbol is based on the starting port (for example, the second starting port 440) where the game ball can win a prize and the winning of the game ball to the starting port. Further provided with a variation pattern determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) for determining the variation pattern when the variable display is performed, the holding means (for example, the main CPU 101) means that the game ball has won a prize at the starting port. Based on this, the start storage can be held, and the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, the sub CPU201) is stored in the holding means when the game ball wins a prize in the starting opening. The number of executions of the symbol effect with respect to the above is determined based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the start memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively long fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is large, and if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively short fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is small. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are executed for one start memory. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the display means to display the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means. Etc.), and the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. It is characterized by doing.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined for the start memory stored by the hold means. In combination with this, the degree of progress since the control that promotes the winning judgment is started (that is, the number of times the starting memory is digested while the control that promotes the winning judgment is executed (the game executed). It becomes difficult to grasp the number)). As a result, the player can be made to pay close attention to the production mode performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability is high in the winning judgment, and the execution period of the control for promoting the winning judgment can be further reduced. It is possible to make the player even less aware.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably perform a specific game state that is performed separately from the special game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 30]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after the special gaming is completed to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-). See No. 122447).

However, in the case of a gaming machine controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled to the specific gaming state is lengthened, the winning probability in the winning determination must be lowered. There is a risk that the interest will decline. On the other hand, if the period controlled by the specific gaming state is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, the interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to preferably perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is
A lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that makes a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display) that makes a variable display of an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A gaming machine provided with a display device 16) and capable of performing a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result, which is a normal game. The lottery promotion control means capable of executing the control for promoting the winning determination as compared with the state (for example, the time-saving gaming state) and the winning probability in the winning determination are higher in probability (for example, higher probability) than in the normal gaming state. Concealment that can execute a probability changing means that can be set as a game state) and a concealment effect (for example, concealment A stage 2002) that makes it unclear whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability. Reservation means (for example, step S54, step S55) that can store up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information about the effect executing means (for example, step S205 and the like) and the variable display that has not yet been performed as start storage. Etc.) and when the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by the holding means, the identification is performed using the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. It is stored by the holding means in the display control means (for example, step S205 or the like) for controlling the fluctuation effect and the stop effect of the symbol, and at least in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed. A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) for determining the number of executions of the symbol effect in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory, and one stored by the hold means. Alternatively, the effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining the effect mode for the plurality of start memory is provided, and the effect mode determining means is stored by the hold means for one or more start-ups. When a specific start memory is not included in the memory, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the holding means, and for all the start memories stored by the holding means. In determining the effect mode, the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means is divided into predetermined units (regardless of the unit of the start memory). An effect mode (for example, reduction of characters) performed during the execution of the symbol effect. The effect mode for the last stored start memory among the specific effect determining means for determining the arithmetic effect) and the start memory stored by the hold means, even though the start memory is not the specific start memory. It is characterized by having a suggestion effect determining means (for example, step S358, etc.) for determining an effect mode (for example, a reach precursor effect of Gase) that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in the specific aspect. ..

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional fluctuation) to be performed is determined. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination can be made appropriate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling that can be given to the player, and by extension, to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. Further, since the player can execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the start storage unit, the degree of progress after the control for promoting the winning determination is started (that is, the control for promoting the winning determination) is performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period to be executed). Moreover, when the concealment effect is being executed, the effect is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units to indicate the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning determination is suppressed, the player's gaze can be directed to the above-mentioned production mode, and it is possible to further suppress the deterioration of the interest. Will be.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. It may be difficult to make it. Therefore, in this case, the effect mode is determined for all the start memories stored by the hold means, and the effect mode for the last start memory stored by the hold means is set as the start mode. By deciding on an effect mode that suggests that the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode even though the memory is not a specific start memory, the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. ing.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, a variation pattern when the identification symbol is variably displayed based on the starting port where the game ball can win and the winning of the game ball to the starting port. A variable pattern determining means (for example, step S173 or the like) for determining the above is further provided, and the holding means is configured to be able to hold the starting memory based on the winning of the game ball at the starting opening. When the game ball wins a prize in the start opening, the symbol effect execution number determining means determines the number of executions of the symbol effect for the start memory stored in the holding means by the variation pattern determining means. It is characterized by making a decision based on a pattern.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect determined for the start memory stored in the holding means is determined based on the fluctuation pattern. More specifically, if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively long fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is large, and if the fluctuation pattern has a relatively short fluctuation time, the number of executions of the symbol effect is small. Therefore, the variation in the time required for one symbol effect becomes small, and it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that one or more symbol effects are executed for one start memory. As a result, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the hold effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the display means to display the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means. Etc.), and the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. It is characterized by doing.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined for the start memory stored by the hold means. In addition to this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the control for promoting the winning determination is started (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed). As a result, the player can be made to pay close attention to the production mode performed as an indication of the degree of expectation that the winning probability is high in the winning judgment, and the execution period of the control for promoting the winning judgment can be further reduced. It is possible to make the player even less aware.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably perform a specific game state that is performed separately from the special game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 31]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that controls a gaming state after the special gaming is completed to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a time-saving gaming state (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-). See No. 122447).

However, in the case of a gaming machine controlled to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player separately from the special game, if the period controlled to the specific gaming state is lengthened, the winning probability in the winning determination must be lowered. There is a risk that the interest will decline. On the other hand, if the period controlled by the specific gaming state is shortened, the player may feel disadvantageous, and in any case, the interest may be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to preferably perform a specific game state performed separately from a special game, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing variable display is provided, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. A lottery promotion control means capable of executing a control (for example, a time-saving gaming state) that promotes the winning determination as compared with a normal gaming state, and a winning probability in the winning determination, which is a possible gaming machine, is a normal game. A probability changing means that can be set to a higher probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) than the state, and a concealment effect that makes it unclear whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability (for example). , Concealment A stage 2002) can be executed (for example, step S205) and information about the variable display that has not been performed yet can be stored up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start memory. When the variable display is performed on the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) and one start memory stored by the holding means, the variable display on the next start memory of the one start memory is displayed. A display control means (for example, step S205) that controls the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol by using the effect time until the effect is performed, and at least a control that promotes the winning determination are executed. In the game state, the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324, etc.) for determining the number of executions of the symbol effect in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. ), And an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) capable of determining an effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means, and the effect mode determining means is said. When one or more start memories stored by the hold means do not include a specific start memory (reach or jackpot) in which the variation effect of the identification symbol is performed in a specific mode, the start memory is stored by the hold means. Among the start-up memories to be performed, the effect number determination means for determining the effect mode for a different number of start-up memories each time, and the design for determining the effect mode for the start-up memory to be determined for the effect mode. The symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the effect execution number determination means is divided into predetermined units. (Regardless of the unit of the start memory), the specific effect determining means for determining the effect mode (for example, the subtraction effect of the character) performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units, and the different each time. It is suggested that the effect mode for the last memorized start memory among the number of start memories is that the identification symbol variation effect is performed in the specific mode even though the start memory is not the specific start memory. It is characterized by having a suggestion effect determining means (for example, step S358 or the like) for determining an effect mode (for example, a reach precursor effect of Gase).

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), at least in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional fluctuation) to be performed is determined. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Therefore, while suppressing the period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the period is suppressed, and the winning probability in the winning determination can be made appropriate. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the disadvantageous feeling that can be given to the player, and by extension, to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. Further, since the player can execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the start storage unit, the degree of progress after the control for promoting the winning determination is started (that is, the control for promoting the winning determination) is performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period to be executed). Moreover, when the concealment effect is being executed, the effect is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units to indicate the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Since the mode is determined, even if the execution period of the control that promotes the winning determination is suppressed, the player's gaze can be directed to the above-mentioned production mode, and it is possible to further suppress the deterioration of the interest. Will be.

Further, when the start memory stored by the holding means does not include a specific start memory in which the variable display is performed in a specific mode (for example, reach variation effect), the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. It may be difficult to make it. Therefore, in this case, the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined to be different each time, and the effect mode for the last start-up memory stored by the holding means is determined. By determining the effect mode that suggests that the identification symbol variation effect is performed in a specific mode even though the start memory is not a specific start memory, the player's expectation for the display effect is maintained. I am trying to be done.

The reason why the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined to be different each time is that the identification symbol is varied and displayed in a specific mode from the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode. (Even if an effect mode suggesting that the identification symbol is variablely displayed in a specific mode is displayed, the suggestion effect mode is not good) cannot be easily grasped. Because.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the effect target number determining means is characterized in that the number of start memories to be determined in the effect mode is determined by lottery.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode is determined by lottery, so that the number of start-up memories to be determined for the effect mode is easily and randomly determined. be able to.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, the holding effect control means (for example, step S205) for controlling the display means to display the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means. Etc.), and the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. It is characterized by doing.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the starting memory stored in the holding means is not displayed on the display means, the player should not be further aware of the variable display in the starting storage unit. Can be done.

According to the present invention, it is possible to preferably perform a specific game state that is performed separately from the special game, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[Appendix 32]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, the gaming state after the special gaming is completed is set to a specific gaming state such as a time-saving gaming state, and whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high is concealed and determined in advance. There is known a gaming machine that discloses whether or not there is a high probability when the number of games played is digested (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As described above, some gaming machines that keep secret whether or not they have a high probability in a specific gaming state are provided with an effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state.

However, in a gaming machine whose specific gaming state ends when a predetermined number of games is digested, the player can easily know the end timing of the specific gaming state simply by grasping the digested number of games. It ends up. When the end timing of the specific game state approaches, even if a production suggesting the degree of expectation of high probability is performed, the expectation of high probability may be diminished and the interest may be reduced. ..

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to make it difficult to grasp the end timing of a specific gaming state and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing variable display is provided, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. A lottery promotion control means capable of executing control for promoting the winning determination (for example, a time-saving gaming state) as compared with a normal gaming state until the winning determination is performed a predetermined number of times, and the above-mentioned A probability changing means capable of setting the winning probability in the winning determination to a higher probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) than in a normal gaming state at least while the control for promoting the winning determination is being executed. A concealment effect execution means (for example, step S205, etc.) capable of executing a concealment effect (for example, concealment A stage 2002) that makes it unclear whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability, and a line still performed. A holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) that can store up to a predetermined number (for example, four) of information about the variable display that has not been stored as start storage, and one start that is stored by the holding means. When the variable display of the memory is performed, it is controlled so that the variable effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. In the gaming state in which the display control means (for example, the sub CPU 201) and at least the control for promoting the winning determination are executed, the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are obtained with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. It is possible to determine the effect mode for the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) for determining the execution number of the symbol effect to be performed, and one or more start storages stored by the holding means. The effect mode determining means is provided with an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372, etc.), and the effect mode determining means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units and starts the operation. It is characterized by having a specific effect determining means (for example, step S372) for determining an effect mode performed during execution of a symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of memory.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, in the gaming state in which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional fluctuation) to be performed is determined. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Therefore, even if the end timing of the period in which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed is predetermined, it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the execution period.

Further, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. Further, since the player can execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the start storage unit, the degree of progress after the control for promoting the winning determination is started (that is, the control for promoting the winning determination) is performed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the remaining period to be executed). Moreover, when the concealment effect is being executed, the effect is performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units to indicate the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Since the mode is determined, the player's consciousness can be directed toward the above-mentioned production mode rather than the remaining period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, and it is possible to further suppress the deterioration of the interest. Will be.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the holding effect control means further provided with a hold effect control means for controlling the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means to be displayed on the display means. Is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed, the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined for the start memory stored by the hold means. In addition to this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the control for promoting the winning determination is started (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed). As a result, the player can be interested in the index production that can estimate the degree of expectation that the winning probability is high in the winning judgment, and the end timing of the control that promotes the winning judgment can be further adjusted. It can be made more difficult for the player to grasp.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, when the effect mode determining means has a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means, one of the plurality of start memories is stored. A part of the symbol effect of the number of executions determined for the start memory and a part of the symbol effect of the number of executions determined for the other start memory are divided as a predetermined unit straddling a plurality of start memories. It is characterized by having a specific effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. do.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to determine the production mode so as to straddle a plurality of starting memories without being bound by the result of one gaming. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the start storage unit, and it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the control that promotes the winning determination.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by making it difficult to grasp the end timing of a specific gaming state.

[Appendix 33]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, the gaming state after the special gaming is completed is set to a specific gaming state such as a time-saving gaming state, and whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high is concealed and determined in advance. There is known a gaming machine that discloses whether or not there is a high probability when the number of games played is digested (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As described above, some gaming machines that conceal whether or not they have a high probability in a specific gaming state are provided with a highly probable suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state.

However, in a gaming machine in which a high-probability suggestion effect is performed that conceals whether or not the probability is high in the specific gaming state and suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state, the probability is high. If this is not the case, it is easy to select a production with a low degree of expectation, so if such a production with a low degree of expectation is performed, there is a risk that the interest will decline.

On the other hand, if a production with a high degree of expectation is performed even though the probability is not high, it only gives the player a sense of unnecessary expectation, and the disappointment given to the player at the end of the specific gaming state is immeasurable.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to make the display effect performed in a specific gaming state interesting and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) that makes a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of certain conditions, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing variable display is provided, and a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. A lottery promotion control means (for example, step S171, etc.) capable of executing a control (for example, a time-saving game state) that promotes the winning determination as compared with a normal gaming state, which is a possible gaming machine, over a predetermined period. With a probability changing means capable of setting the winning probability in the winning determination to a higher probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) than in a normal gaming state at least while the control for promoting the winning determination is being executed. In addition to providing a concealment period (for example, concealment A stage 2002) in which it is possible to execute a display effect that does not clearly indicate whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability, the winning in the winning determination in the concealment period is provided. An index production execution means (for example, step S370, etc.) capable of executing an index production that can give a feeling of expectation that the probability is the high probability, and a scenario of the index production performed as an overall production during the concealment period. The scenario determining means (for example, a scenario presetting process (FIG. 136)) that is determined in advance before the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, and the scenario determining means is a control that promotes the winning determination. It is characterized in that the scenario of the index production is determined so that it is clearly shown whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability at the end of.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the scenario of the index production performed as the entire production in the concealment period is determined in advance before the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, so that the index is determined according to the concealment period. You can proceed with the production scenario. That is, before the end of the concealment period, if the index production determines whether it is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player, it may be annoying. In this respect, according to the present invention, the interest in the index production can be maintained until the end of the concealment period, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed as start storage, and A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example,) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. Step S324 and the like), and an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 and the like) capable of determining an effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means are further provided to determine the effect mode. The means divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means, and the predetermined unit is irrespective of the unit of the start memory. It has a specific effect determining means (for example, step S372, etc.) for determining an effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the units of.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the retaining means. .. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

The "variable display" means a series of displays from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification symbol for one start memory, and the variation of the identification symbol for one start memory. Even if the effect and the stop effect are repeated a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, a hold effect control means (for example, a sub) that controls the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means to be displayed in a predetermined display area. The CPU 201) is further provided, and the hold effect control means controls so that the image related to the start storage stored in the hold means is not displayed at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determination means is displayed. It is something to do.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined for the start memory stored by the hold means. In addition to this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the control for promoting the winning determination is started (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed). As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the index production that can give a feeling of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high.

According to the present invention, it is possible to make the display effect performed in the specific gaming state interesting, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 34]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, the gaming state after the special gaming is completed is set to a specific gaming state such as a time-saving gaming state, and whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high is concealed and determined in advance. There is known a gaming machine that discloses whether or not there is a high probability when the number of games played is digested (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As described above, some gaming machines that conceal whether or not they have a high probability in a specific gaming state are provided with a highly probable suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state.

However, in a gaming machine in which a high-probability suggestion effect is performed that conceals whether or not the probability is high in the specific gaming state and suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state, the probability is high. If this is not the case, it is easy to select a production with a low degree of expectation, so if such a production with a low degree of expectation is performed, there is a risk that the interest will decline.

On the other hand, if a production with a high degree of expectation is performed even though the probability is not high, it only gives the player a sense of unnecessary expectation, and the disappointment given to the player at the end of the specific gaming state is immeasurable.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to make the display effect performed in a specific gaming state interesting and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing variable display is provided, and a special game (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. Information about the variable display, which is a possible gaming machine and has not been performed yet, is stored by the holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number as starting storage, and the holding means. When the variable display is performed on the start memory of the one, the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed using the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed. A display control means (for example, step S205 or the like) for controlling the winning, and a lottery promotion control means capable of executing the control for promoting the winning determination (for example, the time-saving gaming state) as compared with the normal gaming state. , A probability changing means capable of setting the winning probability in the winning determination to a higher probability (for example, a high-probability gaming state) than in a normal gaming state at least while the control for promoting the winning determination is being executed. In addition to providing a concealment period in which it is possible to execute a display effect that does not clearly indicate whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability, the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability in the concealment period. A control for promoting the winning determination of the index effect executing means (for example, step S370, etc.) capable of executing the index effect that can give a feeling of expectation, and the index effect scenario performed as the entire effect during the concealment period. With respect to the scenario determining means (for example, the scenario presetting process (FIG. 136)) to be determined in advance and the start memory stored by the holding means at least during the concealment period, the identification symbol of the identification symbol. The index effect execution means is provided with a symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 or the like) for determining the number of executions of the symbol effect in which the variable effect and the stop effect are performed. It is stated that the symbol effect having a determined number of executions is divided into predetermined units, and the index effect is performed as an effect performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. If you have a special production decision means to decide In addition, the scenario determining means sets the scenario of the index effect so that it is clearly shown whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability when the control for promoting the winning determination is completed. It is characterized by making a decision.

According to the gaming machine of the above (1), at least during the concealment period, the execution of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. The number is determined. That is, where the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, at least during the concealment period, once or multiple times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined, the variable display for one start memory is apparently as if the variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period. Further, since the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory, it is more difficult to grasp the end timing of the concealment period.

Further, as an effect performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into predetermined units, an index effect that can give a feeling of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high is determined. This index effect is determined in advance before the control for promoting the winning determination is executed in the scenario performed as the entire effect during the concealment period, and when the control for promoting the winning determination is completed, the winning in the winning determination is completed. Whether or not the probability is considered to be high is clearly indicated.

In this way, while keeping the player from being aware of the end timing of the concealment period and eventually the end timing of the control that promotes the winning judgment, the index production that can give a feeling of expectation that the winning probability in the winning judgment is high is performed. At the same time, when the control for promoting the winning determination is completed, it is clarified by the index effect whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Therefore, unlike the conventional gaming machine in which whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high is disclosed when the concealment period elapses for a certain period, the end timing of the concealment period and the end of the control for promoting the winning determination By making the timing unaware of the player, it is possible to perform an effect such as clearly indicating whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is a high probability by the outcome of the index effect. For example, when the index effect is a game effect between an ally and an enemy, it is possible to realize an effect such as a high probability determination when the ally wins.

The term "variable display of the identification symbol" as used herein means a series of displays from the start of the variable display of the identification symbol to the stop display for one start memory, and is used as one start memory. On the other hand, even if the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are repeatedly performed a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

Further, "when the variable display of one start memory is performed, the effect time until the variable display of the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is used to perform the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol. Is performed "means that it includes not only the time during which the variable display is performed for one start memory, but also all or part of the time required for the interval until the variable display for the next start memory is performed. Therefore, the "design effect in which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed" is until the stop effect of the identification symbol is performed in the middle of the variable display, and the above interval is also performed at the end of the variable display. The purpose is to include.

(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above further includes a hold effect control means (for example, a sub CPU 201) that controls the display means to display an image related to the start memory stored in the hold means. The holding effect control means is characterized in that, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed, the image related to the start storage stored in the hold means is controlled so as not to be displayed. do.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined for the start memory stored by the hold means. In addition to this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the control for promoting the winning determination is started (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed). As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in the index production that can give a feeling of expectation that the winning probability in the winning judgment is high, and the winning probability in the winning judgment is high in the outcome of the index production. It is possible to give the player the impression that the presence or absence is disclosed.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (1) or (2) above, when the special effect determining means has a plurality of start memories stored by the hold means, one of the plurality of start memories is stored. A part of the symbol effect of the number of executions determined for the start memory and a part of the symbol effect of the number of executions determined for the other start memory are divided as a predetermined unit straddling a plurality of start memories. It is characterized by having a specific effect mode determining means (for example, step S372) capable of determining an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. do.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to determine the production mode so as to straddle a plurality of starting memories without being bound by the result of one gaming. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the start storage unit, and it is more difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period and the end timing of the control that promotes the winning determination. be able to.

According to the present invention, it is possible to make the display effect performed in the specific gaming state interesting, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 35]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, the gaming state after the special gaming is completed is set to a specific gaming state such as a time-saving gaming state, and whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high is concealed and determined in advance. There is known a gaming machine that discloses whether or not there is a high probability when the number of games played is digested (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240529).

As described above, some gaming machines that conceal whether or not they have a high probability in a specific gaming state are provided with a highly probable suggestion effect that suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state.

However, in a gaming machine in which a high-probability suggestion effect is performed that conceals whether or not the probability is high in the specific gaming state and suggests the degree of expectation that the probability is high in the specific gaming state, the probability is high. If this is not the case, it is easy to select a production with a low degree of expectation, so if such a production with a low degree of expectation is performed, there is a risk that the interest will decline.

On the other hand, if a production with a high degree of expectation is performed even though the probability is not high, it only gives the player a sense of unnecessary expectation, and the disappointment given to the player at the end of the specific gaming state is immeasurable.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to make the display effect performed in a specific gaming state interesting and to suppress a decrease in interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention has a lottery means (for example, step S117, etc.) for performing a winning determination (for example, a big hit determination) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an identification symbol based on the result of the winning determination. A display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) for performing variable display is provided, and a special game (for example, a big hit game state) advantageous to the player is executed based on the result of the winning determination being a specific result. A lottery promotion control means capable of executing control for promoting the winning determination (for example, a time-saving gaming state) as compared with a normal gaming state, and a winning probability in the winning determination, which is a possible gaming machine. , At least while the control for promoting the winning determination is being executed, the probability changing means capable of setting a higher probability (for example, a high probability gaming state) than the normal gaming state, and the winning probability in the winning determination. In addition to providing a concealment period (for example, concealment A stage 2002) in which it is possible to execute a display effect that does not clearly indicate whether or not is the high probability, the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability in the concealment period. The winning determination is promoted by the index effect executing means capable of executing the index effect (for example, the subtraction effect of the character) that can be guessed whether or not, and the scenario of the index effect performed as the entire effect during the concealment period. The lottery promotion control means includes a scenario determination means that is determined in advance before the control is executed, and the lottery promotion control means is one of a plurality of periods so that the period for executing the control for promoting the winning determination is different each time. The promotion period determining means (for example, step S172, etc.) is provided, and the scenario determining means ends the control for promoting the winning determination according to the period determined by the promoting period determining means. At that time, it is characterized in that the scenario of the index production is determined so that it is clearly shown whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, the scenario of the index effect performed as the overall effect during the concealment period is determined in advance before the control for promoting the winning determination is executed, and the winning determination is promoted. When the control ends, it is clearly indicated whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Here, the index effect is an effect that makes it possible to infer whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is the high probability. Further, since the execution period of the control for promoting the winning determination is determined to be different each time, it is difficult for the player to grasp the end timing of the concealment period.

In this way, while keeping the player from being aware of the end timing of the concealment period and eventually the end timing of the control that promotes the winning judgment, the index production that makes it possible to guess whether or not the winning probability in the winning judgment is high is performed. At the same time, when the control for promoting the winning determination is completed, it is clarified by the index effect whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high. Therefore, unlike the conventional gaming machine in which whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is high is disclosed when the concealment period elapses for a certain period, the end timing of the concealment period and the end of the control for promoting the winning determination By making the timing unaware of the player, it is possible to perform an effect such as clearly indicating whether or not the winning probability in the winning determination is a high probability by the outcome of the index effect. For example, when the index effect is a game effect between an ally and an enemy, it is possible to realize an effect such as a high probability determination when the ally wins.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, a holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing up to a predetermined number of information about the variable display that has not yet been performed as start storage, and A symbol effect execution number determining means (for example,) capable of determining the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the change effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means. Step S324 and the like), and the effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 and the like) capable of determining the effect mode for one or more start storages stored by the holding means, and the effect mode determining means. Divides the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means into predetermined units with respect to the start memory stored by the hold means, and determines the predetermined unit regardless of the unit of the start memory. It is characterized by having a specific effect determining means (for example, step S370 or the like) for determining an effect mode performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into units.

According to the gaming machine of (2) above, the number of executions of the symbol effect (for example, provisional variation) in which the identification symbol variation effect and the stop effect are performed is determined for the start memory stored by the holding means. .. That is, while the symbol effect is normally performed once for each start memory stored by the hold means, the symbol effect is executed once or a plurality of times for each start memory stored by the hold means. Since the number is determined, even though it is a variable display for one start memory, it looks as if a variable display for a plurality of start memories is performed. Moreover, the symbol effect determined for each start memory is divided into predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start memory. Then, the effect mode to be performed during the execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units is determined. Therefore, a part of the plurality of symbol effects determined for one start memory and a plurality of determinations for the other start memory in which the variable display is performed after the variable display of the one start memory. It is possible that an effect mode that spans a part of the design effect may be determined. This makes it possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one game. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

The "variable display" means a series of displays from the start to the stop display of the variation display of the identification symbol for one start memory, and the variation of the identification symbol for one start memory. Even if the effect and the stop effect are repeated a plurality of times, the number of variable displays is one.

Further, the "stop effect" of the identification symbol is a stop effect of the identification symbol (for example, temporary stop) performed in the middle of one variable display and a stop of the identification symbol performed when one variable display is completed. The purpose is to include both directing (for example, main stop).

(3) The gaming machine according to (2) above is further provided with a hold effect control means for controlling the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means to be displayed in a predetermined display area, and the hold effect control. The means controls so that the image related to the start storage stored in the holding means is not displayed, at least when the effect mode determined by the specific effect determining means is displayed.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, since the image related to the start memory stored in the hold means is not displayed on the display means, the number of executions of the symbol effect is determined for the start memory stored by the hold means. In addition to this, it becomes difficult to grasp the degree of progress since the control for promoting the winning determination is started (that is, the remaining period during which the control for promoting the winning determination is executed). As a result, the player can be interested in the index production that can estimate the degree of expectation that the winning probability in the winning determination is high.

According to the present invention, it is possible to make the display effect performed in the specific gaming state interesting, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

[Appendix 36]
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a pachislot machine, a gaming machine is known in which a winning determination is made and a variable display of a symbol is performed, and when the variable display symbol is stopped and displayed, the result of the game is shown. Then, when the result of the game is a specific result, a special game that is advantageous to the player is performed.

In this type of gaming machine, before the result of the winning determination is displayed, a display effect is performed to expect that a special game may be performed so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced (for example,). See JP-A-2006-2469664).

However, since the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 is displayed for the winning determination unit to the last, if the display effect is not such that a special game can be expected to be performed, the display effect is changing. There is a risk that the sense of anticipation for the variable display of the design will be lost, and at that point the interest will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to prevent the player from being conscious of the display effect in the winning determination unit, and to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

(1) The gaming machine according to the present invention relates to a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 16) in which a variable display of an identification symbol is performed based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition, and the variable display which has not yet been performed. A holding means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.) capable of storing information (for example, a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for determining a symbol, etc.) up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) as start storage, and the holding. When the variable display is performed for one start memory stored by means (for example, step S54, step S55, etc.), the effect time until the variable display for the next start memory of the one start memory is performed is set. The display control means for controlling the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol using the identification symbol, and the symbol for which the variation effect and the stop effect of the identification symbol are performed with respect to the start memory stored by the holding means. One or more start memories of the symbol effect execution number determining means (for example, step S324 and the like) capable of determining the execution number of the effect (for example, provisional variation) and the start memory stored by the hold means are set as the effect section. As the section effect to be determined and performed in the effect section, the effect mode is provided with an effect mode determining means (for example, step S372 or the like) capable of determining the effect mode for the start memory included in the effect section. The determining means determines whether or not the section effect is being executed, and when it is determined that the section effect is not being executed, the determination means again determines the effect section and the section effect performed in the effect section. By determining the effect mode, the section effect can be repeated without interruption.

According to the gaming machine of (1) above, one or a plurality of start memories stored by the holding means are determined as the effect section. Since such a section effect is repeated without interruption, the player can be made not aware that the effect is a start memory unit, and the expectation can be maintained for a long period of time.

It should be noted that the mode in which the above-mentioned section effect is "repeatedly performed without interruption" includes, of course, a mode in which the reserved start memory is performed without interruption as long as there is a reserved start memory. For example, even if the demo effect is executed in the middle of the process, if the section effect is executed when the start memory is held after that, it is included in the above "repeatedly performed without interruption". .. Further, when there are a plurality of starting ports (for example, when there are a first starting port 5442 and a second starting port 440), and a game ball enters one of the starting ports (for example, the first starting port 5442). However, when a game ball enters the other starting port (for example, the second starting port 440), the section effect is repeatedly performed without interruption.

(2) In the gaming machine according to (1) above, the effect mode determining means produces the symbol effect of the number of executions determined by the symbol effect execution number determining means with respect to the start memory included in the effect section. Those having a section effect mode determining means (for example, sub CPU 201) that is divided into predetermined units and determines an effect mode to be performed during execution of the symbol effect divided into the predetermined units regardless of the unit of the start storage. Is.

According to the gaming machine of the above (2), since the effect mode is determined regardless of the unit of the start memory, it is also possible to determine the effect mode so as to span a plurality of start memories. In addition, it is possible to execute a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the start memory unit, and it is possible to provide a novel game in which it is difficult to make the player aware of the game result for each start memory.

(3) In the gaming machine according to (2) above, the section effect mode determining means includes a part of the symbol effect of the number of executions determined for one start memory included in the effect section, and the effect. It is possible to divide a part of the symbol effect of the number of executions determined for other start memories included in the section as a predetermined unit straddling a plurality of start memories.

According to the gaming machine of (3) above, it is possible to determine the production mode regardless of the result of one gaming. In addition, since the player can perform a display effect that does not make the player aware of the variable display in the starting memory unit, the range of the effect can be expanded and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Regarding the "expectation degree" described in the above-mentioned appendices 4 to 8, appendix 16 and appendix 19, the degree of expectation for a predetermined internal state (that is, an advantageous state) such as a big hit of each advance notice effect or a high-probability gaming state (that is, an advantageous state). (Reliability) is the probability that each notice effect will be executed and become a "big hit" or "high probability game state", and the probability that each notice effect will be executed and become a "big hit" or "high probability game state". It is a numerical value divided by the sum of the probabilities of becoming a predetermined internal state (that is, a disadvantageous state) such as the probability that each advance notice effect is executed and becomes a "missing" or "low probability gaming state". However, since the "expectation degree" can include the case where the degree of expectation is 100% and the case where the degree of expectation is 0%, there are cases where the above division does not hold strictly (for example, the production is executed). It is not suitable to divide 1 by 0 because it may include the case of deterministically notifying the game state or winning, and in this case, the expectation includes 100%, 0%, or the concept of presence or absence. Will be).

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware of the display effect in the winning determination unit, so that it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest.

It should be noted that all the inventions described in this embodiment and other embodiments may be applied to pachinko machines, game machines, slot machines and all other gaming machines without departing from the spirit of the invention. can.

16 Liquid crystal display 101 Main CPU
104 Sub SPU

Claims (1)

A display means in which a variable display of a special symbol is performed based on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
A holding means that can store up to a predetermined number of information related to the special symbol as a holding storage,
An effect control means capable of controlling the variable display effect while the variable display of the special symbol is performed, and an effect control means.
An effect mode determining means capable of determining an effect mode for the hold memory stored by the hold means,
With multiple production stages that can perform different productions,
Equipped with
The effect mode determining means is
In the first stage of the multiple production stages
When a plurality of reserved storages are stored by the holding means, and the plurality of holding storages include a specific holding storage from which a predetermined expected effect is to be performed, the specific holding storage is used. It is possible to determine the mode in which the variable display effect is performed a plurality of times by performing the variable display of the special symbol according to each of the previous reserved memories.
When a plurality of the specific reserved memories are included in the plurality of reserved memories, the variable display of the earliest predetermined reserved memory in which the variable display effect is performed first among the plurality of specific reserved memories. It is possible to determine the mode of effect for the hold memory until the effect is performed.
The effect control means is
When a plurality of reserved storages are stored by the holding means and the specific holding storages are included in the plurality of holding storages, a predetermined display performed in the variable display effect performed over the plurality of times is performed. The effect is performed on the variable display of the special symbol performed on one of the reserved memories prior to the earliest predetermined reserved memory and the special held storage next to the one reserved memory. It can be controlled to display over the variable display of the design,
In the second stage, which is different from the first stage, out of multiple production stages
When a plurality of reserved storages are stored by the holding means, and the plurality of holding storages include a holding storage in which a specific display effect different from the predetermined display effect is performed, the specific display effect is specified. After the variable display of the special symbol according to the hold memory on which the display effect of is performed is performed, the plurality of hold memories stored after the hold memory on which the specific display effect is to be performed are consecutive. It is possible to produce,
The first effect selection information regarding the operation of the operating means in the same variable display is provided with a special effect that is different from the predetermined display effect and can be performed at different timings in the same variable display. When the special effect based on the above is executed, the special effect based on the second effect selection information regarding the passage of time is not executed, but the operation means is not operated within a predetermined period, so that the first effect selection information is not executed. When the special effect based on the above is not executed, the special effect based on the second effect selection information can be executed based on the elapse of the predetermined period even though the operation means is not operated. A featured gaming machine.

Images